EVSG1000 UserManual en 06

R&S®EVSG1000
VHF/UHF Airnav/Com Analyzer

User Manual
(;ÜÌK2)
1178622702
User Manual
Version 06
This document describes the following R&S®EVSG1000 models with firmware version 1.40 and later:
● R&S®EVSG1000 (1329.8009.02)
Furthermore, it covers the following options:

● R&S®EVSG-B1 Second Signal Proc. Unit (1329.8809.02)
● R&S®EVSG-B2 Battery Management (1329.8815.02)
● R&S®EVSG-B3 Battery Pack (1329.8821.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K1 ILS CRS/CLR Analysis (1329.9005.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K2 VOR Analysis (1329.9011.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K3 MB Analysis (1329.9028.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K4 GBAS Analysis (1329.9034.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K5 SCAT-I Analysis (1329.9040.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K6 COM Analysis (1329.9057.02)
● R&S®EVSG1-K7 LF-Analysis (1329.9163.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K10 RF Spectrum Analysis (1329.9063.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K11 AF Spectrum Analysis (1329.9070.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K12 AF Time Domain Analysis (1329.9086.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K20 GPS Support (1329.9092.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K21 Data Recording (1329.9105.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K22 High Measurement Rate (1329.9111.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K23 Preselector (1329.9128.02)
● R&S®EVSG-K24 Power Sensor Support (1329.9134.02)
● R&S®EVSG1-K25 I/Q Data Streaming (1329.9157.02)
© 2020 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Email: info@rohde-schwarz.com
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
1178.6227.02 | Version 06 | R&S®EVSG1000
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&S®EVSG1000 is abbreviated as R&S EVSG1000.
R&S®EVSG1000 Contents
Contents
1 Getting Started..................................................................................... 13
1.1 Safety Information.......................................................................................................13
1.1.1 Safety Instructions.........................................................................................................13
1.1.2 Labels on the Product................................................................................................... 17
1.1.3 Warning Messages in the Documentation.....................................................................17
1.2 Documentation Overview........................................................................................... 18
1.2.1 Getting Started Manual................................................................................................. 18
1.2.2 User Manuals and Help.................................................................................................18
1.2.3 Printed Safety Instructions............................................................................................ 18
1.2.4 Data Sheets and Brochures.......................................................................................... 18
1.2.5 Release Notes and Open-Source Acknowledgment (OSA)..........................................19
1.3 Key Features................................................................................................................19
1.4 Preparing for Use........................................................................................................ 19
1.4.1 Unpacking and Checking.............................................................................................. 20
1.4.2 Lifting and Carrying....................................................................................................... 20
1.4.3 Choosing the Operating Site......................................................................................... 20
1.4.4 Setting Up the R&S EVSG1000.................................................................................... 21
1.4.4.1 Placing the R&S EVSG1000 on a Bench Top............................................................... 21
1.4.4.2 Mounting the R&S EVSG1000 in a Rack...................................................................... 21
1.4.4.3 Portable Operation........................................................................................................ 22
1.4.5 Connecting to Power.....................................................................................................22
1.4.5.1 Connecting the Provided AC/DC Power Supply Connector..........................................23
1.4.5.2 Connecting an External DC Power Source................................................................... 23
1.4.5.3 Using an Optional Battery Pack (R&S EVSG-B3).........................................................24
1.4.6 Switching On or Off....................................................................................................... 25
1.4.7 Performing an Auto-Calibration.....................................................................................26
1.4.8 Connecting Devices for Signal Input and Output.......................................................... 27
1.4.9 Connecting to LAN........................................................................................................ 27
1.5 Instrument Tour........................................................................................................... 28
1.5.1 Front Panel....................................................................................................................28
1.5.1.1 Power Key.....................................................................................................................29
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 3

1.5.1.2 Display.......................................................................................................................... 29
1.5.1.3 RX1 IN / RX2 IN............................................................................................................ 29
1.5.1.4 USB...............................................................................................................................29
1.5.1.5 AF Out...........................................................................................................................30
1.5.1.6 12 V DC Out..................................................................................................................30
1.5.1.7 System Keys................................................................................................................. 30
1.5.1.8 Softkeys........................................................................................................................ 30
1.5.1.9 Function Keys............................................................................................................... 30
1.5.1.10 Keypad.......................................................................................................................... 31
1.5.1.11 Rotary Knob.................................................................................................................. 32
1.5.1.12 Navigation Keys............................................................................................................ 32
1.5.2 Rear Panel.................................................................................................................... 33
1.5.2.1 Power Supply................................................................................................................ 33
1.5.2.2 Li-Ion Battery Pack........................................................................................................34
1.5.2.3 LAN (Ethernet).............................................................................................................. 34
1.5.2.4 RS232 GPS...................................................................................................................34
1.5.2.5 PPS In........................................................................................................................... 34
1.5.2.6 Trigger In....................................................................................................................... 34
1.5.2.7 LF In (Baseband/Low Frequency Input)........................................................................34
1.5.2.8 Demod Out....................................................................................................................35
1.5.2.9 Loudspeaker................................................................................................................. 35
1.5.2.10 Device ID.......................................................................................................................35
1.5.3 Accessories...................................................................................................................35
1.6 Operating Basics.........................................................................................................38
1.6.1 Understanding the Display Information......................................................................... 38
1.6.2 Manual Operation..........................................................................................................40
1.6.2.1 Changing Settings and Activating Functions.................................................................40
1.6.2.2 Entering Data................................................................................................................ 41
1.6.2.3 Getting Help.................................................................................................................. 43
1.6.3 Manual Operation from a VNC Viewer.......................................................................... 44
1.6.4 Remote Control............................................................................................................. 47
2 Measurements and Results.................................................................48
3 Configuring the Input Signal and Measurement Mode.....................51
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 4

3.1 Input Signal Settings.................................................................................................. 51

3.2 Receiver Board............................................................................................................52
3.3 Measurement Mode.....................................................................................................52
4 Numeric Measurement Modes............................................................ 54

4.1 ILS Localizer and ILS Glidepath (GP) Modes........................................................... 54
4.1.1 Localizer Basics............................................................................................................ 54
4.1.2 Glide Slope Basics........................................................................................................ 55
4.1.3 ILS Localizer and Glidepath Measurements and Results............................................. 56
4.1.3.1 RF Level and Frequency Display.................................................................................. 61
4.1.3.2 IF Spectrum Preview.....................................................................................................62
4.1.3.3 LF Level, Frequency, and Spectrum Display.................................................................63
4.1.3.4 ILS Localizer and Glidepath Main View.........................................................................64
4.1.3.5 ILS Localizer Distortion View.........................................................................................69
4.1.3.6 ILS Localizer ID Analysis View......................................................................................71
4.1.3.7 ILS Localizer Recording View....................................................................................... 74
4.1.4 ILS Localizer and Glidepath Configuration....................................................................75
4.1.4.1 Configuring the Input Signal..........................................................................................75
4.1.4.2 Channel and Frequency Configuration......................................................................... 76
4.1.4.3 Ampt..............................................................................................................................80
4.1.4.4 Bandwidth (BW)............................................................................................................ 81
4.1.4.5 LF Input Configuration...................................................................................................82
4.1.4.6 Setting the Measurement Time (MTime)....................................................................... 86
4.1.4.7 DDM and SDM Configuration........................................................................................86
4.2 ILS Marker Beacon Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K3)................................................... 87
4.2.1 Basics on Marker Beacons........................................................................................... 87
4.2.2 ILS Marker Beacon Measurements and Results...........................................................88
4.2.2.1 RF Level and Frequency Display.................................................................................. 89
4.2.2.2 IF Spectrum Preview.....................................................................................................90
4.2.2.3 ILS Marker Beacon Main View...................................................................................... 91
4.2.2.4 ILS Marker Beacon ID Analysis.................................................................................... 92
4.2.2.5 ILS Marker Beacon Recording View............................................................................. 94
4.2.3 Configuring ILS Marker Beacon Measurements........................................................... 95
4.2.3.1 Setting the Receiver Frequency....................................................................................95
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 5

4.2.3.2 Ampt..............................................................................................................................96
4.2.3.3 Setting the Measurement Time (MTime)....................................................................... 97
4.3 VOR Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K2)............................................................................97
4.3.1 VOR Basics...................................................................................................................98
4.3.1.1 VHF Omni Directional Radio Range (VOR).................................................................. 98
4.3.1.2 VOR Demodulator.......................................................................................................101
4.3.1.3 Phase Notation in VOR Measurements...................................................................... 103
4.3.2 VOR Measurements and Results................................................................................104
4.3.2.1 RF Level and Frequency Display................................................................................ 105
4.3.2.2 IF Spectrum Preview...................................................................................................106
4.3.2.3 VOR Main View........................................................................................................... 106
4.3.2.4 VOR Distortion View....................................................................................................108
4.3.2.5 VOR ID Analysis View................................................................................................. 110
4.3.2.6 VOR Recording View...................................................................................................112
4.3.3 Configuring VOR Measurements.................................................................................113
4.3.3.1 General Measurement Configuration.......................................................................... 113
4.3.3.2 Channel Frequency Configuration (CH FREQ)........................................................... 115
4.3.3.3 Ampt............................................................................................................................ 116
4.3.3.4 Bandwidth (BW)...........................................................................................................117
4.3.3.5 Setting the Measurement Time (MTime)..................................................................... 117
4.4 COM Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K6)......................................................................... 118
4.4.1 COM Measurement Results........................................................................................ 118
4.4.1.1 RF Level and Frequency Display................................................................................ 119
4.4.1.2 IF Spectrum Preview...................................................................................................120
4.4.1.3 COM Main View.......................................................................................................... 121
4.4.1.4 COM Recording View..................................................................................................123
4.4.2 COM Configuration..................................................................................................... 124
4.4.2.1 Channel and Frequency Configuration....................................................................... 124
4.4.2.2 Ampt............................................................................................................................126
4.4.2.3 Bandwidth (BW).......................................................................................................... 127
4.5 Non-Directional Beacon Mode (Option R&S EVSG1-K7).......................................128
4.5.1 Basics on Non-Directional Beacons............................................................................128
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 6

4.5.2 NDB Measurement and Results..................................................................................128

4.5.2.1 RF Level, Frequency and IF Spectrum Display.......................................................... 129
4.5.2.2 NDB ID Analysis..........................................................................................................130
4.5.2.3 NDB Distortion View....................................................................................................132
4.5.2.4 NDB Recording View...................................................................................................133
4.5.3 Configuring NDB Measurements................................................................................ 134
4.5.3.1 General Measurement Settings.................................................................................. 135
4.5.3.2 Receiver Frequency.................................................................................................... 135
4.5.3.3 Amplitude.................................................................................................................... 136
4.5.3.4 Setting the Bandwidth................................................................................................. 137
5 Graphic Measurement Modes........................................................... 139

5.1 RF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K10)......................................................... 139
5.1.1 Configuring the Frequency Range.............................................................................. 140
5.1.2 Configuring the Bandwidth.......................................................................................... 141
5.1.3 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis)............................................................................. 142
5.1.4 Configuring the Trace..................................................................................................143
5.2 IF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K10)...........................................................144
5.2.3 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis)............................................................................. 146
5.3 AF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K11)......................................................... 149
5.3.1 Configuring the Input Signal........................................................................................151
5.3.4 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for RF Input......................................................... 154
5.3.5 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for LF Input.......................................................... 155
5.4 AF Time Domain Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K12)................................................... 158
5.4.1 Configuring the Input Signal........................................................................................161
5.4.2 Configuring the Frequency Range and Bandwidth..................................................... 162
5.4.3 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for RF Input......................................................... 162
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 7

5.4.4 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for LF Input.......................................................... 163

5.4.5 Configuring the Measurement Time............................................................................ 165
5.4.6 Configuring the Trigger................................................................................................165
5.5 Using Markers in the Graphical Displays............................................................... 167
6 GBAS/SCAT-I Mode (Options R&S EVSG-K4/-K5)...........................170

6.1 Basics on GBAS and SCAT-I Analysis ................................................................... 171
6.1.1 GBAS Specifics...........................................................................................................171
6.1.2 Broadcast Timing Structure.........................................................................................173
6.1.3 Final Approach Segment (FAS) Construction Data.....................................................173
6.1.4 Time Slot Synchronization via PPS.............................................................................174
6.2 GBAS / SCAT-I Measurement Information.............................................................. 174
6.3 GBAS / SCAT-I Measurement Views and Results...................................................176
6.3.1 Sequence View........................................................................................................... 176
6.3.2 Frame View................................................................................................................. 178
6.3.2.1 Frame Power Vs. Time Diagram................................................................................. 179
6.3.2.2 Frame Results Table................................................................................................... 180
6.3.3 Burst View................................................................................................................... 182
6.3.3.1 Slot Power vs. Time Diagram......................................................................................183
6.3.3.2 Slot Results Table....................................................................................................... 184
6.3.4 Constellation View.......................................................................................................185
6.3.5 Message View............................................................................................................. 186
6.3.6 Recording View........................................................................................................... 187
6.4 GBAS/ SCAT-I Measurement Configuration............................................................189
6.4.1 View Configuration...................................................................................................... 189
6.4.2 Frequency Configuration.............................................................................................190
6.4.3 Amplitude Configuration..............................................................................................191
6.4.4 Bandwidth Configuration............................................................................................. 191
6.4.5 General Configuration................................................................................................. 192
6.5 Message XML Interface............................................................................................ 193
6.5.1 General Processing.....................................................................................................194
6.5.2 Output Elements and Control Elements......................................................................195
6.5.3 XML File Format Description.......................................................................................198
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 8

6.5.4 Format Description of Elements..................................................................................200

6.5.5 Output Elements......................................................................................................... 200
6.5.5.1 Unsigned Type............................................................................................................ 200
6.5.5.2 Signed Type................................................................................................................ 201
6.5.5.3 Longitude Type............................................................................................................202
6.5.5.4 Latitude Type...............................................................................................................203
6.5.5.5 Id Type........................................................................................................................ 204
6.5.5.6 Fixed Type...................................................................................................................204
6.5.5.7 Value Type...................................................................................................................204
6.5.5.8 FEC Type.................................................................................................................... 205
6.5.5.9 CRC Type....................................................................................................................205
6.5.5.10 List Type......................................................................................................................206
6.5.5.11 Enum Type.................................................................................................................. 207
6.5.5.12 Dummy Type............................................................................................................... 208
6.5.6 Control Elements.........................................................................................................208
6.5.6.1 Link_sel Type.............................................................................................................. 208
6.5.6.2 Loop Type....................................................................................................................211
6.5.6.3 While Type...................................................................................................................211
6.5.7 Auxiliary Elements.......................................................................................................212
6.5.7.1 Fill Type.......................................................................................................................212
7 Power Sensor Support (Option R&S EVSG-K24)............................ 213
8 Data Management.............................................................................. 215

8.1 Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings (Preset)......................................... 215
8.1.1 Storage and Recall Functions..................................................................................... 215
8.2 Recording Measurement Data................................................................................. 217
8.2.1 GPS Data Synchronization......................................................................................... 218
8.2.2 I/Q Data Recording and Streaming (R&S EVSG1-K25)..............................................218
8.2.3 Recording Settings......................................................................................................219
8.2.4 Activating Data Recording...........................................................................................221
8.2.5 Viewing Recorded Data...............................................................................................223
8.2.6 Analyzing Recorded I/Q Data......................................................................................223
8.3 Creating and Storing Screenshots.......................................................................... 223
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 9

9 Common Instrument Settings...........................................................226

9.1 Audio Output Settings.............................................................................................. 226
9.2 Display....................................................................................................................... 227
9.3 Demodulation Output Settings................................................................................ 229
9.4 Network (Remote) Settings...................................................................................... 230
9.5 System Settings........................................................................................................ 232
9.6 Instrument Configuration and Operating Status Settings.....................................234
9.7 GPS Configuration.................................................................................................... 240
10 Remote Commands........................................................................... 242

10.1 Common Instrument and Measurement Setup...................................................... 242
10.1.1 Common Measurement Settings.................................................................................243
10.1.2 Signal Input................................................................................................................. 247
10.1.3 Trigger Settings........................................................................................................... 249
10.1.4 Baseband Input........................................................................................................... 249
10.1.5 Result Display Settings............................................................................................... 250
10.1.6 Audio, Demodulation and Output Configuration..........................................................253
10.1.7 Retrieving Instrument Information............................................................................... 258
10.1.8 GPS Data.................................................................................................................... 261
10.1.9 System Settings.......................................................................................................... 266
10.1.10 Calibration................................................................................................................... 269
10.1.11 Network Settings and Remote Operation....................................................................270
10.1.12 Deprecated Commands.............................................................................................. 271
10.2 ILS Localizer (LOC) and Glidepath (GP) Modes..................................................... 273
10.2.1 Configuring the ILS LOC and GP Modes.................................................................... 273
10.2.2 Configuring ILS Localizer Measurements................................................................... 273
10.2.3 Configuring ILS Glidepath Measurements.................................................................. 283
10.2.4 Retrieving ILS Loc and GP Results.............................................................................292
10.2.5 Retrieving ID Results.................................................................................................. 301
10.3 ILS Marker Beacon (MB) Mode................................................................................ 305
10.3.1 Configuring ILS MB Measurements............................................................................ 305
10.3.2 Retrieving ILS MB Results.......................................................................................... 307
10.3.3 Retrieving ILS MB Identifier Results........................................................................... 309
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 10

10.3.4 Deprecated Commands...............................................................................................311

10.4 VOR Mode.................................................................................................................. 312
10.4.1 Configuring VOR Measurements................................................................................ 312
10.4.2 Retrieving VOR Results.............................................................................................. 316
10.5 COM Mode................................................................................................................. 322
10.5.1 Configuring COM Measurements................................................................................322
10.5.2 Retrieving COM Results..............................................................................................326
10.6 GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode.................................................................................................. 333
10.6.1 Configuring GBAS/ SCAT-I Measurements.................................................................333
10.6.2 Retrieving GBAS/ SCAT-I Results...............................................................................337
10.7 NDB Mode.................................................................................................................. 345
10.7.1 Configuring an NDB Measurement............................................................................. 345
10.7.2 Retrieving NDB Measurement Results....................................................................... 348
10.8 RF Spectrum Mode................................................................................................... 350
10.8.1 Configuring RF Spectrum Measurements...................................................................350
10.8.2 Retrieving RF Spectrum Results.................................................................................354
10.9 IF Spectrum Mode..................................................................................................... 355
10.9.1 Configuring IF Spectrum Measurements.................................................................... 355
10.9.2 Retrieving IF Spectrum Results.................................................................................. 359
10.10 AF Spectrum Mode................................................................................................... 359
10.10.1 Configuring AF Spectrum Measurements................................................................... 359
10.10.2 Retrieving AF Spectrum Results................................................................................. 366
10.11 AF Time Domain Mode..............................................................................................367
10.11.1 Configuring AF Time Domain Measurements............................................................. 367
10.11.2 Retrieving RF Spectrum Results.................................................................................372
10.12 Data Management..................................................................................................... 372
10.12.1 Data Recording........................................................................................................... 372
10.12.2 Data Streaming........................................................................................................... 377
10.12.3 Results for Data Streaming......................................................................................... 379
10.12.3.1 ILS LOC Mode............................................................................................................ 380
10.12.3.2 ILS GP Mode...............................................................................................................381
10.12.3.3 ILS MB Mode.............................................................................................................. 382
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 11

10.12.3.4 VOR Mode.................................................................................................................. 383

10.12.3.5 COM Mode..................................................................................................................384
10.12.3.6 GBAS Mode................................................................................................................ 384
10.12.3.7 NDB Mode...................................................................................................................385
10.13 Information on Commands...................................................................................... 386
11 Maintenance, Storage and Disposal.................................................387

11.1 Cleaning..................................................................................................................... 387
11.2 Handling Batteries.................................................................................................... 387
11.3 Storage.......................................................................................................................389
11.4 Disposal..................................................................................................................... 389
12 Transporting....................................................................................... 391
13 Contacting Customer Support..........................................................392
Annex.................................................................................................. 393
A ILS Channel Frequency List..............................................................393
B VOR Channel Frequency List............................................................395
C References..........................................................................................397
D Format Description of GBAS and SCAT-I Data................................398
List of Commands..............................................................................404
Index....................................................................................................417
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 12

R&S®EVSG1000 Getting Started
Safety Information
1 Getting Started
Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S EVSG1000 Get-
ting Started manual.
1.1 Safety Information

The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the
instructions provided here and in the Chapter 1.1.1, "Safety Instructions",
on page 13.
Intended use
The product is intended for maintenance and servicing of ILS, VOR and marker bea-
con ground stations and analyzing ATC COM signals. The portable, robust design and
the integrated battery allow for network-independent measurements also outdoors.
Use the product only for its designated purpose. Observe the operating conditions and
performance limits stated in the data sheet.
Where do I find safety information?

Safety information is part of the product documentation. It warns you of potential dan-
gers and gives instructions on how to prevent personal injury or damage caused by
dangerous situations. Safety information is provided as follows:
● In Chapter 1.1.1, "Safety Instructions", on page 13. The same information is pro-
vided in many languages as printed "Safety Instructions". The printed "Safety
Instructions" are delivered with the product.
● Throughout the documentation, safety instructions are provided when you need to
take care during setup or operation.
1.1.1 Safety Instructions
Products from the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according
to the highest technical standards. To use the products safely, follow the instructions
provided here and in the product documentation. Keep the product documentation
nearby and offer it to other users.
Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits. Intended
use and limits are described in the product documentation such as the data sheet,
manuals and the printed safety instructions. If you are unsure about the appropriate
use, contact Rohde & Schwarz customer service.
Using the product requires specialists or specially trained personnel. These users also
need sound knowledge of at least one of the languages in which the user interfaces
and the product documentation are available.
If any part of the product is damaged or broken, stop using the product. Never open
the casing of the product. Only service personnel authorized by Rohde & Schwarz are
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 13

Safety Information
allowed to repair the product. Contact Rohde & Schwarz customer service at http://
www.customersupport.rohde-schwarz.com.
Lifting and carrying the product

The maximum weight of the product is provided in the data sheet. To move the product
safely, you can use lifting or transporting equipment such as lift trucks and forklifts. Fol-
low the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer.
The product is heavy. Do not move or carry the product by yourself. A single person
can only carry a maximum of 18 kg safely depending on age, gender and physical con-
dition. Look up the maximum weight in the data sheet. Use the product handles to
move or carry the product. Do not lift by the accessories mounted on the product.
Accessories are not designed to carry the weight of the product.
To move the product safely, you can use lifting or transporting equipment such as lift
trucks and forklifts. Follow the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Choosing the operating site

Only use the product indoors. The product casing is not waterproof. Water that enters
can electrically connect the casing with live parts, which can lead to electric shock,
serious personal injury or death if you touch the casing. If Rohde & Schwarz provides a
carrying bag designed for your product, you can use the product outdoors.
Unless otherwise specified, you can operate the product up to an altitude of 2000 m
above sea level. The product is suitable for pollution degree 2 environments where
nonconductive contamination can occur. For more information on environmental condi-
tions such as ambient temperature and humidity, see the data sheet.
Setting up the product

Always place the product on a stable, flat and level surface with the bottom of the prod-
uct facing down. If the product is designed for different positions, secure the product so
that it cannot fall over.
If the product has foldable feet, always fold the feet completely in or out to ensure sta-
bility. The feet can collapse if they are not folded out completely or if the product is
moved without lifting it. The foldable feet are designed to carry the weight of the prod-
uct, but not an extra load.
If stacking is possible, keep in mind that a stack of products can fall over and cause
injury.
If you mount products in a rack, ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and
stability. Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer. Always install the prod-
ucts from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely. Secure the
product so that it cannot fall off the rack.
Connecting to power
The product is an overvoltage category II product and has to be connected to a fixed
installation used to supply energy-consuming equipment such as household applian-
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 14

Safety Information
ces and similar loads. Be aware that electrically powered products have risks, such as
electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death.
Take the following measures for your safety:
● Before switching on the product, ensure that the voltage and frequency indicated
on the product match the available power source. If the power adapter does not
adjust automatically, set the correct value and check the rating of the fuse.
● If a product has an exchangeable fuse, its type and characteristics are indicated
next to the fuse holder. Before changing the fuse, switch off the instrument and dis-
connect it from the power source. How to change the fuse is described in the prod-
uct documentation.
● Only use the power cable delivered with the product. It complies with country-spe-
cific safety requirements. Only insert the plug into an outlet with protective conduc-
tor terminal.
● Only use intact cables and route them carefully so that they cannot be damaged.
Check the power cables regularly to ensure that they are undamaged. Also ensure
that nobody can trip over loose cables.
● If the product needs an external power supply, use the power supply that is deliv-
ered with the product or that is recommended in the product documentation or a
power supply that conforms to the country-specific regulations.
● Only connect the product to a power source with a fuse protection of maximum
20 A.
● Ensure that you can disconnect the product from the power source at any time.
Pull the power plug to disconnect the product. The power plug must be easily
accessible. If the product is integrated into a system that does not meet these
requirements, provide an easily accessible circuit breaker at the system level.
Cleaning the product

Use a dry, lint-free cloth to clean the product. When cleaning, keep in mind that the
casing is not waterproof. Do not use liquid cleaning agents.
Meaning of safety labels

Safety labels on the product warn against potential hazards.
Potential hazard
Read the product documentation to avoid personal injury or product damage.
Heavy product
Be careful when lifting, moving or carrying the product. Carrying the product requires at least
two people or transport equipment.
Electrical hazard
Indicates live parts. Risk of electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 15

Safety Information
Hot surface
Do not touch. Risk of skin burns. Risk of fire.
Protective conductor terminal

Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground. This protects
you against electric shock should an electric problem occur.
Handling batteries safely

The product contains lithium polymer or lithium ion cells or batteries. The use of the
word battery in the following always means all types. Only the battery contents are
potentially hazardous. As long as a battery is undamaged and the seals remain intact,
there is no danger.
Impact, shock or heat can cause damage such as dents, punctures and other deforma-
tions. A damaged battery poses a risk of personal injury. Handle a damaged or leaking
battery with extreme care. Immediately ventilate the area since the battery releases
harmful gases. If you come into contact with the battery fluid, immediately remove all
contaminated clothing. Irritation can occur if the battery fluid comes in contact with your
skin or eyes. Immediately and thoroughly rinse your skin or eyes with water and seek
medical aid.
For safe handling, follow these rules:
● Do not short-circuit the battery.
● Do not mechanically damage the battery. Do not open or disassemble the battery.
● Do not expose the battery to high temperatures such as open flames, hot surfaces
and sunlight.
● Only use the battery with the designated Rohde & Schwarz product.
● Only use the appropriate Rohde & Schwarz charger to charge the batteries. If the
batteries are improperly charged, there is a risk of explosion. For charging and dis-
charging temperature ranges, see the product documentation.
● Store the battery at room temperature (approximately 20 °C) enclosed in the origi-
nal packaging.
● Dispose of batteries separately from normal household waste as specified by the
local waste disposal agency.
If you disregard these rules, you risk serious personal injury or even death due to
explosion, fire or hazardous chemical substances. The product documentation pro-
vides further details.
When replacing a defective battery, only use the same Rohde & Schwarz battery type.
When returning batteries to Rohde & Schwarz subsidiaries, choose a carrier qualified
to transport dangerous goods and follow the carrier’s transport stipulations in line with
IATA-DGR, IMDG-Code, ADR or RID. If you need assistance, contact the carrier or
Rohde & Schwarz customer service.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 16

Safety Information
Connecting headphones
Take the following measures to prevent hearing damage. Before using headphones,
check the volume and reduce it if necessary. If you monitor varying signal levels, take
off the headphones and wait until the signal has settled. Then adjust the volume.
Using laser products
Warning: laser beam

The product contains a laser.
Avoid exposure to direct or reflected laser beam.
Lasers are classified according to their potential risk.
Class 1M lasers
Safe for the naked eye. If you look into the laser beam with optical instruments such as
binoculars or eye loupes, you risk damaging your eyes.
Class 2 lasers
If you stare into the beam, you risk damaging your eyes.
1.1.2 Labels on the Product
Labels on the casing inform about:

● Personal safety, see "Meaning of safety labels" on page 15
● Product and environment safety, see Table 1-1
Table 1-1: Labels regarding product and environment safety
Labeling in line with EN 50419 for disposal of electrical and electronic equipment after the prod-
uct has come to the end of its service life.
For more information, see "Electrical and electronic equipment" on page 390.
For more information, see the R&S EVSG1000 user manual, chapter "Disposal".
Labeling in line with directive 2006/66/EC for disposal of batteries after they have come to the
end of their service life.
For more information, see "Batteries" on page 390.
For more information, see the R&S EVSG1000 user manual, chapter "Disposal".
1.1.3 Warning Messages in the Documentation
A warning message points out a risk or danger that you need to be aware of. The sig-
nal word indicates the severity of the safety hazard and how likely it will occur if you do
not follow the safety precautions.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 17

Documentation Overview
CAUTION
Potentially hazardous situation
Could result in minor or moderate injury if not avoided.
NOTICE
Potential risks of damage
Could result in damage to the supported product or to other property.
1.2 Documentation Overview

This section provides an overview of the R&S EVSG1000 user documentation. You
find it on the product page at:
www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/EVSG1000
1.2.1 Getting Started Manual
Introduces the R&S EVSG1000 and describes how to set up and start working with the
product. A printed version is delivered with the instrument.
1.2.2 User Manuals and Help
Contains the description of all instrument modes and functions. It also provides an
introduction to remote control, a complete description of the remote control commands
with programming examples, and information on maintenance, instrument interfaces
and error messages. Includes the contents of the getting started manual.
The contents of the user manual are also available as online help on the
R&S EVSG1000.
1.2.3 Printed Safety Instructions
Provides safety information in many languages. The printed document is delivered with
the product.
1.2.4 Data Sheets and Brochures
The data sheet contains the technical specifications of the R&S EVSG1000. It also lists
the firmware applications and their order numbers, and optional accessories.
The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific char-
acteristics.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 18

Preparing for Use
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/evsg/
1.2.5 Release Notes and Open-Source Acknowledgment (OSA)
The release notes list new features, improvements and known issues of the current
firmware version, and describe the firmware installation.
The open-source acknowledgment document provides verbatim license texts of the
used open source software.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/software/EVSG1000.
1.3 Key Features

The R&S EVSG1000 offers the following key features:
● Detailed analysis of ILS, VOR and Marker Beacon ground measurements (based
on ICAO Doc. 8071 and ICAO Annex 10)
● Spectrum preview and detailed signal analysis in frequency and time range
● Dynamic measurements up to 100 measurements per second in high measure-
ment rate modus
● Parallel course and clearance signal analysis in two-frequency systems (ILS)
● Simple remote operation via standard interfaces
● Software options for specific use cases
● Integrated data recording
1.4 Preparing for Use

This chapter describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the product for the
first time.
● Unpacking and Checking........................................................................................ 20
● Lifting and Carrying................................................................................................. 20
● Choosing the Operating Site................................................................................... 20
● Setting Up the R&S EVSG1000.............................................................................. 21
● Connecting to Power...............................................................................................22
● Switching On or Off................................................................................................. 25
● Performing an Auto-Calibration...............................................................................26
● Connecting Devices for Signal Input and Output.................................................... 27
● Connecting to LAN..................................................................................................27
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 19

Preparing for Use
1.4.1 Unpacking and Checking
1. Unpack the R&S EVSG1000 carefully.
2. Retain the original packing material. Use it when transporting or shipping the prod-
uct later.
3. Using the delivery notes, check the equipment for completeness.

The instrument comes with the following accessories:
● AC/DC power supply connector with cable
● Printed Getting Started manual
4. Check the equipment for damage.

If the delivery is incomplete or equipment is damaged, contact Rohde & Schwarz.
1.4.2 Lifting and Carrying
The carrying handle is designed to lift or carry the instrument. Do not apply excessive
external force to the handle.
See "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 14.
1.4.3 Choosing the Operating Site
The R&S EVSG1000 can be operated in a variety of places without detrimental effects
on its features. Even the movement caused by transportation or mobile use does not
impair its functioning.
Specific operating conditions ensure accurate measurements and avoid damage to the
product and connected devices. For information on environmental conditions such as
ambient temperature and humidity, see the data sheet.
See also "Choosing the operating site" on page 14.
Electromagnetic compatibility classes

The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) class indicates where you can operate the
product. The EMC class of the product is given in the data sheet under "General data".
● Class B equipment is suitable for use in:
– Residential environments
– Environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that
supplies residential buildings
● Class A equipment is intended for use in industrial environments. It can cause
radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted and radi-
ated disturbances. It is therefore not suitable for class B environments.
If class A equipment causes radio disturbances, take appropriate measures to
eliminate them.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 20

Preparing for Use
1.4.4 Setting Up the R&S EVSG1000
The R&S EVSG1000 is designed for use either on a bench top or in a rack, or as a
portable instrument (with optional battery operation) in a transport bag in the field.
See also:
● "Setting up the product" on page 14
● "Intended use" on page 13
1.4.4.1 Placing the R&S EVSG1000 on a Bench Top
To place the R&S EVSG1000 on a bench top

1. Place the R&S EVSG1000 on a stable, flat and level surface. Ensure that the sur-
face can support the weight of the instrument. For information on the weight, see
the data sheet.
2. CAUTION! The instrument can fall over and cause injury. The top surface is not
designed for stacking. Never stack another instrument on top of the
R&S EVSG1000.
As an alternative, you can mount several instruments in a rack.
3. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product.

Prevent overheating as follows:
● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the
R&S EVSG1000 and any object in the vicinity.
● Do not place the R&S EVSG1000 next to heat-generating equipment such as
radiators or other products.
1.4.4.2 Mounting the R&S EVSG1000 in a Rack
A 19"-adapter is available as an accessory (R&S EVSG-Z7) to mount the

R&S EVSG1000 in a 19'' rack (e.g. in a measurement vehicle).
To prepare the rack

1. Observe the requirements and instructions in "Setting up the product" on page 14.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 21

Preparing for Use
2. NOTICE! Insufficient airflow can cause overheating and damage the product.
Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack.
To mount the R&S EVSG1000 in a rack

1. Use the adapter kit R&S EVSG-Z7 to prepare the R&S EVSG1000 for rack mount-
ing.
a) Order the rack adapter kit designed for the R&S EVSG1000. For the order
number, see the data sheet.
b) Mount the adapter kit. Follow the assembly instructions provided with the
adapter kit.
2. Lift the R&S EVSG1000 to shelf height.
3. Grab the handles and push the product onto the shelf until the rack brackets fit
closely to the rack.
4. Tighten all screws in the rack brackets with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm to secure
the R&S EVSG1000 in the rack.
To unmount the R&S EVSG1000 from a rack

1. Loosen the screws at the rack brackets.
2. Remove the R&S EVSG1000 from the rack.
3. If placing the R&S EVSG1000 on a bench top again, unmount the adapter kit from
the R&S EVSG1000. Follow the instructions provided with the adapter kit.
1.4.4.3 Portable Operation
The R&S EVSG1000 was designed as a portable, robust instrument that can also be
operated outdoors.
An optional weather protection carrying bag (R&S EVSG-Z1, see Chapter 1.5.3,
"Accessories", on page 35) designed specifically for the R&S EVSG1000 allows you
to protect the instrument while working in the field. The bag includes ventilation areas
at the position of the ventilation outlets in the casing to ensure air circulation. The
transparent cover allows you to operate the instrument without removing it from the
bag. Together with the optional battery pack (see Chapter 1.4.5.3, "Using an Optional
Battery Pack (R&S EVSG-B3)", on page 24), and packed in the dedicated carrying
bag, the R&S EVSG1000 is ideally suited for operation directly in the field, even in
rough environments.
See also Chapter 1.4.2, "Lifting and Carrying", on page 20.
1.4.5 Connecting to Power
To ensure high mobility and flexibility while using the R&S EVSG1000, it is equipped
with a DC power supply connector on the rear panel of the instrument.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 22

Preparing for Use
There are various options to supply DC power to the R&S EVSG1000:

● Using the AC/DC power supply connector provided with the R&S EVSG1000.
● Using the internal battery, if options R&S EVSG-B2 and R&S EVSG-B3 are instal-
led.
● Using an external DC power source with a voltage of 10 V DC to 28 V DC and a
current of 3.0 A.
For safety information, see "Connecting to power" on page 14.
● Connecting the Provided AC/DC Power Supply Connector....................................23
● Connecting an External DC Power Source............................................................. 23
● Using an Optional Battery Pack (R&S EVSG-B3)...................................................24
1.4.5.1 Connecting the Provided AC/DC Power Supply Connector
To operate the R&S EVSG1000 on a 230 V AC power supply, use only the provided
AC/DC power supply connector.
1. Connect the DC connector on the provided AC/DC power supply connector to the
Power Supply connector on the back of the R&S EVSG1000 (see Chapter 1.5.2.1,
"Power Supply", on page 33).
2. Plug the AC power cable into the AC/DC power supply connector. Only use the AC
power cable delivered with the R&S EVSG1000.
The required ratings are listed next to the AC power connector and in the data
sheet.
3. Plug the AC power cable into a two-pin power outlet with ground contact.
The green operating LED of the AC/DC power supply connector lights up.
The green Power LED on the front panel of the R&S EVSG1000 lights up.
1.4.5.2 Connecting an External DC Power Source
The R&S EVSG1000 can be operated directly from an external DC power source with
a voltage of 10 V DC to 28 V DC and a current of 3.0 A.
If you use an external power supply unit to supply safety extra-low DC voltage (SELV)
to the instrument, be sure to meet the requirements for reinforced/double insulation in
accordance with DIN/EN/IEC 61010 (UL 3111, CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1) or DIN/EN/IEC
60950 (UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950). Provide current limitation in accordance with
DIN EN 61010-1 Appendix F2.1.
Connect the R&S EVSG1000 to an external DC power source as follows:

1. Connect a 3-pin XLR connection cable to the Power supply connector on the back
of the instrument (see Chapter 1.5.2.1, "Power Supply", on page 33).
2. Insert a 3 AT fuse to protect the connection between the instrument and the exter-
nal DC power source against excessive current. A short-circuit can damage the
instrument or power supply unit.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 23

Preparing for Use
3. Connect the XLR connection cable to the DC power supply.

If the cable must be extended, ensure the entire cable has a cross-section of at
least 1.5 mm2.
As soon as the DC power supply is switched on, the green Power LED on the front
panel of the R&S EVSG1000 lights up.
1.4.5.3 Using an Optional Battery Pack (R&S EVSG-B3)
As an alternative to the fixed AC or DC power supply, the R&S EVSG1000 can be

operated by a battery pack, if the R&S EVSG-B2 and R&S EVSG-B3 options are
installed. Use only the original battery pack R&S EVSG-B3. For the order numbers,
see the data sheet.
If the battery option was ordered together with the instrument, the R&S EVSG1000
comes with the battery management and battery pack already installed. Otherwise
these options must be installed by Rohde & Schwarz service personnel.
For safety information, see "Handling batteries safely" on page 16.
For information on how to exchange a battery pack, see the R&S EVSG1000 user
manual, chapter "Maintenance".
For information on how to exchange a battery pack, see Chapter 11.2, "Handling Bat-
teries", on page 387.
If the battery pack is installed and no DC power is supplied, the R&S EVSG1000 auto-
matically switches to battery operation.
Charging batteries
Charge the battery before using it for the first time. Following a long storage period, it
can be necessary to charge and discharge the battery several times to reach full
capacity.
When charging the battery, observe the following:
● For charging, use only the R&S EVSG1000 or the R&S®FSV-B34 battery charger
(1321.3950.02).
● If the instrument is connected to the provided AC/DC power supply connector or to
an external DC power supply with more than 12 V DC, the internal battery is auto-
matically charged, regardless whether the instrument is switched on or off.
● Charge in a constant ambient temperature range from +0 °C to +40 °C.
If the battery temperature rises above +53 °C, charging is interrupted until the tem-
perature drops below +45 °C. Large temperature variations can also cause the
charger to be switched off too early.
● Try not to overcharge the battery too often because overcharging reduces the ser-
vice life of the battery.
● Discharge in a temperature range from -10 °C to +45 °C.
When the battery is being charged, the Power LED blinks. During operation, the status
bar also indicates that the battery is being charged. See "Status bar" on page 40.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 24

Preparing for Use
For charging times, see the R&S EVSG1000 user manual, chapter "Maintenance".
For charging times, see Chapter 11.2, "Handling Batteries", on page 387.
1.4.6 Switching On or Off
The Power LEDs on the front panel indicate the power and operation state of the
R&S EVSG1000.
The left LED indicates the operating state:
Table 1-2: Overview of operating states
Status LED
Off gray
Booting green, blinking
Ready for operation green
The right LED indicates the power state:

Table 1-3: Overview of power states
Status LED
Not connected to power gray
Connected to power green
Battery charging green, blinking
To switch on the R&S EVSG1000

The instrument is off but connected to power.
► Press the power key.
See Chapter 1.5.1.1, "Power Key", on page 29.
The left power LED starts blinking. The instrument boots.
The boot process of the R&S EVSG1000 takes about 30 seconds. Then the instru-
ment automatically starts the measurement mode used before the instrument was
switched off. The power LED stops blinking.
If valid data for automatic calibration is not available, the message "UNCAL" is dis-
played in the status line. It is recommended that you perfom an auto-calibration every 2
months or if the difference of the environment temperature changes by more than
10 °C.
See Chapter 1.4.7, "Performing an Auto-Calibration", on page 26.
To shut down the R&S EVSG1000

The instrument is switched on.
► Press the power key.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 25

Preparing for Use
The operating system shuts down. The LED is no longer lit.
To disconnect from power

The instrument is switched off.
Risk of data loss

If you disconnect the R&S EVSG1000 from power when it is switched on and no
(charged) battery is installed, you can lose settings and data. Switch off the instrument
before disconnecting it from power.
► Disconnect the R&S EVSG1000 from the power source.
1.4.7 Performing an Auto-Calibration
After setting up the R&S EVSG1000, perform an auto-calibration to ensure the accu-
racy of the measurements. After initial setup, it is recommended that you perform an
auto-calibration every 2 months or if the difference of the environment temperature
changes by more than 10 °C.
If valid data for automatic calibration is not available, the message "UNCAL" is dis-
played in the status line of the R&S EVSG1000 display.
To perform an auto-calibration
Before performing an auto-calibration, make sure that the instrument has reached its
operating temperature (after about 15 minutes of operation; for details, refer to the data
sheet).
A message in the status bar ("Instrument warming up...") indicates that the operating
temperature has not yet been reached.
During the auto-calibration procedure, do not apply any input signal to the
R&S EVSG1000.
1. Select [Setup] > "Cal".
2. Select "Start Autocal".
3. Press [Enter].
The "Setup - CAL" display shows the status for each calibration step. When com-
pleted, after a few minutes, all entries must have the status "OK".
For more information on auto-calibration, see the R&S EVSG1000 user manual.
For more information on auto-calibration, see "Auto-Calibration (Cal)" on page 234.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 26

Preparing for Use
1.4.8 Connecting Devices for Signal Input and Output
Information on signal levels is provided in the data sheet. Keep the signal levels within
the specified ranges to avoid damage to the product and connected devices.
1. Connect the RF input connector ("RX 1 IN"/"RX 2 IN") with the receiving antenna
(see Chapter 1.5.1.3, "RX1 IN / RX2 IN", on page 29).
2. Optionally, connect the power supply for an active receiving antenna (see Chap-
ter 1.5.1.6, "12 V DC Out", on page 30).
3. Optionally, connect the GPS receiver (see Chapter 1.5.2.4, "RS232 GPS",
on page 34).
4. Optionally, connect a headset (see Chapter 1.5.1.5, "AF Out", on page 30).
1.4.9 Connecting to LAN
You can connect the instrument to a LAN for remote operation via a PC. For details on
the connector, see Chapter 1.5.2.3, "LAN (Ethernet)", on page 34.
Provided the network administrator has assigned you the appropriate rights and adap-
ted the Windows firewall configuration, you can use the interface, for example:
● To stream measurement data from the R&S EVSG1000 to a connected device
● To access or control the measurement from a remote computer using a VNC client
● To connect external network devices (e.g. printers)
Risk of network failure

Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
● Connecting the instrument to the network
● Configuring the network
● Changing IP addresses
● Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
► Connect the R&S EVSG1000 to the LAN via the LAN interface on the rear panel of
the instrument.
By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and
obtain all address information automatically. This means that it is safe to establish
a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.
The used IP address is indicated in the "Setup" menu on the R&S EVSG1000 dis-
play.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 27

Instrument Tour
The default instrument name is <Type><variant>-<serial_number>, for example,

EVSG1000-123456. For information on determining the serial number, see Chap-
ter 1.5.2.10, "Device ID", on page 35.
For more information on LAN configuration, see the R&S EVSG1000 user manual.
For more information on LAN configuration, see Chapter 9.4, "Network (Remote) Set-
tings", on page 230.
1.5 Instrument Tour
1.5.1 Front Panel
This chapter describes the front panel, including all function keys and connectors.
2 3 4 5 6
1 13 12 11 10 9
Figure 1-1: R&S EVSG1000 - Front panel view
1 = Power key
2 = System keys
3 = Display
4 = Softkeys
5 = Keypad
6 = Function keys
7 = Rotary Knob
8 = Navigation keys
9 = RX 1 IN
10 = 12 V DC Out
11 = AF Out
12 = USB connectors
13 = RX2 IN
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 28

Instrument Tour
● Power Key...............................................................................................................29
● Display.................................................................................................................... 29
● RX1 IN / RX2 IN...................................................................................................... 29
● USB.........................................................................................................................29
● AF Out.....................................................................................................................30
● 12 V DC Out............................................................................................................30
● System Keys........................................................................................................... 30
● Softkeys.................................................................................................................. 30
● Function Keys......................................................................................................... 30
● Keypad....................................................................................................................31
● Rotary Knob............................................................................................................ 32
● Navigation Keys...................................................................................................... 32
1.5.1.1 Power Key
The [Power] key is located on the lower left corner of the front panel. It starts up and
shuts down the instrument.
See also "Connecting to power" on page 14 and Chapter 1.4.5, "Connecting to Power",
on page 22.
1.5.1.2 Display
The TFT color display shows all measurement and configuration details.
1.5.1.3 RX1 IN / RX2 IN
The RX input connectors are 50 Ω N connectors. Use the RX inputs to connect a

receiving antenna (max. +13 dBm) to the R&S EVSG1000 for RF signal input.
"RX2 In" is supplied as an option (R&S EVSG-B1).

This option allows you to perform two independent measurements simultaneously, for
example on different frequencies. This capability is vital in flight inspection systems
because localizer and glidepath signals must be measured at the same time. An addi-
tional application required in flight inspection systems is the parallel measurement of
two different VOR stations.
1.5.1.4 USB
The front panel provides two female USB connectors (USB-A, 2.0 standard) to connect
a memory device.
The memory device is used to store and reload instrument settings, to provide software
updates and to export measurement data.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 29

Instrument Tour
1.5.1.5 AF Out
Connector for a headset with a 3.5 mm jack plug
1.5.1.6 12 V DC Out
DC output for an active receiving antenna.
1.5.1.7 System Keys
System keys set the instrument to a predefined state, change basic settings, and pro-
vide print and display functions.
Table 1-4: System keys
System key Assigned functions
[Preset] Opens the "Preset" menu.
Creates screenshot and stores it internally.
[Screenshot]
[Audio] Opens the "Audio" menu.
[Display] Opens the "Display" menu.
[Help] Opens the online help.
[Setup] Opens the "Setup" menu containing general instrument settings.
[Mode] Opens the measurement mode selection (for example ILS LOC,
VOR, COM)
1.5.1.8 Softkeys
Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provi-
ded than those that can be accessed directly via the function keys on the instrument.
Softkeys are dynamic, i.e. depending on the selected function key, a different list of
softkeys is displayed on the right side of the screen. A list of softkeys for a certain func-
tion key is also called a menu. Softkeys can either perform a specific function or open
a dialog box.
1.5.1.9 Function Keys
Function keys provide access to the most common measurement settings and func-
tions.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 30

Instrument Tour
Table 1-5: Function keys
Function key Assigned functions
[CH Freq] Sets the center frequency and the start and stop frequencies
[Ampt] Sets the reference level, the displayed dynamic range, and the RF
attenuation for the level display
[BW] Sets the resolution bandwidth
[Meas] Provides the measurement settings for the active measurement mode
[Config] Configures measurements and data input and output
[MTime] Configures the measurement time
[Marker] Sets and positions the absolute and relative measurement markers
(markers and delta markers)
[Mkr]-> Provides search functions for the measurement markers (maximum/

minimum of the trace)
Sets the center frequency to the current marker frequency
[Mkr Fct] Provides further marker functions, such as removing all markers
[Record] Starts and stops the continuous data recording.
[Trigger] Opens the Trigger Menu.
[Single] Saves a single dataset.
1.5.1.10 Keypad
The keypad is used to enter numeric parameters, including the corresponding units. It
contains the following keys.
Type of key Description
Decimal point Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position.
Sign key Changes the sign of a numeric parameter. In the

case of an alphanumeric parameter, inserts a "-" at
the cursor position.
Unit keys Adds the selected unit to the entered numeric value
and complete the entry.
(GHz/-dBm MHz/dBm, kHz/dB, Hz/dB etc.)
In the case of level entries (e.g. in dB) or dimension-
less values, all units have the value "1" as multiply-
ing factor. Thus, they have the same function as an
ENTER key.
ESC Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is

not active. Quits the edit mode, if the edit mode is
active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Cancel" but-
ton it activates that button.
For "Edit" dialog boxes the following mechanism is
used:
● If data entry has been started, it retains the
original value and closes the dialog box.
● If data entry has not been started or has been
completed, it closes the dialog box.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 31

Instrument Tour
Type of key Description
If an alphanumeric entry has already been started,

this key deletes the character to the left of the cur-
sor.
ENTER ● Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries.

The new value is accepted.
● With other entries, this key can be used instead
of the "Hz/dB" unit key.
● In a dialog box, selects the default or focused
element.
1.5.1.11 Rotary Knob
The rotary knob has several functions:

● For numeric entries: increments (clockwise direction) or decrements (counterclock-
wise direction) the instrument parameter at a defined step width
● In lists: toggles between entries
● For markers, limit lines, and other graphical elements on the screen: moves their
position
● For active scroll bars: moves the scroll bar vertically
● For dialog boxes: Acts like the ENTER key when pressed
While you turn the rotary knob, the settings are applied immediately, and the results
are updated accordingly.
1.5.1.12 Navigation Keys
The navigation keys can be used alternatively to the rotary knob to navigate through
dialog boxes, diagrams or tables.
● Arrow Up/Arrow Down Keys
The <arrow up> or <arrow down> keys do the following:
– For numeric entries: increments (Arrow Up) or decrements (Arrow Down) the
instrument parameter at a defined step width
– In a list: scrolls forward and backward through the list entries
– In a table: moves the selection bar vertically
– In windows or dialog boxes with a vertical scroll bar: moves the scroll bar
● Arrow Left/Arrow Right Keys
The <arrow left> or <arrow right> keys do the following:
– In an alphanumeric edit dialog box, move the cursor.
– In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries.
– In a table, move the selection bar horizontally.
– In windows or dialog boxes with horizontal scroll bar, move the scroll bar.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 32

Instrument Tour
1.5.2 Rear Panel
1 2
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
Figure 1-2: R&S EVSG1000 - Rear panel view
1 = Loudspeaker
2 = Li-Ion battery pack
3 = USB
4 = LAN
5 = RS232-GPS
6 = PPS In
7 = Trigger In
8 = LF In
9 = Demod Out
10 = Power Supply
The meanings of the labels on the product are described in Chapter 1.1.2, "Labels on
the Product", on page 17 and Chapter 1.5.2.10, "Device ID", on page 35.
● Power Supply..........................................................................................................33
● Li-Ion Battery Pack..................................................................................................34
● LAN (Ethernet)........................................................................................................ 34
● RS232 GPS.............................................................................................................34
● PPS In.....................................................................................................................34
● Trigger In.................................................................................................................34
● LF In (Baseband/Low Frequency Input)..................................................................34
● Demod Out..............................................................................................................35
● Loudspeaker........................................................................................................... 35
● Device ID.................................................................................................................35
1.5.2.1 Power Supply
XLR connector for an external DC power source (10 V DC to 28 V DC)
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 33

Instrument Tour
For details, refer to "Connecting to power" on page 14 and Chapter 1.4.5, "Connecting
to Power", on page 22.
1.5.2.2 Li-Ion Battery Pack
With the Li-Ion battery pack (options (R&S EVSG-B2 and R&S EVSG-B3), the
R&S EVSG1000 can be operated independently of an AC or DC power supply.
The charging circuit is protected by an overload protection and an overheating protec-
tion.
Generally, the internal battery pack can be charged during operation with the AC/DC
power supply or with an external DC voltage supply providing more than 12 V DC.
Note, however, that charging can take longer when the instrument is in use.
For details, see "Handling batteries safely" on page 16 and Chapter 1.4.5.3, "Using an
Optional Battery Pack (R&S EVSG-B3)", on page 24.
1.5.2.3 LAN (Ethernet)
Through the LAN connection (Fast Ethernet), all functions of the R&S EVSG1000 can
be remotely operated. The LAN connection can also be used to stream measurement
data (TCP port 8000; for I/Q data: 8001 (RX1) or 8002 (RX2)). IP Addresses and sub-
net mask are defined in the setup menu. The data transfer rate is 100 Mbit/s.
1.5.2.4 RS232 GPS
2-port RS232, 9-pin D-Sub connector for a GPS receiver providing NMEA protocol
data. The NMEA protocol data is displayed and stored with the recorded data (requires
option R&S EVSG-K20).
1.5.2.5 PPS In
SMA connector with 1 MΩ impedance. Provides a PPS signal from an external GPS
device for precise synchronization during data logging (requires option R&S EVSG-
K20).
1.5.2.6 Trigger In
BNC connector to provide an external trigger for data recording. The voltage level is
3.3 V to 12 V. The typical input impedance is 1 MΩ.
1.5.2.7 LF In (Baseband/Low Frequency Input)
BNC socket, 50 Ω/20 kΩ to input an AF signal or signals with a very low IF (<25 kHz)
to the R&S EVSG1000 for further analysis of typical AF parameters. Furthermore, LF
input allows for analysis of non-directional beacon (NDB) signals from 190 kHz to
1750 kHz.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 34

Instrument Tour
Analyzing LF input requires option R&S EVSG1-K7.
1.5.2.8 Demod Out
BNC connector to output a demodulated signal for connected devices, for example an
oscilloscope
1.5.2.9 Loudspeaker
Provides the AF output also available via the Chapter 1.5.1.5, "AF Out", on page 30
headphone connector.
1.5.2.10 Device ID
The unique device identifier is provided as a barcode sticker on the rear panel of the
R&S EVSG1000.
It consists of the device order number and a serial number.
The serial number is used to define the default instrument name, which is:
<Type><variant>-<serial_number>
For example, EVSG1000-123456.
The instrument name is required to establish a connection to the instrument in a LAN.
1.5.3 Accessories
Following accessories are available for the operation of the R&S EVSG1000.
● Weather protection bag (R&S EVSG-Z1)
The weather protection bag has a transparent cover that allows you to use the
R&S EVSG1000 in the field even under adverse weather conditions. The front
pocket can be used to transport accessories, such as the external power supply.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 35

Instrument Tour
Figure 1-3: Weather protection bag
● Rugged Transport case (R&S EVSG-Z2)

A hard-top case with trolley functionality.
Figure 1-4: Transport Case
● ILS / VOR Dipole Antenna (R&S EVS-Z3)

The lightweight design of the ILS/VOR dipole antenna and its compact size makes
this antenna ideal for mobile measurements in the field. The antenna comes with
two sets of rods of different lengths to support the two frequency ranges. The tele-
scopic mast can be extended to 3.1 m.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 36

Instrument Tour
Figure 1-5: ILS / VOR Dipole Antenna
● Antenna bag (R&S EVS-Z4)

The carrying bag allows you to transport all the antenna elements and the tele-
scopic mast safely.
Figure 1-6: Antenna bag
● Display protection cover (R&S EVS-Z6)

The protective hard cover protects the front panel during transport.
Figure 1-7: Display protection cover
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 37

Operating Basics
● 19''-adapter (R&S EVSG-Z7)

This option is required to mount the R&S EVSG1000 in a 19'' rack (e.g. in a mea-
surement vehicle).
1.6 Operating Basics

The R&S EVSG1000 is designed for ground inspection and is thus optimized for man-
ual operation, via the graphical user interface.
Nevertheless, the instrument can also be controlled remotely, either by executing pre-
defined commands, or by simulating the user interface on a remotely connected
device.
This chapter provides an overview on how to work with the R&S EVSG1000. It
describes what kind of information is displayed on the screen and how to operate the
R&S EVSG1000 manually and remotely.
● Understanding the Display Information................................................................... 38
● Manual Operation....................................................................................................40
● Manual Operation from a VNC Viewer....................................................................44
● Remote Control....................................................................................................... 47
1.6.1 Understanding the Display Information
The following figure shows a typical screen display on the R&S EVSG1000. All differ-
ent screen elements are labeled. They are explained in more detail in the following
sections.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 38

Operating Basics
1 2 3
Figure 1-8: R&S EVSG1000 - GUI overview
1 = Measurement settings area (numeric modes only)

2 = Measurement result area
3 = Softkeys to edit settings and activate functions
4 = Status bar
Measurement settings and results area

During a measurement, the available settings are displayed at the top of the screen;
the measurement results at the bottom. If a general instrument setting or data manage-
ment function is selected, the settings and information are displayed in the main part of
the screen.
Which settings and results are displayed depends on the current measurement or
instrument function. See the following chapters for details:
● Chapter 2, "Measurements and Results", on page 48
● Chapter 8, "Data Management", on page 215
● Chapter 7, "Power Sensor Support (Option R&S EVSG-K24)", on page 213
● Chapter 9, "Common Instrument Settings", on page 226
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 39

Operating Basics
Softkeys
Softkeys are virtual function keys whose actual function is defined by the software,
depending on the currently selected measurement mode or key, or both.
Sometimes, more functions are available than softkeys can be displayed at the same
time. In this case, a second menu of functions is available, indicated by "1/2" and "2/2"
beneath the softkeys in the display. To switch between the two menus of softkey func-
tions, press the "More softkeys" key beneath the softkeys on the front panel of the
R&S EVSG1000.
Softkeys can perform a function directly, or open a dialog or submenu with further set-
tings and functions. Some softkeys are directly associated with an input field in the
measurement settings area of the window. If the softkey shows a vertical blue line at
the edge, you can edit the value of the corresponding setting directly in the measure-
ment settings area of the window. If the blue line is not shown, the setting is read-only.
To toggle between the edit mode and read-only mode, select the softkey again.
Figure 1-9: Softkey with an associated input field
Status bar
The status bar at the bottom of the screen contains information on the operating status
of the instrument.
● Current list of data recording and size of this list
(See Chapter 8.2, "Recording Measurement Data", on page 217)
● Local or remote operation (see Chapter 1.6.4, "Remote Control", on page 47)
● Battery status and charge status (in %)
(See Chapter 9.6, "Instrument Configuration and Operating Status Settings",
on page 234)
1.6.2 Manual Operation
This chapter describes how to operate the R&S EVSG1000 directly on the instrument,
using graphical interaction methods. During manual operation, the R&S EVSG1000
display indicates "Local" in the status bar.
1.6.2.1 Changing Settings and Activating Functions
All functions available on the R&S EVSG1000 can be accessed using the keys on the
front panel of the instrument. Some keys provide a softkey menu on the display with
further functions and settings.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 40

Operating Basics
1. Select a key on the front panel of the instrument to activate a function directly, or to
display a softkey menu.
2. Select the softkey for the setting or function as required.

If necessary, select the "More softkeys" key to switch to the second softkey menu.
The function is activated, or a new window is displayed to view or change specific
settings.
3. To set the focus on a specific setting in the displayed window, scroll through the
individual settings by turning the rotary knob or pressing the Up and Down arrow
keys on the front panel (see Chapter 1.6.2.2, "Entering Data", on page 41).
4. Scroll through the available setting values by turning the rotary knob or pressing
the Up and Down arrow keys on the front panel, or enter a numeric or alphanu-
meric value as described in Chapter 1.6.2.2, "Entering Data", on page 41.
Note: While you turn the rotary knob, the settings are applied immediately. If you
enter a value using the keypad, you must confirm the setting before the settings
are applied.
5. Confirm the new setting and remove the focus by pressing the rotary knob or the
[ENTER] key on the front panel.
1.6.2.2 Entering Data
You enter data in input fields using elements provided by the front panel, e.g. the key-
pad, rotary knob, or navigation keys.
Entering numeric parameters

If a field requires numeric input, the keypad provides only numbers.
1. Enter the parameter value using the keypad, or change the currently used parame-
ter value by turning the rotary knob or pressing the Up or Down arrow keys.
2. After entering the numeric value via keypad, press the corresponding unit key.
The unit is added to the entry.
3. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing the
[ENTER] key or any of the unit keys.
Entering numbers and (special) characters via the keypad

If a field requires alphanumeric input, use the keypad on the front panel of the
R&S EVSG1000. Every alphanumeric key represents several characters and one num-
ber. The decimal point key (.) represents special characters, and the sign key (-) tog-
gles between capital and small letters. For the assignment refer to Table 1-6.
1. Press the key once to enter the first possible value.
All characters available via this key are displayed.
2. To choose another value provided by this key, press the key again, until your
desired value is displayed.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 41

Operating Basics
3. With every key stroke, the next possible value of this key is displayed. If all possi-
ble values have been displayed, the series starts with the first value again. For
information on the series refer to Table 1-6.
4. To change from capital to small letters and vice versa, press the sign key (-).
5. When you have chosen the desired value, wait for 2 seconds (to use the same key
again), or start the next entry by pressing another key.
Entering a blank
► Press the "0" key and wait 2 seconds.
Correcting an entry
1. Using the arrow keys (see Chapter 1.5.1.12, "Navigation Keys", on page 32), move
the cursor to the right of the entry you want to delete.
2. Press the [BACK] key.

The entry to the left of the cursor is deleted.
3. Enter your correction.
Completing the entry
► Press the [ENTER] key or the rotary knob.

For numeric values, the default unit is appended to the numeric input.
To enter a value using a different unit, select the corresponding key.
Aborting the entry
► Press the [ESC] key.

The previous entry is restored.
Table 1-6: Keys for alphanumeric parameters
Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided

(upper inscription)
7 7µΩ°€¥$¢
8 A B C 8 Ä ÆÅ Ç
9 DEF9É
4 GHI4
5 JKL5
6 MNO6ŇÖ
1 PQRS1
2 TUV2Ü
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 42

Operating Basics
Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided

(upper inscription)
3 WXYZ3
0 <blank> 0 – @ + / \ < > = % &
. .*:_,;"'?()#
– <toggles between capital and small letters>
1.6.2.3 Getting Help
If any questions or problems concerning the R&S EVSG1000 arise, an online help sys-
tem is provided on the instrument and can be consulted at any time.
Displaying the online help system on the instrument

1. Press the [Help] key on the front panel.
2. Press [Enter] to display the user manual contents.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 43

Operating Basics
Navigating in the help system
To move up and down

► Use the arrow keys.
To switch between areas

► Press the Field left and Field right keys.
VNC:
Press the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys.
To follow a link
► Press [Enter].
To exit the online help and return to the firmware view

► Press [ESC].
1.6.3 Manual Operation from a VNC Viewer
As an alternative to operating the R&S EVSG1000 directly on the instrument, you can
perform the same tasks from a connected PC using a keyboard. You merely require a
VNC viewer application, of which a variety is available on the Internet free of charge.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 44

Operating Basics
Using a VNC viewer application, you simply connect to the instrument, defined by its IP
address. The display of the R&S EVSG1000 is shown on the control PC. The keys and
other graphical user interface elements are operated using associated keyboard short-
cuts on the connected keyboard.
Operation via VNC is not possible during remote control (indicated by "Remote" in the
status bar). To switch from remote control to manual operation, press [ESC].
Access to the R&S EVSG1000 via VNC can be protected by a password. In this case,
enter instrument as the password in the login window.
(See also Chapter 9.4, "Network (Remote) Settings", on page 230.)
Keyboard commands for operation via a VNC viewer

Keyboard commands (VNC viewer) shows the mapping between the keyboard shortcut
and the interface element on the R&S EVSG1000.
Table 1-7: Keyboard commands (VNC viewer)
Keyboard Usage
y Preset
c Audio
v Display
b Help
n Setup
m Mode
z Undo
r Redo
PAGE UP Field right
PAGE DOWN Field left
x Screenshot
a Meas
s Config
F1 Softkey 1
F2 Softkey 2
F3 Softkey 3
F4 Softkey 4
F5 Softkey 5
F6 Softkey 6
F7 Softkey 7
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 45

Operating Basics
Keyboard Usage
F8
Show additional softkeys
k Trigger
l Single
ESC ESC
0 0
1 1
4 4
7 7
q CH/FREQ
d MTime
BACKSPACE Back
ENTER Enter
. .
2 2
5 5
8 8
w Ampt
F9 Hz
3 3
6 6
9 9
e BW (Bandwidth)
F10 kHz
F11 MHz
F12 GHz
p Record
i Marker
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 46

Operating Basics
1.6.4 Remote Control
You can control the R&S EVSG1000, including data transfer, remotely from a PC using
the LAN connection (Fast Ethernet).
You define the IP address and subnet mask in the "Setup" menu.
Remote control is performed using predefined remote commands which are sent from
the control PC to the R&S EVSG1000. The R&S EVSG1000 can also return queried
data to the control PC.
For details on the available remote commands, see Chapter 10, "Remote Commands",
on page 242.
While in remote control, the R&S EVSG1000 display indicates "Remote" in the status
bar. During remote control, the instrument is locked for manual operation via VNC. To
return to manual operation, press [ESC].
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 47

R&S®EVSG1000 Measurements and Results
2 Measurements and Results

The R&S EVSG1000 provides both numerical and graphical results, depending on the
current measurement task.
Different measurement tasks are performed in individual measurement modes, some
of which are optional. The individual measurement modes are described in detail in the
subsequent chapters of this documentation.
If an optional second receiver board (R&S EVSG-B2) is installed, each receiver board
can be configured to perform different measurement tasks. Thus, you can perform two
different measurements on the same input signal simultaneously. You must then select
the receiver board whose results are displayed in the display settings (see "RX Unit 1 /
RX Unit 2" on page 227).
Figure 2-1: Measurement mode selection
Measurement modes with numerical results

The following measurement modes provide numerical results:
● ILS LOC mode - determines localizer signal parameters
● ILS GP mode - determines glidepath signal parameters
● ILS MB mode - determines marker beacon signal parameters
● VOR mode (R&S EVSG-K2) - determines modulation and signal parameters, as
well as voice identifier parameters
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 48

● COM (R&S EVSG-K6) - determines signal parameters from VHF/UHF communica-

tion channels
● NDB mode (R&S EVSG1-K7) - analyzes non-directional beacon signals
Measurement modes with graphical results

The following measurement modes provide graphical results:
● RF Spectrum mode (R&S EVSG-K10) - displays the power vs. frequency diagram
(spectrum) for a variable frequency range of the input signal
● IF Spectrum mode (R&S EVSG-K10) - displays an enlarged view of the spectrum
for a fixed frequency of the input signal
● AF Spectrum mode (R&S EVSG-K11) - displays the spectrum of a demodulated
RF signal with AM components
● AF Time Domain mode (R&S EVSG-K12) - displays the frequency vs. time dia-
gram of the input signal, similar to an oscilloscope
Generally, each mode is configured individually. When you switch modes, the most
recently defined settings for that mode are applied.
However, graphical results can also be displayed directly from the measurement
modes with numeric results. In this case, the settings for the current mode are applied
to the graphical results.
If the original measurement mode analyzes multiple carriers, you must select the car-
rier for which you want to see the graphical results when you switch the mode.
Measurement modes with both numerical and graphical results

The following measurement modes provide both numerical and graphical results:
● GBAS mode (R&S EVSG-K4/-K5) - displays measured and decoded information
from GBAS/SCAT-I sequences, frames, and slots, and graphical displays for indi-
vidual slots
Remote commands to retrieve results:

GETMDEF on page 244
GETMEAS on page 243
GBAS:GETMDEF on page 339
GBAS:GETMEAS on page 339
Common Numerical Measurement Mode Settings

The following settings are displayed for most numerical measurement modes.
RX board (RX1 | RX2)...................................................................................................50
Measurement mode...................................................................................................... 50
Channel (CH)................................................................................................................ 50
Frequency (FREQ)........................................................................................................50
RF attenuation (Att).......................................................................................................50
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 49

Channel definition (1F/2F) - ILS LOC and ILS GP mode only...................................... 50

Level correction (Lev Corr)............................................................................................50
Bandwidth (IF BW)........................................................................................................ 50
Measurement time (MTime).......................................................................................... 50
RX board (RX1 | RX2)

The currently active receiver board. See Chapter 3.2, "Receiver Board", on page 52.
Measurement mode
The currently active measurement mode on the active receiver board, e.g. "ILS LOC".
See Chapter 3.3, "Measurement Mode", on page 52.
Channel (CH)
The receiver frequency channel on the active receiver board according to the ICAO fre-
quency list. See "Channel Frequency Configuration (CH FREQ)" on page 79.
Frequency (FREQ)
The measured frequency on the active receiver board. See "Channel Frequency Con-
figuration (CH FREQ)" on page 79.
RF attenuation (Att)
The used attenuation mode; see also "RF Mode" on page 81.
Channel definition (1F/2F) - ILS LOC and ILS GP mode only

The ILS Localizer and Glidepath measurements can detect both course and clearance
data simultaneously. Alternatively, the individual channels can be measured only, or
any one or two user-defined frequencies. By default, a wideband measurement is per-
formed. The displayed measurement results depend on the selected channel and fre-
quency configuration.
See Chapter 4.1.4.2, "Channel and Frequency Configuration", on page 76.
Level correction (Lev Corr)

The applied level correction by a transducer. See "Transducer Correction"
on page 81.
Bandwidth (IF BW)

Bandwidth on which the measurement is performed. Depends on the Channel defini-
tion (1F/2F) - ILS LOC and ILS GP mode only. See Chapter 4.1.4.4, "Bandwidth (BW)",
on page 81.
Measurement time (MTime)

The duration of a single measurement. See Chapter 4.1.4.6, "Setting the Measurement
Time (MTime)", on page 86.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 50

R&S®EVSG1000 Configuring the Input Signal and Measurement Mode
Input Signal Settings
3 Configuring the Input Signal and Measure-

ment Mode
The following settings are common to all measurement modes. They define which data
is measured and how, and are indicated at the top of the measurement window.
● Input Signal Settings............................................................................................... 51
● Receiver Board....................................................................................................... 52
● Measurement Mode................................................................................................ 52
3.1 Input Signal Settings

Access: [Setup] > "Signal In"
Access VNC: [n] > [F1]
The following settings configure the receiver signal to be measured by the
R&S EVSG1000.
For some measurement modes, you can switch the type of signal input. See the
description of the individual modes.
RX2 is only available with the option R&S EVSG-B1.
Correction RX 1 In/ Correction RX 2 In......................................................................... 51
Correction RX 1 In/ Correction RX 2 In

Configures the correction of the RX 1/ RX 2 input signal, respectively (in dB).
("Correction RX 2 In" is only available with option R&S EVSG-B1.)
This value is subtracted from all levels and compensates effects of upstream lines and
attenuators.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 51

Measurement Mode
3.2 Receiver Board

If a second receiver board is installed (requires the R&S EVSG-B1 option), each
receiver board can be configured to perform different measurement tasks.
To select the receiver board to configure

1. Press the [Mode] key on the front panel.
2. Select the "RX Unit 1" or "RX Unit 2" softkey.
3. Press [Enter] or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
To select the receiver board via VNC

1. Press the [m] key on the remote keyboard.
2. Press the [PAGE UP] or [PAGE DOWN] keys to toggle between the "RX Unit 1"
and "RX Unit 2".
3. Press [Enter] to confirm the selection.
Remote command:
CH on page 248
3.3 Measurement Mode

The measurement mode determines the type of signal for which the measurement is
performed (see Chapter 2, "Measurements and Results", on page 48).
To select a measurement mode

1. Press the [Mode] key on the front panel.
2. Select the required measurement mode using the rotary knob or arrow keys.
3. Press [Enter] or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
To select a measurement mode via VNC

1. Press the [m] key on the remote keyboard.
2. Select the required measurement mode using the arrow keys.
3. Press [Enter] to confirm the selection.
Remote commands:
MODE_LOC on page 273
MODE_GP on page 273
MODE_MB on page 306
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 52

Measurement Mode
MODE_VOR on page 313

MODE_COM on page 322
MODE_FSCAN on page 351
MODE_IFSPECT on page 355
MODE_FFT on page 360
MODE_SCOPE on page 367
MODE_GBAS on page 336
MODE_NDB on page 345
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 53

R&S®EVSG1000 Numeric Measurement Modes
ILS Localizer and ILS Glidepath (GP) Modes
4 Numeric Measurement Modes

● ILS Localizer and ILS Glidepath (GP) Modes......................................................... 54
● ILS Marker Beacon Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K3)................................................ 87
● VOR Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K2)....................................................................... 97
● COM Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K6)..................................................................... 118
● Non-Directional Beacon Mode (Option R&S EVSG1-K7)..................................... 128
4.1 ILS Localizer and ILS Glidepath (GP) Modes

Access: [Mode] > "ILS LOC"/ "ILS GP"
Access VNC: [m] > Down arrow key
The ILS Localizer and Glidepath measurements demodulate the AM components of
the ILS signal and calculate characteristic parameters such as the modulation depth
and frequency or phase for specific components. Furthermore, an FFT is performed on
all components of the AF signal. The resulting AF spectrum allows you to measure the
required components and their distortions (harmonics).
Using the option R&S EVSG1-K7, you can also analyze the AF components of the ILS
signal to determine AF parameters of the carrier.
Furthermore, you can use the LF input to measure signals with a very low intermediate
frequency (<25 kHz). Such signals are provided as output at test points of a transmit-
ter, for example, for tuning purposes.
Remote command:
MODE_LOC on page 273
MODE_GP on page 273
● Localizer Basics...................................................................................................... 54
● Glide Slope Basics.................................................................................................. 55
● ILS Localizer and Glidepath Measurements and Results....................................... 56
● ILS Localizer and Glidepath Configuration..............................................................75
4.1.1 Localizer Basics
The localizer transmitter is located near the end of the runway (nearest to the start of
the aircraft approach). Typically, horizontally aligned antennas transmit two intersecting
main beams beside one another at carrier frequencies between 108 MHz and
112 MHz. As seen from the approaching aircraft coming in for a landing, the left beam
is usually modulated at 90 Hz and the right beam at 150 Hz.
The information on position is provided after demodulation of the beam signals by eval-
uating the difference in depth of modulation (DDM).
DDM = m(x90) – m(x150)
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 54

The following scenarios are possible:

● Predominance of the 90 Hz beam: the aircraft is too far to the left and must turn to
the right
● Predominance of the 150 Hz beam: the aircraft is too far to the right and must turn
to the left
● The signal strength from both beams is equal: the aircraft is in the center, on the
right course.
Course and clearance signals

The landing path is divided into the region further away from the runway, referred to as
the course, and the runway itself, referred to as the clearance. Localizers are posi-
tioned in both areas, however they transmit their ILS signals using different frequen-
cies, one that must travel farther, one for close-up. The frequencies differ only in a few
kiloherz. The aircraft always receives both signals, and cannot (and need not) distin-
guish the two. However, for test purposes, it can be useful to measure the signals indi-
vidually.
Morse code identification signal

The localizer not only allows the aircraft to determine its position, it also provides iden-
tification of the ILS transmitter. The localizer periodically transmits a Morse code at
1020 Hz which uniquely identifies the transmitter. The receiver thus knows the ILS is
operating correctly and that it is receiving the correct signal. The glide slope station
does not transmit an identification signal.
4.1.2 Glide Slope Basics
The following description is taken from the Rohde & Schwarz Application Note
1MA193: "Aeronautical radio navigation measurement solutions".
The glide slope transmitter is located near the end of the runway (nearest to the start of
the aircraft approach).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 55

Figure 4-1: Approach navigation using instrument landing system (ILS)
Typically, vertically aligned antennas transmit two intersecting main beams on top of
one another at carrier frequencies between 329 MHz and 335 MHz. The top beam is
usually modulated at 90 Hz and the beam below at 150 Hz.
The information on position is provided after demodulation of the beam signals by eval-
uating the difference in depth of modulation (DDM). The following scenarios are possi-
ble:
● Predominance of the 90 Hz beam: the aircraft is too high and must descend
● Predominance of the 150 Hz beam: the aircraft is too low and needs to climb
● The signal strength from both beams is equal: the aircraft is in the center, on the
right course.
If there is a predominance of the 90 Hz beam, then the aircraft is too high and must
descend. A predominant 150 Hz means that the aircraft is too low and needs to climb.
4.1.3 ILS Localizer and Glidepath Measurements and Results
A single receiver board in the R&S EVSG1000 can measure data at two different
receiver frequencies at the same time. Therefore, the ILS Localizer and Glidepath
measurements can detect both course and clearance data simultaneously, and display
the individual results. Alternatively, the individual channels can be measured only, or
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 56

formed to obtain an initial overview of the input signal and determine the basic signal
characteristics. The displayed measurement results depend on the selected channel
and frequency configuration.
Autotune function
An autotune function is available to determine the precise frequencies of the signal
components automatically. Thus, the demodulation bandwidth can be selected very
precisely. Automatic mode is indicated by "Autotune" in the measurement settings
area, followed by the current processing status.
The autotune process consists of the following steps:

1. "Search": the R&S EVSG1000 searches the input signal for peaks. You can define
a power threshold that the carrier must exceed to be detected ("Carrier Thresh"
on page 79).
2. "Check": the R&S EVSG1000 checks whether the detected peak is a valid ILS sig-
nal, based on the measured DDM value.
3. "Lock": the R&S EVSG1000 determines a valid ILS signal and remains tuned to
that frequency.
A valid signal is also indicated by a green DDM measurement result, see "DDM
90-150" on page 67. In the recorded dataset, the STIOCPM status indicates a
"V" for valid (see "Status flags" on page 75).
The frequency remains locked until:
● You switch measurement modes
● You change the channel or frequency settings
● You select the Find Carrier function.
In this case, a new search starts.
Adapting the frequency in autotune mode

The autotune function sets the measurement filter position such that the detected fre-
quency is in the center of the filter bandwidth. While the frequency is locked, the filter
position remains unchanged. If the bandwidth is narrow and the signal frequency
changes, e.g. due to changes of the transmitter, the signal may no longer be covered
completely by the measurement filter. In this case, the measurement results are distor-
ted. If you assume the ILS signal frequency might have changed, we recommend per-
forming a new search using the Find Carrier function.
Measurement result views

Due to the large amount of different signal parameters, the ILS Localizer and Glidepath
measurements provide multiple views for the measurement results.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 57

Switching from numeric to graphical results

You can display graphical results directly from the ILS Localizer or Glidepath mode by
selecting the softkey in the "Meas" menu. In this case, the settings for the current mea-
surement are applied to the graphical results.
The graphical results are only availabe for a single carrier. Thus, when you switch to a
graphical measurement mode from an ILS mode, you must select the carrier for which
you want to see the graphical results. When you select the softkey, a submenu is dis-
played to select the carrier.
To return from the graphical results to the ILS Localizer or Glidepath mode, select
"Return" ([F7]).
For details on the graphical results, see:
● Chapter 5.1, "RF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K10)", on page 139
● Chapter 5.2, "IF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K10)", on page 144
● Chapter 5.3, "AF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K11)", on page 149
● Chapter 5.4, "AF Time Domain Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K12)", on page 158
Figure 4-2: ILS Localizer mode main results view
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 58

The following settings are displayed in the measurement settings area of the ILS Local-
izer/ ILS GS mode:
● RX board ("RX1" | "RX2")
The currently active receiver board. See Chapter 3.2, "Receiver Board",
on page 52.
● Measurement mode
The currently active measurement mode on the active receiver board, e.g. "ILS
GP". See Chapter 3.3, "Measurement Mode", on page 52.
● "CH"
Receiver frequency channel, see "Channel Setup" on page 76
● "Freq"
Nominal measurement frequency of the RF signal, see "Freq" on page 80.
● RF attenuation ("Att")
● Frequency selection "1F/2F"
See "Carrier Configuration (1F/2F Config)" on page 77
● "Autotune"
Status of the automatic carrier selection, see "Autotune function" on page 57
● "Lev Corr"
Applied level correction, see "Transducer Correction" on page 81
● "IF BW"
Measurement bandwidth, see Chapter 4.1.4.4, "Bandwidth (BW)", on page 81
● Measurement time ("MTime")
See Chapter 4.1.4.6, "Setting the Measurement Time (MTime)", on page 86.
Low frequency (LF In) measurements for ILS signals

Using the option R&S EVSG1-K7, you can also analyze the AF components of the ILS
signal to determine AF parameters of the carrier.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 59

Figure 4-3: AF signal analysis in ILS GP mode
For LF input, the following settings are displayed:

on page 52.
The currently active measurement mode on the active receiver board, e.g. "ILS
GP". See Chapter 3.3, "Measurement Mode", on page 52.
● ("Range")
Sensitivity of the measurement. See "Range" on page 84.
● LF Input type ("LF In Mode")
See "LF In Mode" on page 83.
● "LF coupling"
AC or DC coupling for LF input, see "Coupling" on page 84
● Measurement Bandwidth ("AF In BW")
Measurement bandwidth for LF input. See "AF In BW" on page 154.
● Resolution bandwidth for LF input ("AF Res BW")
Resolution bandwidth with which the AF signal measurement is performed. See
"IF/AF Bandwidth (Dist/ID)" on page 85.
● Measurement time ("MTime")
See Chapter 4.1.4.6, "Setting the Measurement Time (MTime)", on page 86.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 60

Remote command:
VIEW_LLZ on page 283
● RF Level and Frequency Display............................................................................ 61
● IF Spectrum Preview...............................................................................................62
● LF Level, Frequency, and Spectrum Display.......................................................... 63
● ILS Localizer and Glidepath Main View.................................................................. 64
● ILS Localizer Distortion View.................................................................................. 69
● ILS Localizer ID Analysis View................................................................................71
● ILS Localizer Recording View................................................................................. 74
4.1.3.1 RF Level and Frequency Display
The measured RF power and frequency of the input signal are displayed both numeri-
cally and graphically.
Figure 4-4: RF level display
The following results are provided:

● Numeric power level in dBm ("Lev")
For measurements on two frequencies: individual and sum power levels
● Measured frequency offset to the nominal frequency in kHz
● Numeric frequency offset of measured power
● Numeric power sensor level in dBm (if available; "NRP")
● Bargraph indicating the power and a color-coded overload state, where:
– red: overload state, check message
– yellow: power approaching overload state
– green: power in a valid range
● If applicable: overload messages
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 61

Overload messages
The following messages indicate an overload:
● "RF Overload"
Overload of the input mixer or of the analog IF path.
● "IF Overload"
Overload of the IF signal.
● "ADC Overload"
The dynamic range of the AD-converter is exceeded (clipping).
A combination of these overloads is also possible.
In all cases, set the RF attenuation to normal or low distortion (for RF input), or reduce
the input level.
In recorded data lists, overloads are indicated by an "O", see "Status flags"
on page 75.

LA? on page 244
RF? on page 245
ILS LOC/GS mode:
FSINGLE on page 297
FCRS on page 296
FCLR on page 296
LCRS on page 298
LCLR on page 298
4.1.3.2 IF Spectrum Preview
A preview of the measured spectrum (power level vs. frequency) for the IF (intermedi-
ate frequency) signal is provided. The center frequency is the nominal channel fre-
quency. The frequency range shows the measured bandwidth. The power range is
selected such that the noise level remains visible.
Figure 4-5: IF spectrum preview
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 62

This preview spectrum allows you to check if the current measurement settings are
appropriate, such as the bandwidth or frequency offsets. For a larger, more detailed
spectrum diagram, select one of the graphical Spectrum modes. If you switch to such a
mode directly from a numeric measurement mode, the current measurement settings
are applied to the spectrum automatically.
4.1.3.3 LF Level, Frequency, and Spectrum Display
For LF or low frequency input, the measured AF power and frequency of the input sig-
nal are displayed both numerically and graphically.
Figure 4-6: LF level display

Lev................................................................................................................................ 63
DC................................................................................................................................. 63
Vmax(pp).......................................................................................................................63
Low IF frequency...........................................................................................................63
Power bargraph.............................................................................................................64
IF spectrum preview......................................................................................................64
Lev
Numeric power level in Volt
Remote command:
LLZ_BB_LEV_V on page 300
DC
AF mode only: Numeric power level of the DC component in Volt
This value indicates the carrier power level (measured at 0 Hz)
Remote command:
LLZ_BB_DC_V on page 300
Vmax(pp)
Maximum peak-to-peak power level in Volt
Remote command:
LLZ_BB_VMAXPP_V on page 300
Low IF frequency
Low IF only: Measured frequency offset to the nominal frequency in kHz
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 63

Remote command:
FSINGLE on page 297
Power bargraph
Bargraph indicating the power (blue) and a color-coded overload state, where:
● green: power in a valid range
● yellow: power approaching overload state
● red: overload state, check message
IF spectrum preview
A preview of the measured IF spectrum (power level vs. frequency) for the AF signal is
provided. The center frequency is 0 Hz (AF mode)or the IF offset (LF mode). The fre-
quency range shows the measured bandwidth.
Remote command:
FFT_GETSPECT on page 366
4.1.3.4 ILS Localizer and Glidepath Main View
The ILS Localizer and Glidepath Main view provides the following results:
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 64

Figure 4-8: ILS Localizer Main view
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 65

Figure 4-9: ILS Glidepath Main view
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 66

Figure 4-10: ILS LF Input Main view
DDM 90-150..................................................................................................................67
SDM 90,150.................................................................................................................. 68
AM 90 Hz...................................................................................................................... 68
Freq 90 Hz.................................................................................................................... 68
AM 150 Hz.................................................................................................................... 68
Freq 150 Hz.................................................................................................................. 68
PHI 90/150.................................................................................................................... 68
ID Code......................................................................................................................... 68
DDM 90-150
Difference in depth of modulation (DDM) between 90 Hz and 150 Hz AM signal (m90 Hz
– m150 Hz)
Note: The DDM value is also displayed graphically as a bargraph for quick evaluation.
A green DDM value indicates a valid ILS signal has been determined.
Remote command:
DD0 on page 296
DD1 on page 296
DCLR on page 296
DCRS on page 296
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 67

SDM 90,150
Sum in Depth of Modulation (SDM); arithmetic sum of the modulation depth of the
90 Hz and the 150 Hz components without any influence of the phase between the
components.
Remote command:
SD0 on page 299
SD1 on page 299
SCLR on page 299
SCRS on page 299
AM 90 Hz
AM modulation depth of 90 Hz ILS component
Remote command:
AM2 on page 294
AM2CLR on page 294
AM2CRS on page 294
Freq 90 Hz
AF frequency of 90 Hz ILS component
Remote command:
AF2 on page 293
AM 150 Hz
Remote command:
AM3 on page 294
AM3CLR on page 294
AM3CRS on page 294
Freq 150 Hz
AF frequency of 150 Hz ILS component
Remote command:
AF3 on page 293
PHI 90/150
Phase angle measurement between 90 Hz and 150 Hz AM signal (90 Hz = reference
signal); measurement range: ±60 degrees
Remote command:
PH on page 298
ID Code
Morse-decoded ID with three or four letters.
Remote command:
AC8 on page 293
AC8 on page 317
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 68

4.1.3.5 ILS Localizer Distortion View
The ILS Localizer Dist view comprises all measurement parameters for the determina-
tion of the distortion factors for the 90 Hz / 150 Hz signal components.
Figure 4-11: ILS Localizer Distortion view
AM 90 Hz...................................................................................................................... 69
K2 90 Hz....................................................................................................................... 70
K3 90 Hz....................................................................................................................... 70
K4 90 Hz....................................................................................................................... 70
THD 90 Hz.................................................................................................................... 70
Res. FM 90....................................................................................................................70
AM 150 Hz.................................................................................................................... 70
K2 150 Hz..................................................................................................................... 70
K3 150 Hz..................................................................................................................... 71
K4 150 Hz..................................................................................................................... 71
THD 150 Hz.................................................................................................................. 71
Res. FM 150..................................................................................................................71
AM (90+150)................................................................................................................. 71
AM 90 Hz
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 69

Remote command:
AM2 on page 294
AM2CLR on page 294
AM2CRS on page 294
K2 90 Hz
Distortion 2nd order, 90 Hz signal
Remote command:
K2_90 on page 297
K3 90 Hz
Distortion 3rd order, 90 Hz signal
Remote command:
K3_90 on page 297
K4 90 Hz
Distortion 4th order, 90 Hz signal
Remote command:
K4_90 on page 297
THD 90 Hz
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), 90 Hz signal
Remote command:
THD_90 on page 300
Res. FM 90
Residual frequency modulation for 90 Hz signal
Configure the filter to be used using "Res. FM Filt. (ILS only)" on page 82.
Remote command:
RESIDFM_90 on page 299
AM 150 Hz
Remote command:
AM3 on page 294
AM3CLR on page 294
AM3CRS on page 294
K2 150 Hz
Relative amplitude of an AF signal's second harmonic, calculated as:
<amplitude of second harmonic> / <amplitude of fundamental>
For 90 Hz + 150 Hz:
<mean amplitude of second harmonics> / <mean amplitude of fundamentals>
Remote command:
K2_150 on page 297
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 70

K3 150 Hz
Relative amplitude of an AF signal's third harmonic, calculated as:
<amplitude of third harmonic> / <amplitude of fundamental>
For 90 Hz + 150 Hz:
<mean amplitude of third harmonics> / <mean amplitude of fundamentals>
Remote command:
K3_150 on page 297
K4 150 Hz
Relative amplitude of the fourth harmonic for the 150 Hz signal component
Remote command:
K4_150 on page 298
THD 150 Hz
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for the 150 Hz signal component
Remote command:
THD_150 on page 300
Res. FM 150
Residual frequency modulation for 150 Hz signal
Remote command:
RESIDFM_150 on page 299
AM (90+150)
Total AM modulation depth of the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz components, taking the phase
between the components into account.
Remote command:
AMMOD240 on page 295
4.1.3.6 ILS Localizer ID Analysis View
The ILS Localizer ID Analysis view provides the following results.
This view is not available for clearance (CLR) signals in two-frequency systems.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 71

Figure 4-12: ID Analysis view
DDM 90-150..................................................................................................................72
Last ID...........................................................................................................................73
ID Code......................................................................................................................... 73
ID Period....................................................................................................................... 73
Dot Length.....................................................................................................................73
Dash Length..................................................................................................................73
Dot-Dash Gap............................................................................................................... 73
Letter Gap..................................................................................................................... 73
ID AM............................................................................................................................ 73
ID Freq.......................................................................................................................... 73
DDM 90-150
Difference in depth of modulation (DDM) between 90 Hz and 150 Hz AM signal (m90 Hz
– m150 Hz)
Note: The DDM value is also displayed graphically as a bargraph for quick evaluation.
A green DDM value indicates a valid ILS signal has been determined.
Remote command:
DD0 on page 296
DD1 on page 296
DCLR on page 296
DCRS on page 296
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 72

Last ID
Time since last ID pulse was measured
Remote command:
LASTID_TIME on page 302
ID Code
Remote command:
AC8 on page 293
AC8 on page 317
ID Period
Time between two measured ID pulses
Remote command:
ID_PERIOD on page 302
Dot Length
Length of time a dot is transmitted in the used Morse code in milliseconds.
Remote command:
ID_DOT_LENGTH on page 301
Dash Length
Length of time a dash is transmitted in the used Morse cod in milliseconds.
Remote command:
ID_DASH_LENGTH on page 301
Dot-Dash Gap
Length of time that passes between a transmitted dot and a dash in the used Morse
code in milliseconds.
Remote command:
ID_DOTDASH_GAP on page 301
Letter Gap
Length of time that passes between two transmitted letters in the used Morse code in
milliseconds.
Remote command:
ID_LETTER_GAP on page 301
ID AM
AM Modulation depth of identifier signal (default: 1020 Hz).
Remote command:
AM8 on page 295
AM8 on page 318
ID Freq
Frequency of the morse signal.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 73

Remote command:
AF8 on page 293
AF8 on page 318
4.1.3.7 ILS Localizer Recording View
The Recording view displays the recorded data for ILS Localizer measurements from
the selected data list (see "List" on page 219). If available, the stored GPS data from
the GPS receiver is also displayed.
Which measurement results are stored is described in the remote commands, see
GETDATADEF on page 378.
The individual measurement results are described in the result views.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 74

Status flags
The "STIOCPMV" value contains status flags, if applicable:
● S: Start (started manually)
● T: Triggered (externally)
● I: Invalid
● O: Overload (RF input signal too high)
● C: Corrected (includes RF input correction factor)
● P: PPS-synced
● M: Morse ID available
● V: Valid signal (ILS LOC/GP and VOR only)
For details on data logging see Chapter 8.2, "Recording Measurement Data",
on page 217.
Remote commands to retrieve data:

GETDATADEF on page 378
GETDATASET on page 378
4.1.4 ILS Localizer and Glidepath Configuration
The following settings are available for the ILS Localizer and Glidepath measurements.
Settings for recording, including trigger settings, are described in Chapter 8.2, "Record-
ing Measurement Data", on page 217.
● Configuring the Input Signal....................................................................................75

● Channel and Frequency Configuration................................................................... 76
● Ampt........................................................................................................................80
● Bandwidth (BW)...................................................................................................... 81
● LF Input Configuration.............................................................................................82
● Setting the Measurement Time (MTime).................................................................86
● DDM and SDM Configuration..................................................................................86
4.1.4.1 Configuring the Input Signal
The ILS modes can analyze RF or LF input. For details on configuring LF input mea-
surements, see Chapter 4.1.4.5, "LF Input Configuration", on page 82.
Input RF/LF
Access: [Config]
Access VNC: [s]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 75

Configures the input source for the currently selected receiver (see "To select the
receiver board to configure" on page 52).
For details on the connectors see Chapter 1.5.1.3, "RX1 IN / RX2 IN", on page 29.
"RF In" An RF signal is provided from the RX 1 In/RX 2 In connectors on the
front of the R&S EVSG1000. They are connected to a receiving
antenna (max. +13 dBm). The antenna must correspond to the speci-
fied frequency range for the measurement.
"LF In" An AF or low frequency signal is provided at the LF In input connector
on the rear side of the R&S EVSG1000.
If both receivers are used, only one of them can be set to analyze
input from "LF In".
Remote command:
GS_RFLF_INPUT on page 290
LLZ_RFLF_INPUT on page 281
VOR_RFLF_INPUT on page 315
FFT_RFLF_INPUT on page 365
SCOPE_RFLF_INPUT on page 370
SETUP:INPUT on page 248
4.1.4.2 Channel and Frequency Configuration
carriers simultaneously. As an alternative, the individual carriers can be measured only,
or any one or two user-defined frequencies. By default, a wideband measurement is
performed to obtain an initial overview of the input signal and determine the basic sig-
nal characteristics. An autotune function is available to determine the precise frequen-
cies of the signal components automatically. Thus, the demodulation bandwidth can be
selected very precisely. The available measurement settings depend on the selected
channel and frequency configuration.
● Channel Setup........................................................................................................ 76
● Carrier Configuration (1F/2F Config).......................................................................77
● Channel Frequency Configuration (CH FREQ).......................................................79
Channel Setup
Access: > [Meas] > "1F/2F"
Access VNC: [m] > [F1]
1F/2F
Selects the number of frequencies or channels to be measured.
For all frequencies except the wideband measurement, the autotune function automati-
cally determines the measurement frequency (see "CRS/CLR Carr (Autotune function)"
on page 78).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 76

"1F" One frequency only is measured, namely the nominal frequency,

which is also the center frequency.
The nominal frequency is configured by the Channel Frequency Con-
figuration (CH FREQ) settings.
"2F" Two frequencies are measured at the same time. Which frequencies
are measured is configured by the Channel Frequency Configuration
(CH FREQ) settings.
The numeric results are calculated as the sum of both frequencies. In
the RF Level display, the individual carriers are also indicated. In the
RF Spectrum preview, both carriers are displayed.
"2F CRS" Both the course and clearance frequencies are measured simultane-
ously. The results for both frequencies, as well as the sum of both,
are displayed in the RF Level display. Both frequencies are displayed
in the RF Spectrum preview. The numeric results are displayed for
the course frequency. To view the results for the clearance frequency,
switch to "2F CLR"
Note: Depending on the ILS system and the country, the course can
be the upper or lower frequency (see "Upper Freq" on page 79).
"2F CLR" Both the course and clearance frequencies are measured simultane-
ously. The results for both frequencies, as well as the sum of both,
are displayed in the RF Level display. Both frequencies are displayed
in the RF Spectrum preview. The numeric results are displayed for
the course frequency. To view the results for the course frequency,
switch to "2F CRS".
Note: Depending on the ILS system and the country, the course can
be the upper or lower frequency (see "Upper Freq" on page 79).
"Wide" A wideband measurement is performed around the nominal fre-
quency. The frequency range is defined by the IF BW.
Remote command:
DEMODE_LLZ on page 275
DEMODE_GS on page 284
Carrier Configuration (1F/2F Config)

Access: [Config] > "1F/2F Config"
Access VNC: [s] > "F1"
Configures the carriers and frequencies for measurements on a single or two frequen-
cies (not wideband). Which settings are available depends on the "1F/2F" on page 76.
CRS/CLR Carr (Autotune function)............................................................................... 78
Course...........................................................................................................................78
Clearance......................................................................................................................78
1F Offset........................................................................................................................78
Find Carrier................................................................................................................... 78
Carrier Thresh............................................................................................................... 79
Upper Freq.................................................................................................................... 79
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 77

CRS/CLR Carr (Autotune function)

Defines whether the course and clearance carriers are determined automatically or
manually.
"Man" Specify the frequencies manually as offsets to either direction of the
nominal frequency, see "Course" on page 78 and "Clearance"
on page 78
"Auto" Both carriers are determined automatically at the beginning of the
measurement. Automatic mode is indicated by "Autotune" in the mea-
surement settings area, followed by the current processing status,
see "Autotune function" on page 57.
For all carrier measurements (not the wideband measurement), the
autotune function is enabled by default (see "1F/2F" on page 76).
Note: Adapting the frequency in autotune mode.
Remote command:
Mode:
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN on page 280
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN on page 289
Course
Defines the course carrier as a frequency offset from the nominal frequency.
Remote command:
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ on page 280
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ on page 290
Clearance
Defines the clearance carrier as a frequency offset from the nominal frequency in the
opposite direction to the course carrier.
Remote command:
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ on page 280
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ on page 289
1F Offset
For single frequency measurements only:
Defines an offset of the measured frequency to the nominal frequency.
Remote command:
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F on page 279
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F on page 289
Find Carrier
For manual carrier determination (CRS/CLR Carr (Autotune function): "MAN"):
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 78

Determines the carrier frequencies automatically, but only once. The frequencies do
not change automatically if the input signal changes.
For automatic carrier determination ("Autotune"): a new search is performed, see
"CRS/CLR Carr (Autotune function)" on page 78.
Remote command:
LLZ_START_FINDCARRIER on page 281
GS_START_FINDCARRIER on page 291
Carrier Thresh
Defines a threshold for automatic carrier determination. The measured power level
must exceed this level before the carrier frequency is adapted.
Remote command:
GS_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB on page 287
LLZ_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB on page 278
Upper Freq
The course and clearance carriers are defined as offsets to either side of the center
frequency. Which frequency is considered to be the course carrier - the upper or lower
frequency - depends on the used standard and the country it is used in. Thus, you can
swap the carrier definition if necessary.
Remote command:
SETUP:UNIT:UPPERFREQ on page 253
Channel Frequency Configuration (CH FREQ)

Access: [CH FREQ]
Access VNC: [q]
The channel frequency determines the nominal frequency at which the measurement is
performed. For some avionics standards, the channels are associated with specific fre-
quencies. (See Chapter A, "ILS Channel Frequency List", on page 393 and Chapter B,
"VOR Channel Frequency List", on page 395.)
CH................................................................................................................................. 79
Freq...............................................................................................................................80
Step Size.......................................................................................................................80
CH
Sets the receiver frequency channel on the active receiver board according to the
ICAO frequency list.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 79

Remote command:
RFCH on page 245
Freq
Sets the nominal frequency for the measurement. By default, this frequency is also
assumed to be the center frequency for spectrum displays, unless an offset is defined.
For measurements on two frequencies, the frequencies are defined as offsets to this
nominal frequency.
Remote command:
RF on page 245
Step Size
Defines the frequency step size for the rotary knob when setting the frequency.
In many avionics signals, channels are assigned to frequencies with a fixed offset. By
setting the step size of the rotary knob to the fixed offset, you can easily scroll through
the signal's channel frequencies using the rotary knob. Thus, for example, you can
analyze the measurement results for one channel after the other simply by changing
the selected channel frequency with the rotary knob.
The default step size for ILS/VOR mode is 50 kHz.
Remote command:
ILS mode:
LLZ_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP on page 278
GS_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP on page 287
VOR mode:
VOR_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP on page 314
4.1.4.3 Ampt
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
The following settings define the amplification for the input signal.
RF Att............................................................................................................................ 80
RF Mode....................................................................................................................... 81
Transducer Correction...................................................................................................81
RF Att
Determines how the attenuation of the RF signal is defined. The attenuation should be
adjusted such that the measured power level remains in the valid level range (indicated
by the green area of the bargraph, see Figure 4-4). Note that the valid level range
depends on the selected measurement mode.
"Manual" The RF attenuation mode is specified manually (see "RF Mode"
on page 81).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 80

"Auto" The RF attenuation mode is selected automatically.

The signal attenuation is selected automatically according to the sig-
nal strength.
This mode works best with clean signals. In difficult receiving condi-
tions, the "Low Noise", "Normal" or "Low Distortion" modes can be
more stable.
When monitoring signals with mostly constant signal levels, it is also
recommended that you use the "Low Noise", "Normal" or "Low Distor-
tion" mode.
Remote command:
SETATTMODE on page 246
SCOPE_ATTMODE on page 368
FFT_ATTMODE on page 360
IFSPECT_ATTMODE on page 356
RF Mode
Defines the RF attenuation mode to be used.
"Low Noise" 15 dB pre-amplification
Provides a high sensitivity. Suitable when scanning the area for dis-
tant signals.
"Norm" 0 dB
Provides a normal sensitivity.
"Low Dist" 15 dB attenuation
Provides a low sensitivity. Suitable when analyzing a nearby signal, to
avoid overload due to high-level signals.
Remote command:
FSCAN_ATTMODE on page 351
GBAS:ATTMODE on page 334
Transducer Correction
Configures the level correction. The specified value is added to the measured power
levels to compensate for an inherent offset by the measurement setup, for example the
antenna.
Remote command:
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX1 on page 247
4.1.4.4 Bandwidth (BW)
Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 81

The bandwidth determines the frequency range for which the measurement is per-
formed. Depending on the measurement mode, and whether a wideband or a specific
frequency is measured, different settings are available.
IF BW
Specifies the measurement filter bandwidth.
Ensure the entire input signal lies within the specified bandwidth, particularly for narrow
bandwidths.
Remote command:
1F/2F measurements:
LLZ_DEM_1F2F_BW on page 279
GS_DEM_1F2F_BW on page 288
Wideband measurements:
LLZ_DEM_WIDE_BW on page 279
GS_DEM_WIDE_BW on page 289
IF BW Dist/ID
Specifies the demodulation filter bandwidth for distortion and ID measurements.
Remote command:
1F/2F measurements:
LLZ_DEM_ID_BW on page 278
GS_DEM_ID_BW on page 288
Wideband measurements:
LLZ_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW on page 278
GS_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW on page 288
Res. FM Filt. (ILS only)

Defines the filter type used to determine residual FM (see Chapter 4.1.3.5, "ILS Local-
izer Distortion View", on page 69).
"ICAO" Filter according to ICAO specification
"Narrow" Narrow filter; the DDM filters used to determine the 90 Hz/ 150 Hz
modulation values are used to avoid interference between the signals
Remote command:
FILTER_LLZ_RESIDFM on page 281
4.1.4.5 LF Input Configuration
The ILS Localizer and Glidepath measurements can be performed on common RF or

on LF input. LF input can only be analyzed if the R&S EVSG1-K7 option is installed.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 82

To measure LF input rather than RF input, the following settings are required.
Input RF/LF................................................................................................................... 83
LF In Mode.................................................................................................................... 83
Low IF Offset.................................................................................................................84
Range............................................................................................................................84
Coupling........................................................................................................................ 84
DC Reference............................................................................................................... 84
LF In Factor...................................................................................................................85
Bandwidth (IF BW/AF In BW)........................................................................................85
IF/AF Bandwidth (Dist/ID)............................................................................................. 85
Res. FM Filt...................................................................................................................85
Input RF/LF
Access: [Config]
Access VNC: [s]
input from "LF In".
Remote command:
LF In Mode
Access: [Config]
Access VNC: [s]
Determines the type of LF input. Depending on the type of input, the available settings
and results can vary.
This setting is only available for LF input (Input: LF).
"AF" Measures the AF signal at 0 Hz.
"Low IF" Measures the ILS signal at a low intermediate frequency, for example
from a test point at the transmitter.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 83

Remote command:
LLZ_BB_WIDE1F on page 277
GS_BB_WIDE1F on page 287
Low IF Offset
Access: [Config]
Access VNC: [s]
Defines the frequency of the low IF input signal, that is: the offset from 0 Hz.
Only available for low IF mode (see "LF In Mode" on page 83).
Remote command:
LLZ_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ on page 275
GS_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ on page 285
Range
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
Defines the full scale AF signal level. Define the correct level to avoid clipping and
overload.
Switches the range between 1 V and 5 V.
Remote command:
SETUP:BB_IN_RANGE on page 250
Coupling
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
Specifies the handling of the DC component of the AF signal.
For low IF signals, AC coupling is always used.
"AC" The DC component of the AF signal is not forwarded.
"DC" The DC component of the AF signal is also forwarded and analyzed.
Remote command:
SETUP:BB_IN_COUPL on page 249
DC Reference
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
Defines the reference power in volt for LF input, available for AF signals with AC cou-
pling only. This value is used to determine the modulation depth and corresponds to
the DC power of the AF signal.
For AC coupling, the DC power component of the AF signal is not forwarded. Thus,
you must define the reference value manually.
Remote command:
LLZ_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV on page 276
GS_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV on page 286
VOR_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV on page 313
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 84

FFT_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV on page 362

SCOPE_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV on page 369
LF In Factor
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
Applies a factor to the measured power levels, e.g. to compensate certain effects in the
input system.
Remote command:
SETUP:BB_IN_FACTOR on page 250
Bandwidth (IF BW/AF In BW)

Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e]
Bandwidth with which the LF input is aquired. The default bandwidth is 3 kHz for Low
IF measurements. For AF measurements, the default bandwidth is 1.5 kHz.
Remote command:
AF mode:
LLZ_BB_BW_KHZ on page 276
GS_BB_BW_KHZ on page 285
VOR_BB_BW_KHZ on page 313
Low IF mode:
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ on page 277
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ on page 286
IF/AF Bandwidth (Dist/ID)

Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e]
Bandwidth with which the ID analysis and distortion measurement is performed. The
default bandwidth is 3 kHz for Low IF measurements. For AF measurements, the
default bandwidth is 1.5 kHz.
Remote command:
AF mode:
LLZ_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ on page 276
GS_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ on page 285
Low IF mode:
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ on page 286
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ on page 277
Res. FM Filt.
Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e]
Defines the filter type used to determine residual FM (see Chapter 4.1.3.5, "ILS Local-
izer Distortion View", on page 69).
"ICAO" Filter according to ICAO specification
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 85

"Narrow" Narrow filter; the DDM filters used to determine the 90 Hz/ 150 Hz
modulation values are used to avoid interference between the signals
Remote command:
FILTER_LLZ_RESIDFM on page 281
4.1.4.6 Setting the Measurement Time (MTime)
Access: [MTime]
Access VNC: [d]
The measurement time determines the interval at which new measurement results are
displayed. Internally, values are captured every 100 ms, that is: 10 per second. (With
the High Measurement Rate option R&S EVSG-K22 installed, the internal capture rate
is 10 ms, that is: 100 per second.) If the defined measurement time is longer, the val-
ues captured internally in that interval are averaged and only the average value is dis-
played.
Note that the measurement time determines the minimum interval for values to be
stored during recording (see "Time" on page 220).
Enter the time in milliseconds.
Remote command:
MEASTIME on page 245
4.1.4.7 DDM and SDM Configuration
The following settings configure the DDM and SDM measurement results.
DDM Unit.......................................................................................................................86
SDM Unit.......................................................................................................................86
ILS Phase......................................................................................................................87
DDM Polarity................................................................................................................. 87
DDM Bargr.................................................................................................................... 87
DDM Unit
Specifies the unit of the DDM display.
1 (dimensionless value) | % | μA
Remote command:
SETUP:UNIT:DDM on page 251
SDM Unit
Specifies the unit of the SDM display.
1 (dimensionless value) | % | μA
Remote command:
SETUP:UNIT:SDM on page 252
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 86

ILS Marker Beacon Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K3)
ILS Phase
Specifies the value range in the ILS phase.
Bipolar: -60 … +60° | Unipolar: 0 … 120°
Remote command:
SETUP:UNIT:ILSPHASE on page 251
DDM Polarity
Specifies the DDM polarity.
90−150 | 150−90
Remote command:
SETUP:UNIT:POLARITYDDM on page 252
DDM Bargr
Configures the scaling of the DDM bargraph.
0.075 | 0.150 | 0.400 (dimensionless)
Remote command:
SETUP:UNIT:BARGRAPH on page 251
4.2 ILS Marker Beacon Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K3)

Access: [Mode] > "ILS MB"
Remote command:
MODE_MB on page 306
● Basics on Marker Beacons..................................................................................... 87
● ILS Marker Beacon Measurements and Results.....................................................88
● Configuring ILS Marker Beacon Measurements..................................................... 95
4.2.1 Basics on Marker Beacons
Marker beacon (MB) receivers are used for a rough distance measurement. They are
available only for some ILS installations.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 87

Figure 4-13: Marker beacon placement with respect to runway
Marker beacon receivers decode audio and provide signaling output to identify one of
three marker beacons installed near the runway. They transmit a narrow beam width at
75 MHz carrier frequency in a vertical direction. Each of them has a different distinct
modulation code to allow the receiver to identify which one it is flying over.
Both visual (color of the marker beacon) and audio tone identification is supported for
determining which marker has been flown over. The audio/visual pairing of marker bea-
cons is as follows:
● Outer marker flashes BLUE in the cockpit at 400 Hz (“relaxed” tone).
● Middle marker flashes AMBER in the cockpit at 1300 Hz (“hurried” tone).
● Inner marker flashes WHITE in the cockpit at 3000 Hz (“urgent” tone).
4.2.2 ILS Marker Beacon Measurements and Results
The ILS Marker Beacon measurement provides multiple views for the measurement
results.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 88

You can display graphical results directly from the ILS Marker Beacon mode by select-
ing the softkey in the "Meas" menu. In this case, the settings for the current measure-
ment are applied to the graphical results.
To return from the graphical results to the ILS Marker Beacon mode, select "Return"
([F7]).
Remote command:
VIEW_MB on page 307
● RF Level and Frequency Display............................................................................ 89
● IF Spectrum Preview...............................................................................................90
● ILS Marker Beacon Main View................................................................................91
● ILS Marker Beacon ID Analysis.............................................................................. 92
● ILS Marker Beacon Recording View....................................................................... 94

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 89


Overload messages
● "RF Overload"
● "IF Overload"
● "ADC Overload"
the input level.
on page 75.

LA? on page 244
RF? on page 245
FMEAS on page 308
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 90

4.2.2.3 ILS Marker Beacon Main View
The ILS Marker Beacon Main view provides the following results:
AM 400 Hz.................................................................................................................... 91
Freq 400 Hz.................................................................................................................. 91
AM 1300 Hz.................................................................................................................. 92
Freq 1300 Hz................................................................................................................ 92
AM 3000 Hz.................................................................................................................. 92
Freq 3000 Hz................................................................................................................ 92
AM 400 Hz
AM modulation depth of the 400-Hz component
Remote command:
AM6 on page 309
Freq 400 Hz
Measured frequency of the 400-Hz component
Remote command:
AF6 on page 308
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 91

AM 1300 Hz
Remote command:
AM5 on page 309
Freq 1300 Hz
Remote command:
AF5 on page 308
AM 3000 Hz
Remote command:
AM4 on page 309
Freq 3000 Hz
Remote command:
AF4 on page 308
4.2.2.4 ILS Marker Beacon ID Analysis
Displays the results of the marker beacon signal id analysis.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 92

400 Hz Dash................................................................................................................. 93
400 Hz Gap................................................................................................................... 93
1300 Hz Dash............................................................................................................... 93
1300 Hz Dot.................................................................................................................. 93
1300 Hz Gap................................................................................................................. 93
3000 Hz Dot.................................................................................................................. 93
3000 Hz Gap................................................................................................................. 93
400 Hz Dash
Displays the length of a dash for the outer marker (in ms).
Remote command:
ID_F400_DASHLEN on page 309
400 Hz Gap
Displays the gap between two dashes for the outer marker (in ms).
Remote command:
ID_F400_GAP on page 310
1300 Hz Dash
Displays the length of a dash for the middle marker (in ms).
Remote command:
ID_F1300_DASHLEN on page 310
1300 Hz Dot
Displays the length of a dot for the middle marker (in ms).
Remote command:
ID_F1300_DOTLEN on page 310
1300 Hz Gap
Displays the gap between dot and dash for the middle marker (in ms).
Remote command:
3000 Hz Dot
Displays the length of a dot for the inner marker (in ms).
Remote command:
ID_F3000_DOTLEN on page 310
3000 Hz Gap
Displays the gap between two dashes for the inner marker (in ms).
Remote command:
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 93

4.2.2.5 ILS Marker Beacon Recording View
The Recording view displays the recorded data for ILS Localizer measurements from
The individual measurement results are described in the other ILS Marker Beacon
result views.
on page 217.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 94

Status flags
● I: Invalid
● P: PPS-synced
4.2.3 Configuring ILS Marker Beacon Measurements
The following settings are available for the ILS Marker Beacon measurement.
● Setting the Receiver Frequency..............................................................................95

● Ampt........................................................................................................................96
● Setting the Measurement Time (MTime).................................................................97
4.2.3.1 Setting the Receiver Frequency
Access: [CH FREQ]

Access VNC: [q]
The receiver frequency determines the nominal frequency at which the measurement
is performed.
Freq...............................................................................................................................95
Step Size.......................................................................................................................95
Freq
Sets the nominal frequency for the measurement.
Remote command:
RF on page 245
Step Size
The default step size for ILS MB mode is 50 kHz.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 95

4.2.3.2 Ampt
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
RF Att............................................................................................................................ 96
RF Mode....................................................................................................................... 96
Transducer Correction...................................................................................................97
RF Att
on page 81).
nal strength.
more stable.
tion" mode.
Remote command:
RF Mode
tant signals.
"Norm" 0 dB
Remote command:
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 96

VOR Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K2)

antenna.
Remote command:
Access: [MTime]
Access VNC: [d]
played.
Remote command:
4.3 VOR Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K2)

Access: [Mode] > "VOR"
If the VOR Mode option (R&S EVSG-K2) is installed, signals from VOR systems can
be analyzed with the R&S EVSG1000.
Remote command:
MODE_VOR on page 313
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 97

4.3.1 VOR Basics
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in VOR measure-
ments is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set-
tings.
4.3.1.1 VHF Omni Directional Radio Range (VOR)
Very high frequency (VHF) omnidirectional radio range (VOR) is a radio navigation sys-
tem for short and medium distance navigation. The VOR radio navigation aid supplies
the aircraft with directional information, angle information relative to the magnetic north
from the site of the beacon. Thus, it helps aircraft to determine their position and stay
on course. The range covered by a VOR station is ideally a circle around the VOR sta-
tion with a radius depending on the flight altitude.
A VOR system consists of a ground transmission station and a VOR receiver on board
the aircraft.
Ground transmitter
The transmitter stations operate at VHF frequencies of 108 MHz to 118 MHz, with the
code identification (COM/ID) transmitting on a modulation tone of 1.020 kHz. It emits
two types of signals:
● An omnidirectional reference signal (REF) that can consist of two parts:
– 30 Hz frequency modulated (FM) sine wave on subcarrier 9.96 kHz from ampli-
tude modulation (AM) carrier
– 1020 Hz AM modulated sine wave Morse code
● A directional positioning signal, variable (VAR): 30 Hz AM modulated sine waves
with variable phase shift
VOR receiver
The VOR receiver obtains the directional information by measuring the phase differ-
ence of two 30 Hz signals transmitted by the beacon. A conventional VOR station
(CVOR) transmits with a rotating antenna. From the rotation, a sine wave AM signal
arises in the receiver, whose phase position depends on the present angle of rotation.
The rotation frequency of the antenna sets the modulation frequency at 30 Hz.
Instead of using a rotating antenna, DVOR stations (Doppler) divide the circumference
of the antenna into 48 or 50 segments, covering each segment by its own antenna.
Each antenna transmits the unmodulated subcarrier from one antenna to the next, so
that the signal completes the round trip 30 times per second.
To determine the radial, the phase difference to a reference phase must be measured.
This reference phase must be independent of the rotation of the antenna. Thus, it is
modulated with a frequency deviation of 480 Hz in FM onto a secondary carrier with
9.96 kHz. It is then emitted over a separate antenna with a round characteristic.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 98

Figure 4-16: Basics of the VOR phase angles (Φ) depending on the azimuth angle (Θ)
The frequency modulated secondary carrier for the reference phase is itself again
modulated in AM on the RF carrier of the VOR station. In addition to the signals neces-
sary for navigation, a Morse code with 1020 Hz can be transmitted on the VOR carrier.
Also, speech in the usual AF from 300 Hz to 3.3 kHz can be transmitted. Often the
voice channel of a VOR station is used for the transmission of ATIS (Automatic Termi-
nal Information Service) messages. The Morse code can be used to identify the VOR
station, similar to the "Morse code identification signal" on page 55 in the ILS signal.
The spectrum of a VOR signal is therefore composed of the carrier and three modula-
ted components.
Figure 4-17: Example of the VOR Spectrum
The identical modulation degree m = 0.3 for all three components was selected in
ICAO annex-10 [63] such that the total signal still contains 10% modulation reserve.
The carrier is therefore not suppressed at any time. The 9960 Hz reference carrier is
FM modulated with 480 Hz deviation. The VOR signal generation as under ICAO is
shown below.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 99

Figure 4-18: Basics of the VOR signal generation
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 100

4.3.1.2 VOR Demodulator
Figure 4-19: Block diagram of the VOR software demodulator
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 101

The VOR signal contains three AM modulated components that must be separated in a
first step:
● Rotational signal (30 Hz)
● Identification/voice part (300 Hz to 4 kHz)
● FM modulated carrier (9960 Hz ± 700 Hz)
To obtain the AM depth, a lowpass filter must calculate the mean carrier power, while
suppressing all other signal components. The mean carrier power is then used to nor-
malize the instantaneous magnitude of the I/Q signal. The result is the AM modulation
depth signal vs. time. The three AM components are separated using bandpass filters
covering the individual frequency ranges.
A Morse decoder detects and decodes the ON and OFF periods in the identifier signal.
The separated FM modulated carrier is passed through an FM demodulator. The FM
carrier frequency (nominal 9960 Hz) is calculated as the average output value of the
FM demodulator. To obtain the 30 Hz reference signal, the FM demodulator output is
filtered by the same narrow 30 Hz bandpass as the 30 Hz AM rotational component.
FM deviation is calculated using the estimated magnitude of the 30 Hz reference sig-
nal.
The azimuth is calculated as the phase difference of the 30 Hz reference signal and
the 30 Hz rotational signal.
VOR distortion
In the VOR software demodulator two kinds of signals are analyzed regarding distor-
tions:
● AM Distortion: The AM modulation depth vs time signal is processed by an FFT,
with a user-defined resolution bandwidth. The trace is displayed in the Modulation
Spectrum display. The K2, K3 and THD results of the AM components are calcula-
ted based on the FFT trace and the estimated modulation frequencies.
● FM Distortion: The FM modulation depth vs time signal is processed by an FFT,
using a resolution bandwidth automatically set by the application. You cannot view
the resulting trace. The K2, K3 and THD results of the FM components are calcula-
ted based on the FFT trace and the estimated modulation frequencies.
AM Modulation Depth
To obtain the AM depth, a lowpass filter must calculate the mean carrier power, while
suppressing all other signal components. The mean carrier power is then used to nor-
malize the instantaneous magnitude of the I/Q signal. The result is the AM modulation
depth signal versus time. It is then used to calculate the following AM modulation
depths:
● Depth9960: AM modulation depth of the FM carrier, typically at 9960 Hz
● DepthAM30: AM modulation depth of the 30 Hz rotational signal
● DepthID: AM modulation depth of the identification/voice signal
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 102

FM Modulation Depth
The FM deviation DeviaFM30 (typically 480 Hz) is calculated by estimating the magni-
tude of the FM demodulated 30 Hz reference signal.
Azimuth (Phase Difference at 30 Hz)

The phases of both the 30 Hz FM and 30 Hz AM signal are estimated at exactly the
same time instant. The azimuth (Phase FM-AM) is calculated as the phase difference
between the two.
AF Frequencies
In the VOR demodulator the AF frequencies are calculated:
● FreqAM30: 30 Hz Rotational-signal (AM)
● FreqFM30: 30 Hz Reference-signal (FM)
● FreqID: voice / identification; From 300 Hz to 4 kHz, typically 1020 Hz
● Freq9960: The carrier frequency of the FM carrier, typically 9960 Hz; Calculated as
mean value of the FM demodulator output
4.3.1.3 Phase Notation in VOR Measurements
In VOR measurements, the phase can be provided using two different notations, indi-
cated in the following illustration:
Figure 4-20: Phase notation in VOR measurements
Phase is always counted counter-clockwise, starting at the reference.

The reference depends on the selected notation:
● FROM: North direction at the VOR beacon
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 103

● TO: North direction at the receiver/ aircraft

To convert one notation to the other, use the following equation:
PhaseTO = PhaseFROM + 180 deg
4.3.2 VOR Measurements and Results
The VOR measurement provides multiple views for the measurement results.
Switching from numeric to graphical results

You can display graphical results directly from the VOR mode by selecting the softkey
in the "Meas" menu. In this case, the settings for the current measurement are applied
The graphical results are only availabe for a single carrier. Thus, when you switch to a
graphical measurement mode from VOR mode, you must select the carrier for which
you want to see the graphical results. When you select the softkey, a submenu is dis-
played to select the carrier.
You can select one of the following carriers:

● Main carrier, AM demodulated
● Subcarrier, AM demodulated (AM component)
● Subcarrier, FM demodulated (FM component)
To return from the graphical results to the VOR mode, select "Return" ([F7]).
Remote command:
VIEW_VOR on page 313
● RF Level and Frequency Display.......................................................................... 105
● IF Spectrum Preview.............................................................................................106
● VOR Main View.....................................................................................................106
● VOR Distortion View............................................................................................. 108
● VOR ID Analysis View...........................................................................................110
● VOR Recording View............................................................................................ 112
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 104


Overload messages
● "RF Overload"
● "IF Overload"
● "ADC Overload"
the input level.
on page 75.

LA? on page 244
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 105

RF? on page 245

FMEAS on page 319
4.3.2.3 VOR Main View
Displays the main measurement results.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 106

Bearing (from)............................................................................................................. 107

AM 30 Hz.................................................................................................................... 107
AM 9960 Hz................................................................................................................ 107
FM-Deviation...............................................................................................................108
ID Code....................................................................................................................... 108
Voice AM..................................................................................................................... 108
Freq 30 Hz.................................................................................................................. 108
Freq 9960 Hz.............................................................................................................. 108
Freq FM30...................................................................................................................108
FM Index..................................................................................................................... 108
Bearing (from)
Phase between both 30-Hz signals (direction of the R&S EVSG1000 in relation to the
ground station).
A green bearing value indicates a valid VOR signal has been determined.
Remote command:
BE on page 319
AM 30 Hz
AM modulation depth of 30 Hz AM rotational signal
Remote command:
AM0 on page 318
AM 9960 Hz
AM modulation depth of 9.96 kHz subcarrier
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 107

Remote command:
AM1 on page 318
FM-Deviation
FM frequency deviation of 30 Hz subcarrier
Remote command:
FM0 on page 319
ID Code
Remote command:
AC8 on page 293
AC8 on page 317
Voice AM
AM-Modulation depth of the voice signal (in the range 300 Hz to 3000 Hz, identifier
notched).
Remote command:
AM9 on page 318
Freq 30 Hz
AF frequency of 30 Hz AM rotational signal
Remote command:
AF0 on page 317
Freq 9960 Hz
Mean carrier frequency of the FM modulated subcarrier, typically at 9.96 kHz
Remote command:
AF1 on page 317
Freq FM30
AF frequency of the 30 Hz reference signal
Remote command:
AF2 on page 318
FM Index
FM frequency deviation of 30 Hz subcarrier
Remote command:
FM1 on page 319
4.3.2.4 VOR Distortion View
This view comprises all measurement parameters for the determination of the distor-
tion factors in the VOR mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 108

Subcarrier Harmonics................................................................................................. 109

Subcarrier AM Distortion............................................................................................. 109
Subcarrier Harmonics
Measures the distortions (up to 5th order) of the subcarrier harmonics.
"K2" Distortion 2nd order
"K3" Distortion 3rd order
"K4" Distortion 4th order
"K5" Distortion 5th order
Remote command:
SUBCARR_K2 on page 320
Subcarrier AM Distortion
Measures the AM distortion of the subcarrier. During signal generation, different
unwanted AM components appear. Depending on the number of segments used by the
antenna, different results are displayed in the "Distortion" view (see "No. of Segm"
on page 114). Note that in the data recording, all results are included, not only those
displayed in the Distortion view.
"AM 60 Hz" Displays the AM distortion at a modulation frequency of 60 Hz
"AM 1k44(48)" Displays the AM distortion at 1440 Hz (48 segments * 30 Hz).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 109

"AM 1k50(50)" Displays the AM distortion at 1500 Hz (50 segments * 30 Hz).

Remote command:
SUBCARR_AM1K44 on page 319
SUBCARR_AM1K50 on page 320
SUBCARR_AM60HZ on page 320
4.3.2.5 VOR ID Analysis View
Displays the results of a morse signal analysis (optional).
Bearing (from)..............................................................................................................110
Last ID......................................................................................................................... 111
ID Code........................................................................................................................111
ID Period......................................................................................................................111
Dot Length................................................................................................................... 111
Dash Length................................................................................................................ 111
Dot-Dash Gap..............................................................................................................111
Letter Gap....................................................................................................................111
ID AM...........................................................................................................................111
ID Freq.........................................................................................................................112
Bearing (from)
Phase between both 30-Hz signals (direction of the R&S EVSG1000 in relation to the
ground station).
A green bearing value indicates a valid VOR signal has been determined.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 110

Remote command:
BE on page 319
Last ID
Remote command:
ID Code
Remote command:
AC8 on page 293
AC8 on page 317
ID Period
Remote command:
Dot Length
Remote command:
Dash Length
Remote command:
Dot-Dash Gap
Remote command:
Letter Gap
milliseconds.
Remote command:
ID AM
AM Modulation depth of identifier signal (default: 1020 Hz).
Remote command:
AM8 on page 295
AM8 on page 318
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 111

ID Freq
Remote command:
AF8 on page 293
AF8 on page 318
4.3.2.6 VOR Recording View
The Recording view displays the recorded data for VOR measurements from the
selected data list (see "List" on page 219). If available, the stored GPS data from the
GPS receiver is also displayed.
The individual measurement results are described in the other result views.
on page 217.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 112

Status flags
● I: Invalid
● P: PPS-synced
Remote commands for retrieving results:

GETDATADEF on page 378
GETDATASET on page 378
4.3.3 Configuring VOR Measurements
The following settings are available for VOR measurements.
VOR measurements on LF input

Using the option R&S EVSG1-K7, you can also analyze the AF components of the
VOR signal to determine AF parameters of the carrier.
For details on configuring a VOR measurement on LF input, see Chapter 4.1.4.5, "LF
Input Configuration", on page 82.
● General Measurement Configuration.................................................................... 113

● Channel Frequency Configuration (CH FREQ)..................................................... 115
● Ampt...................................................................................................................... 116
● Bandwidth (BW).................................................................................................... 117
● Setting the Measurement Time (MTime)............................................................... 117
4.3.3.1 General Measurement Configuration
Access: [Config]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 113

Access VNC: [s]

Input RF/LF..................................................................................................................114
Signal Direction........................................................................................................... 114
No. of Segm.................................................................................................................114
Freq Offset...................................................................................................................115
Input RF/LF
Access: [Config]
Access VNC: [s]
input from "LF In".
Remote command:
Signal Direction
Defines the reference for phase notation (see Chapter 4.3.1.3, "Phase Notation in VOR
Measurements", on page 103).
"From" North direction at the VOR beacon
"To" North direction at the receiver/ aircraft
Remote command:
SETUP:UNIT:VORDIRECTION on page 253
No. of Segm
Selects the number of used antenna segments for which the AM distortion results are
displayed. See also "VOR receiver" on page 98. Note that the data recording always
includes all results.
48 The antenna contains 48 segments, the subcarrier has a modulation
frequency of 1440 Hz. (Result: "AM1k44 (48)")
50 The antenna contains 50 segments, the subcarrier has a modulation
frequency of 1500 Hz. (Result: "AM 1k50(50)")
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 114

Freq Offset
Defines a fixed frequency offset from the carrier.
Remote command:
VOR_DEMFREQS_OFFSET on page 315
4.3.3.2 Channel Frequency Configuration (CH FREQ)
Access: [CH FREQ]

Access VNC: [q]
The channel frequency determines the nominal frequency at which the measurement is
performed. For some avionics standards, the channels are associated with specific fre-
quencies. (See Chapter A, "ILS Channel Frequency List", on page 393 and Chapter B,
"VOR Channel Frequency List", on page 395.)
CH............................................................................................................................... 115
Freq............................................................................................................................. 115
Step Size..................................................................................................................... 115
CH
Sets the receiver frequency channel on the active receiver board according to the
ICAO frequency list.
Remote command:
RFCH on page 245
Freq
nominal frequency.
Remote command:
RF on page 245
Step Size
In many avionics signals, channels are assigned to frequencies with a fixed offset. By
setting the step size of the rotary knob to the fixed offset, you can easily scroll through
the signal's channel frequencies using the rotary knob. Thus, for example, you can
analyze the measurement results for one channel after the other simply by changing
the selected channel frequency with the rotary knob.
The default step size for ILS/VOR mode is 50 kHz.
Remote command:
ILS mode:
LLZ_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP on page 278
GS_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP on page 287
VOR mode:
VOR_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP on page 314
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 115

4.3.3.3 Ampt
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
RF Att.......................................................................................................................... 116
RF Mode......................................................................................................................116
Transducer Correction.................................................................................................117
RF Att
on page 81).
nal strength.
more stable.
tion" mode.
Remote command:
RF Mode
tant signals.
"Norm" 0 dB
Remote command:
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 116


antenna.
Remote command:
Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e]
IF BW
Determines the frequency range for which the measurement is performed on the IF
signal.
Ensure the entire input signal lies within the specified bandwidth, particularly for narrow
bandwidths.
Remote command:
VOR_DEM_BW on page 314
AM30 BW
Defines the filter bandwidth with which the 30 Hz AM rotational signal is demodulated.
Remote command:
VOR_DEM_AM_BW on page 314
FM BW
Defines the filter bandwidth with which the 30 Hz reference signal is demodulated.
Remote command:
VOR_DEM_FM_BW on page 315
Bear.Filt.
Defines the filter type used to determine the bearing angle.
"Narrow" For small input levels
"Wide" Faster; used in previous software releases
Remote command:
VOR_DEM_BEARFILTER on page 314
Access: [MTime]
Access VNC: [d]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 117

COM Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K6)
played.
Remote command:
4.4 COM Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K6)

Access: [Mode] > "COM"
If the COM Analysis option (R&S EVSG-K6) is installed, signals from VHF/UHF com-
munication channels can be analyzed with the R&S EVSG1000. Very high frequency
(VHF) and ultrahigh frequency (UHF) communication is used for air traffic control (ATC
COM), for example.
The COM mode can be used to analyze both the civil aircraft band and military fre-
quencies, with channels spaced at 25 kHz or 8.33 kHz.
The R&S EVSG1000 can perform COM measurements on signals containing one or
two carriers (see Chapter 4.1.4.2, "Channel and Frequency Configuration",
on page 76). It assumes a 1000 Hz test tone is being sent.
Remote command:
4.4.1 COM Measurement Results
The COM measurement provides the following results. For measurements on two fre-
quencies, the results for the individual frequencies and the sum of both are displayed.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 118

You can display graphical results directly from the COM mode by selecting the softkey
To return from the graphical results to the COM mode, select "Return" ([F7]).
Remote command:
● RF Level and Frequency Display.......................................................................... 119
● IF Spectrum Preview.............................................................................................120
● COM Main View.................................................................................................... 121
● COM Recording View............................................................................................123

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 119

Overload messages
● "RF Overload"
● "IF Overload"
● "ADC Overload"
the input level.
on page 75.

LA? on page 244
RF? on page 245
COM mode:
GET_MEASFREQ on page 327
GET_TX1_MEASFREQ on page 330
GET_TX2_MEASFREQ on page 332
GET_TX1_LEVEL on page 330
GET_TX2_LEVEL on page 332
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 120

4.4.1.3 COM Main View
The COM Main view provides the following measurement results for the 1 kHz/
1.2 kHz test tone (see "Tone Freq." on page 125):
Figure 4-25: COM Main view
You can display graphical results directly from the COM mode by selecting the softkey
To return from the graphical results to the COM mode, select "Return" ([F7]).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 121

Remote command:
VIEW_COM on page 322
AM 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz................................................................................................... 122
Freq 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz................................................................................................. 122
K2 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz.................................................................................................... 122
K3 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz.................................................................................................... 122
K4 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz.................................................................................................... 122
THD 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz................................................................................................. 123
AM 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz

Displays the AM modulation of a 1 kHz/ 1.2 kHz test tone at the individual carrier fre-
quencies and for both carriers together.
Remote command:
GET_ONE_AMMOD_1_0 on page 328
GET_TX1_AMMOD_1_0 on page 330
GET_ONE_AMMOD_1_2 on page 328
Freq 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz

Displays the demodulated frequency of the 1 kHz/ 1.2 kHz AM test tone at the individ-
ual carrier frequencies and for both carriers together.
Remote command:
GET_ONE_AMFREQ _1_0 on page 328
GET_TX1_AMFREQ_1_0 on page 329
GET_ONE_AMFREQ_1_2 on page 328
K2 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz

Distortion 2nd order, 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz signal
Remote command:
GET_K2_1K0 on page 326
K3 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz

Distortion 3rd order, 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz signal
Remote command:
K4 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz

Distortion 4th order, 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz signal
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 122

Remote command:
THD 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz signal
Remote command:
GET_THD_1K0 on page 329
GET_THD_1K2 on page 329
4.4.1.4 COM Recording View
The Recording view displays the recorded data for COM measurements from the
selected data list (see "List" on page 219). If available, the stored GPS data from the
GPS receiver is also displayed.
The individual measurement results are described in Chapter 4.4.1.3, "COM Main
View", on page 121.
on page 217.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 123

Status flags
● I: Invalid
● P: PPS-synced
4.4.2 COM Configuration
In this view, the measurements settings available for the currently active mode, can be
configured.
● Channel and Frequency Configuration................................................................. 124
● Ampt......................................................................................................................126
● Bandwidth (BW).................................................................................................... 127
● Setting the Measurement Time (MTime)...............................................................127
4.4.2.1 Channel and Frequency Configuration
carriers simultaneously. Alternatively, the individual carriers can be measured only, or
formed. The available measurement settings depend on the selected channel and fre-
quency configuration.
● Channel Setup...................................................................................................... 124
● Carrier Configuration.............................................................................................125
● Channel Frequency Configuration (CH FREQ).....................................................125
Channel Setup
Access: > [Meas] > "1F/2F"
Access VNC: [a] > [F1]
1F/2F
"1F" One frequency only is measured, namely the nominal frequency,
The nominal frequency is configured by the Freq settings.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 124

"2F" Two frequencies are measured at the same time. Which frequencies
are measured is configured by the Freq settings.
The numeric results are calculated as the sum of both frequencies. In
the RF Level display, the individual carriers are also indicated. In the
RF Spectrum preview, both carriers are displayed.
Remote command:
COM_1F2F_MEASMODE on page 323
Carrier Configuration
Access: [Config]
Access VNC: [s] > "F1"
Configures the carriers and frequencies for measurements on a single or two frequen-
cies. Which settings are available depends on the "1F/2F" on page 124.
TX1 Offset/TX2 Offset................................................................................................. 125
Tone Freq.................................................................................................................... 125
TX1 Offset/TX2 Offset

The two carriers are defined as offsets to either side of the nominal tone frequency.
"TX1 Offset" defines the upper carrier with a positive offset to the tone frequency. "TX2
Offset" defines the lower carrier with a negative offset to the tone frequency.
Remote command:
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX1 on page 323
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX2 on page 323
Tone Freq.
The nominal tone frequency used to measure all results for both carriers.
Remote command:
COM_TONEFREQ_1K01K2 on page 324
Channel Frequency Configuration (CH FREQ)

Access: [CH FREQ]
Access VNC: [q]
The carrier frequency determines the nominal frequency at which the measurement is
performed.
Freq.............................................................................................................................125
Step Size.....................................................................................................................126
Freq
nominal frequency.
Remote command:
RF on page 245
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 125

Step Size
The default step size for COM mode is 8.33 kHz.
4.4.2.2 Ampt
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
RF Att.......................................................................................................................... 126
RF Mode..................................................................................................................... 126
RF Att
on page 81).
nal strength.
more stable.
tion" mode.
Remote command:
RF Mode
tant signals.
"Norm" 0 dB
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 126

Remote command:
antenna.
Remote command:
Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e]
The bandwidth determines the filter width with which the measurement is performed.
The wider the filter, the less meaurement time is required, but also the less sensitive
the frequency results.
BW 1FBW 2F
Specifies the filter bandwidth for the single or both carriers.
Remote command:
COM_DEMOD_BW_1F on page 324
COM_DEMOD_BW_2F on page 324
Access: [MTime]
Access VNC: [d]
played.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 127

Non-Directional Beacon Mode (Option R&S EVSG1-K7)
Remote command:
4.5 Non-Directional Beacon Mode (Option R&S EVSG1-

K7)
Access: [Mode] > "NDB"
Using the LF IN connector and the R&S EVSG1-K7 option, the R&S EVSG1000 can
analyze non-directional beacon signals.
Remote command:
MODE_NDB on page 345
● Basics on Non-Directional Beacons......................................................................128
● NDB Measurement and Results............................................................................128
● Configuring NDB Measurements.......................................................................... 134
4.5.1 Basics on Non-Directional Beacons
Non-directional beacons (NDBs) transmit a signal at a specific carrier frequency, but

without a specific direction. NDBs used for aviation transmit signals at frequencies
between 190 kHz and 1750 kHz, according to ICAO annex 10 (see [3]). Each beacon
is identified by a morse code, which is transmitted at either 400 Hz or 1020 Hz. Due to
the low transmission frequency, NDBs are useful particularly for middle distance navi-
gation.
4.5.2 NDB Measurement and Results
Due to the large amount of different signal parameters, the NDB measurement pro-
vides multiple views for the measurement results.
You can display graphical results directly from the NDB mode by selecting the softkey
To return from the graphical results to the NDB mode, select "Return" ([F7]).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 128

Remote command:
VIEW_NDB on page 347
● RF Level, Frequency and IF Spectrum Display.................................................... 129
● NDB ID Analysis....................................................................................................130
● NDB Distortion View..............................................................................................132
● NDB Recording View............................................................................................ 133
4.5.2.1 RF Level, Frequency and IF Spectrum Display
The measured RF power and frequency of the LF input signal is displayed both numer-
ically and graphically.

● Numeric power level in dBμV or dBm ("Lev")
● Measured frequency offset to the tuned carrier frequency in kHz
● Bargraph indicating the power (blue) and a color-coded overload state, where:
● If applicable: "ADC Overload" message
The dynamic range of the A/D-converter is exceeded (clipping).
IF Spectrum
ate frequency) signal is provided. The center frequency corresponds to the tuned car-
rier frequency. The frequency range shows the measured bandwidth. The amplitude
range displays the entire dynamic range.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 129


RF? on page 245
LA? on page 244
4.5.2.2 NDB ID Analysis
Displays the results of the NDB signal id analysis. The ID can be analyzed at 400 Hz or
1020 Hz, see "ID Freq" on page 135.
Last ID.........................................................................................................................131
Carr Lev Change.........................................................................................................131
ID Code....................................................................................................................... 131
ID Period..................................................................................................................... 131
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 130

Dot Length...................................................................................................................131
Dash Length................................................................................................................131
Dot-Dash Gap............................................................................................................. 131
Letter Gap................................................................................................................... 131
ID AM.......................................................................................................................... 132
ID Freq........................................................................................................................ 132
Last ID
Remote command:
Carr Lev Change

Variance in power level during ID transmission.
Remote command:
NDB_CARLEV_CHANGE on page 348
ID Code
Remote command:
ID_CODE on page 349
ID Period
Remote command:
Dot Length
Remote command:
Dash Length
Remote command:
Dot-Dash Gap
Remote command:
Letter Gap
milliseconds.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 131

Remote command:
ID AM
AM Modulation depth of identifier signal.
Remote command:
NDB_AMMOD on page 348
ID Freq
Remote command:
NDB_AMFREQ on page 348
4.5.2.3 NDB Distortion View
The NDB Dist view comprises the distortion factors for the beacon ID. The ID can be
analyzed at 400 Hz or 1020 Hz, see "ID Freq" on page 135.
Figure 4-28: NDB Distortion view
AM 400/1020 Hz......................................................................................................... 133

K2 400/1020 Hz.......................................................................................................... 133
K3 400/1020 Hz.......................................................................................................... 133
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 132

K4 400/1020 Hz.......................................................................................................... 133

Unwanted AM 30 to 120 Hz........................................................................................ 133
THD 400/1020 Hz....................................................................................................... 133
AM 400/1020 Hz
AM modulation depth of 400/1020 Hz beacon ID.
Remote command:
NDB_AMMOD on page 348
K2 400/1020 Hz
Distortion 2nd order, 400/1020 Hz beacon ID
Remote command:
NDB_K2_PCT on page 349
K3 400/1020 Hz
Distortion 3rd order, 400/1020 Hz beacon ID
Remote command:
K4 400/1020 Hz
Distortion 4th order, 400/1020 Hz beacon ID
Remote command:
Unwanted AM 30 to 120 Hz
Measures spurs in the antenna switching range.
Remote command:
NDB_POWSUPPL_FC on page 349
THD 400/1020 Hz
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), 400/1020 Hz beacon ID
Remote command:
NDB_THD_PCT on page 350
4.5.2.4 NDB Recording View
The Recording view displays the recorded data for NDB measurements from the
selected data list (see "List" on page 219).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 133

The individual measurement results are described in the other NDB result views.
on page 217.
Status flags
● I: Invalid
● P: PPS-synced
4.5.3 Configuring NDB Measurements
NDB measurements are always performed on LF input, using AC coupling. They

require the R&S EVSG1-K7 option.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 134

The following settings are configurable for the NDB measurement.
● General Measurement Settings............................................................................ 135

● Receiver Frequency.............................................................................................. 135
● Amplitude.............................................................................................................. 136
● Setting the Bandwidth........................................................................................... 137
● Setting the Measurement Time (MTime)...............................................................137
4.5.3.1 General Measurement Settings
Access: [CONFIG]
Access VNC: [s]
Some general settings are available for NDB measurements.
Level Unit.................................................................................................................... 135
ID Freq........................................................................................................................ 135
Level Unit
Switches the unit for all level displays in NDB measurement results between dBμV
(default) and dBm.
Remote command:
NDB_UNIT_LEVEL on page 347
ID Freq
The NDB ID can be analyzed at 400 Hz or 1020 Hz.
Remote command:
NDB_IDFREQ_400_1020 on page 349
4.5.3.2 Receiver Frequency
Access: [CH FREQ]

Access VNC: [q]
The receiver frequency determines the nominal frequency at which the measurement
is performed.
Freq.............................................................................................................................135
Step Size.....................................................................................................................136
Freq
Sets the nominal frequency for the measurement.
Remote command:
RF on page 245
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 135

Step Size
The default step size for NDB mode is 1.0 kHz.
Remote command:
NDB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP on page 346
4.5.3.3 Amplitude
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
RF Att.......................................................................................................................... 136
RF Mode..................................................................................................................... 136
LF Imp......................................................................................................................... 137
RF Att
by the green area of the bargraph, see Chapter 4.5.2.1, "RF Level, Frequency and IF
Spectrum Display", on page 129). Note that the valid level range depends on the
selected measurement mode.
on page 81).
nal strength.
more stable.
tion" mode.
Remote command:
RF Mode
tant signals.
"Norm" 0 dB
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 136


Remote command:
LF Imp.
Switches the impedance for the LF input between 50 Ω and 20 kΩ.
For an impedance of 20 kΩ, the level is indicated as the voltage of the EMF (no-load
voltage). The unit is automatically set to "dBµV(EMF)".
Remote command:
NDB_LFIN_IMPEDANCE on page 347
antenna.
Remote command:
NDB_EXTERNALATT_LFIN on page 346
4.5.3.4 Setting the Bandwidth
Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e]
The bandwidth determines the frequency range for which the measurement is per-
formed. Depending on the measurement mode, and whether a wideband or a specific
frequency is measured, different settings are available.
IF BW.......................................................................................................................... 137
IF BW Dist................................................................................................................... 137
IF BW
Demodulation bandwidth used for level and modulation measurement.
Remote command:
NDB_DEM_ID_BW on page 346
IF BW Dist
Specifies the IF filter bandwidth for audio and distortion measurements.
Remote command:
NDB_DEM_DIST_BW on page 346
Access: [MTime]
Access VNC: [d]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 137

played.
Remote command:
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 138

R&S®EVSG1000 Graphic Measurement Modes
RF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K10)
5 Graphic Measurement Modes

● RF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K10)...................................................... 139
● IF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K10)........................................................144
● AF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K11)...................................................... 149
● AF Time Domain Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K12)................................................ 158
● Using Markers in the Graphical Displays.............................................................. 167
5.1 RF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K10)

Access: [Mode] > "RF Spectrum"
The RF Spectrum mode displays the power vs. frequency diagram (spectrum) for a
user-defined frequency range of the input signal. This is useful to obtain an overview of
the entire input signal. The RF Spectrum requires the R&S EVSG-K10 option.
The x-axis displays the absolute measured frequency in Hz. The y-axis displays the
measured power levels in dBm.
Marker functions allow you to analyze specific details in the spectrum.
Figure 5-1: RF Spectrum
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 139

The following settings are displayed in the measurement settings area of the RF spec-
trum:
on page 52.
The currently active measurement mode on the active receiver board, e.g. "RF
Spectrum". See Chapter 3.3, "Measurement Mode", on page 52.
● Frequency range
"Center", "Span", "Start", "Stop"
The swept frequency range, see Chapter 5.1.1, "Configuring the Frequency
Range", on page 140.
● Reference level ("Ref Lev")
The maximum expected power level, see "Ref Level" on page 142.
● Level correction ("Lev Corr")
on page 81.
● Resolution Bandwidth ("RBW")
Resolution bandwidth with which the measurement is performed. See "Resolution
Bandwidth (RBW Mode/Res BW)" on page 142.
Remote command to select RF Spectrum mode:

MODE_FSCAN on page 351
Remote command to retrieve trace results:

FSCAN_GETSPECT on page 355
5.1.1 Configuring the Frequency Range
Access: [CH F]
Access VNC: [q]
The following settings configure the frequency range of the spectrum, that is: the x-
axis.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 140

Define the frequency range to be displayed using one of the following methods:
● Center + Span: the center frequency is displayed in the center of the x-axis, with
half the span to the either side
● Start + Stop: the x-axis starts with the start frequency and ends with the stop fre-
quency
Center......................................................................................................................... 141
Span............................................................................................................................141
Start.............................................................................................................................141
Stop.............................................................................................................................141
Center
Configures the center frequency. The configured value is displayed as "Center" in the
measurement settings area.
Remote command:
FSCAN_FREQCENTER on page 351
Span
Configures the frequency span, which must be at least 100 kHz. The configured value
is displayed as "Span" in the measurement settings area.
Remote command:
FSCAN_FREQSPAN on page 351
Start
Configures the start frequency of the x-axis. The configured value is displayed as
"Start" in the measurement settings area.
Remote command:
FSCAN_FREQSTART on page 352
Stop
Configures the stop frequency of the x-axis. The configured value is displayed as
"Stop" in the measurement settings area.
Remote command:
FSCAN_FREQSTOP on page 352
5.1.2 Configuring the Bandwidth
Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e] > "F1"
Resolution Bandwidth (RBW Mode/Res BW)............................................................. 142
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 141

Resolution Bandwidth (RBW Mode/Res BW)

Defines the resolution bandwidth (RBW) of the spectrum. The resolution bandwidth
defines the minimum frequency separation at which the individual components of a
spectrum can be distinguished. Small values result in high precision, as the distance
between two distinguishable frequencies is small. Higher values decrease the preci-
sion, but increase measurement speed.
The RBW can be determined automatically by the R&S EVSG1000, or manually.
AUTO mode The RBW is determined automatically according to the sweep time
and frequency range.
Manual mode Select a predefined fixed value manually.
Remote command:
FSCAN_RESBW_AUTO on page 353
FSCAN_RES_BW on page 353
5.1.3 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis)
Access: [Ampt]
Access VNC: [w]
The amplitude settings configure the y-axis of the spectrum.
Ref Level..................................................................................................................... 142
Y-Range...................................................................................................................... 142
RF Mode..................................................................................................................... 142
Ref Level
The reference level determines the maximum power level displayed in the spectrum.
The reference level should be set as close as possible to the highest expected power
level to avoid overload at the RF input or signal clipping.
Remote command:
FSCAN_REFLEVEL on page 352
Y-Range
Determines the displayed power level range on the y-axis of the spectrum. The range
starts at the specified Ref Level at the top of the diagram.
RF Mode
tant signals.
"Norm" 0 dB
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 142

Remote command:
antenna.
Remote command:
5.1.4 Configuring the Trace
Access: [Meas]
Access VNC: [a]
Trace settings determine how the display values are calculated from the measured val-
ues.
Trace mode................................................................................................................. 143
Average Count............................................................................................................ 143
Trace mode
Defines the update mode for subsequent traces.
"Clear/Write" Overwrite mode (default): the trace is overwritten by each sweep
"Average" The average is determined over several sweeps
The Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures.
"Max Hold" The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis-
played. The R&S EVSG1000 saves each trace point in the trace
memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one.
The Average Count determines the number of sweeps to evaluate.
"RMS" The RMS value for each trace point over several sweeps is deter-
mined and displayed.
Remote command:
FFT_TRACEMODE on page 365
IFSPECT_TRACE_MODE on page 358
FSCAN_TRACE_MODE on page 354
Average Count
Determines the number of sweeps over which trace evaluation is performed (e.g. aver-
aging or maxhold).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 143

IF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K10)
Remote command:
FFT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT on page 366
IFSPECT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT on page 359
FSCAN_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT on page 354
5.2 IF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K10)

Access: [Mode] > "IF Spectrum"
IF Spectrum mode displays the measured power vs frequency spectrum for a (small)
span around the center frequency of the input signal. This is useful to perform detailed
analysis on the signal around the center frequency. This mode requires the
R&S EVSG-K10 option.
The x-axis displays the frequency offset to the nominal RF frequency in Hz. The y-axis
displays the measured power levels in dBm.
Figure 5-2: IF Spectrum
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 144

trum:
on page 52.
The currently active measurement mode on the active receiver board, e.g. "RF
● Frequency range ("RF Freq", "Span")
The swept frequency range, see "RF Freq" on page 146.
● Reference level ("Ref Lev")
The maximum expected power level, see "Ref Level" on page 147.
● Level correction ("Lev Corr")
on page 81.
Resolution bandwidth with which the measurement is performed. See "RBW"
on page 146.

MODE_IFSPECT on page 355

IFSPECT_GETSPECT on page 359
Access: [CH F]
Access VNC: [q]
axis.
RF Freq....................................................................................................................... 146
Span............................................................................................................................146
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 145

RF Freq
Configures the center frequency. The configured value is displayed as "RF Freq" in the
measurement settings area.
Remote command:
IFSPECT_FREQRF on page 356
Span
Configures the frequency span, which must be at least 100 kHz. The span is distrib-
uted evenly to the left and right of the "RF Freq" on page 146. The configured value is
displayed as "Span" in the measurement settings area.
Remote command:
IFSPECT_FREQ_SPAN on page 356
Access: [BW]
RBW............................................................................................................................146
RBW
Remote command:
IFSPECT_RES_BW on page 357
IFSPECT_RESBW_AUTO on page 358
5.2.3 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis)
Access: [Ampt]
Access VNC: [w]
The amplitude settings configure the y-axis of the spectrum.
Ref Level..................................................................................................................... 147
Y-Range...................................................................................................................... 147
RF Att.......................................................................................................................... 147
RF Mode..................................................................................................................... 147
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 146

Ref Level
The reference level determines the maximum power level displayed in the spectrum.
The reference level should be set as close as possible to the highest expected power
level to avoid overload at the RF input or signal clipping.
Remote command:
IFSPECT_REFLEVEL on page 357
Y-Range
Determines the displayed power level range on the y-axis of the spectrum. The range
starts at the specified Ref Level at the top of the diagram.
RF Att
on page 81).
nal strength.
more stable.
tion" mode.
Remote command:
RF Mode
tant signals.
"Norm" 0 dB
Remote command:
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 147


antenna.
Remote command:
Access: [Meas]
Access VNC: [a]
ues.
Trace mode................................................................................................................. 148
Average Count............................................................................................................ 148
Trace mode
Remote command:
Average Count
aging or maxhold).
Remote command:
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 148

AF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K11)
5.3 AF Spectrum Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K11)

Access: [Mode] > "AF Spectrum"
AF Spectrum mode displays the spectrum of a demodulated RF signal with AM compo-
nents. This mode requires the R&S EVSG-K11 option.
The x-axis displays the absolute measured frequency in kHz. The y-axis displays the
modulation depth in dB.
Figure 5-3: AF Spectrum for RF input
trum:
on page 52.
The currently active measurement mode on the active receiver board, e.g. "AF
● "RF Freq"
Nominal measurement frequency of the RF signal, see "RF Freq" on page 152.
● "RF Lev"
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 149

The measured level of the RF signal

● Frequency range
"AF Center", "AF Span", "AF Start", "AF Stop"
Resolution bandwidth with which the measurement is performed. See "Resolution
Bandwidth (RBW Mode/Res BW)" on page 142.
● For ILS or VOR signals: the modulation of the selected carrier ("AM Demod", "VOR
Subc. AM", "VOR Subc. FM"), see "Switching from numeric to graphical results"
on page 104
AF Spectrum for LF input

Using option R&S EVSG1-K7, you can also analyze LF input (AF signals only) in the
AF Spectrum mode. In this case, the y-axis displays the modulation depth in volt.
Figure 5-4: AF Spectrum for LF input

on page 52.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 150

● Frequency range
"AF Center", "AF Span", "AF Start", "AF Stop"
● LF Input type ("LF In")
Only AF signals can be analyzed as LF input in AF Spectrum mode. See "Input
RF/LF" on page 75.
● ("Range")
● Resolution bandwidth for LF input ("AF Res BW")
Resolution bandwidth with which the AF signal measurement is performed. See
"RBW" on page 153.
● For ILS or VOR signals: the modulation of the selected carrier ("AM Demod", "AM
Demod Offset" (low IF mode), "VOR Subc. AM", "VOR Subc. FM"), see "Switching
from numeric to graphical results" on page 104

MODE_FFT on page 360

FFT_GETSPECT on page 366
● Configuring the Input Signal..................................................................................151
● Configuring the Frequency Range........................................................................ 152
● Configuring the Bandwidth....................................................................................153
● Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for RF Input................................................... 154
● Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for LF Input....................................................155
● Configuring the Trace............................................................................................157
5.3.1 Configuring the Input Signal
The AF Spectrum mode can display graphical results for RF or LF input.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 151

Input RF/LF
Access: [Config]
Access VNC: [s]
input from "LF In".
Remote command:
Access: [CH F]
Access VNC: [q]
axis.
Define the frequency range to be displayed using one of the following methods:
● AF Center + AF Span: the center frequency is displayed in the center of the x-axis,
with half the span to the either side
● AF Start + AF Stop: the x-axis starts with the start frequency and ends with the
stop frequency
RF Freq....................................................................................................................... 152
AF Center....................................................................................................................153
AF Span...................................................................................................................... 153
AF Start....................................................................................................................... 153
AF Stop....................................................................................................................... 153
RF Freq
Configures the nominal frequency of the RF signal (not for LF input). The configured
value is displayed as "RF Freq" in the measurement settings area.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 152

Remote command:
FFT_FREQRF on page 363
AF Center
Configures the center frequency for the demodulated AM signal components. The con-
figured value is displayed as "AF Center" in the measurement settings area.
Remote command:
FFT_FREQ_CENTER on page 362
AF Span
Configures the frequency span, which must be at least 100 kHz. The configured value
is displayed as "AF Span" in the measurement settings area.
Remote command:
FFT_FREQ_SPAN on page 362
AF Start
Configures the start frequency of the x-axis. The configured value is displayed as "AF
Start" in the measurement settings area.
Remote command:
FFT_FREQ_START on page 362
AF Stop
Configures the stop frequency of the x-axis. The configured value is displayed as "AF
Stop" in the measurement settings area.
Remote command:
FFT_FREQSTOP on page 363
Access: [BW]
RBW............................................................................................................................153
IF BW.......................................................................................................................... 154
AF In BW.....................................................................................................................154
IF BW AM....................................................................................................................154
RBW
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 153


Remote command:
FFT_RESBW_AUTO on page 364
FFT_RESBW_FIX_KHZ on page 365
IF BW
Defines the IF demodulation bandwidth for RX input in "AF Spectrum" mode.
Remote command:
FFT_IF_BW_KHZ on page 364
AF In BW
Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e]
Bandwidth with which the LF input is measured.
Remote command:
SCOPE_BB_AF_BW_KHZ on page 368
FFT_BB_AF_BW_KHZ on page 361
IF BW AM
Defines the IF demodulation bandwidth for the AM component of LF input.
This function is only available for AM carrier input, which cannot be selected directly in
"AF Spectrum" mode. However, it becomes available when you do one of the following:
● Switch to the AF spectrum from "ILS LOC" or "ILS GP" mode in low IF mode
● Switch to the AF spectrum from "VOR" mode for LF input, selecting the AM
demodulated subcarrier (see "Switching from numeric to graphical results"
on page 104).
Remote command:
FFT_BB_IF_BW_KHZ on page 361
5.3.4 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for RF Input
Access: [Ampt]
Access VNC: [w]
The amplitude settings configure the y-axis of the spectrum. For the AF Spectrum, the
modulation depth of the AM signal components is displayed on the y-axis.
The following settings are available for RF input.
Y-Range...................................................................................................................... 154
RF Att.......................................................................................................................... 155
RF Mode..................................................................................................................... 155
Y-Range
Determines the displayed modulation depth range on the y-axis of the spectrum.
Remote command:
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_DB on page 363
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 154

RF Att
on page 81).
nal strength.
more stable.
tion" mode.
Remote command:
RF Mode
tant signals.
"Norm" 0 dB
Remote command:
5.3.5 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for LF Input
Access: [Ampt]
Access VNC: [w]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 155

The amplitude settings configure the y-axis of the spectrum. The following settings are
available for LF input.
Grid Y Max.................................................................................................................. 156
Y Range...................................................................................................................... 156
Grid Unit...................................................................................................................... 156
Range..........................................................................................................................156
Coupling...................................................................................................................... 156
DC Reference............................................................................................................. 156
LF In Factor.................................................................................................................157
Grid Y Max
Defines the maximum displayed value of the y-axis.
Y Range
Determines the displayed modulation depth range on the y-axis of the spectrum.
Remote command:
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_V on page 364
Grid Unit
Access: [CONFIG]
Access VNC: [s]
Switches the unit of the y-axis between V and % for LF input (see Chapter 5.4.1, "Con-
figuring the Input Signal", on page 161).
Range
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
overload.
Remote command:
Coupling
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
Remote command:
DC Reference
Access: [AMPT]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 156

Access VNC: [w]

Remote command:
LF In Factor
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
input system.
Remote command:
Access: [Meas]
Access VNC: [a]
ues.
Trace mode................................................................................................................. 157
Average Count............................................................................................................ 158
Trace mode
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 157

AF Time Domain Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K12)
Remote command:
Average Count
aging or maxhold).
Remote command:
5.4 AF Time Domain Mode (Option R&S EVSG-K12)

Access: [Mode] > "AF Time Domain"
The AF Time Domain mode displays the modulation vs. time diagram of the demodula-
ted RF signal, similar to an oscilloscope.
This mode requires the R&S EVSG-K12 option.
The x-axis displays the measurement time. The y-axis displays the modulation depth in
percent.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 158

Figure 5-5: AF Time Domain Mode of an ILS signal with DDM = 0,0 %
trum:
on page 52.
● "RF Freq"
Nominal measurement frequency of the RF signal, see "RF Freq" on page 152.
● "RF Lev"
The measured level of the RF signal
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 159

● Y-axis scaling ("Y % / Div")
Range per y-axis division. See "Y % /Div" on page 162.
● X-axis scaling ("Time / Div")
Time per x-axis division. See "Time/Div" on page 165.
AF Time Domain for LF input

Using option R&S EVSG1-K7, you can also analyze LF input (AF signals only) in the
AF Time Domain mode. In this case, the power vs. time diagram is displayed. In addi-
tion to the R&S EVSG-K12 option, analyzing LF input in the time domain requires
option R&S EVSG1-K7.
Figure 5-6: AF Time Domain Mode of an ILS signal from LF input

on page 52.
Time Domain". See Chapter 3.3, "Measurement Mode", on page 52.
● LF Input type ("LF In)"
Only AF signals can be analyzed as LF input in AF Time Domain mode. See "Input
RF/LF" on page 75.
● ("Range")
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 160


● Y-axis scaling ("Y % / Div")
Range per y-axis division. See "Y % /Div" on page 162.
● X-axis scaling ("Time / Div")
Time per x-axis division. See "Time/Div" on page 165.

MODE_SCOPE on page 367

SCOPE_GETMEAS on page 372
5.4.1 Configuring the Input Signal
The AF Time Domain mode can display graphical results for RF or LF input.
Input RF/LF
Access: [Config]
Access VNC: [s]
input from "LF In".
Remote command:
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 161

5.4.2 Configuring the Frequency Range and Bandwidth
The following settings configure the measured RF frequency or bandwidth of the time
domain measurement.
RF Freq....................................................................................................................... 162
IF BW.......................................................................................................................... 162
AF In BW.....................................................................................................................162
RF Freq
Access: [CH F]
Access VNC: [q]
Configures the nominal frequency of the RF measurement (not for LF input). The con-
figured value is displayed as "RF Freq" in the measurement settings area.
Remote command:
SCOPE_FREQRF on page 369
IF BW
Defines the bandwidth with which the RX input is measured.
Remote command:
SCOPE_IF_BW_KHZ on page 369
LF input:
SCOPE_BB_IF_BW_KHZ on page 368
AF In BW
Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e]
Bandwidth with which the LF input is measured.
Remote command:
SCOPE_BB_AF_BW_KHZ on page 368
FFT_BB_AF_BW_KHZ on page 361
5.4.3 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for RF Input
Access: [Ampt]
Access VNC: [w]
available for RF input.
Y % /Div...................................................................................................................... 162
RF Att.......................................................................................................................... 163
RF Mode..................................................................................................................... 163
Y % /Div
Defines the value range displayed in each division of the y-axis. The full y-axis range is
eight times this value.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 162

RF Att
on page 81).
nal strength.
more stable.
tion" mode.
Remote command:
RF Mode
tant signals.
"Norm" 0 dB
Remote command:
5.4.4 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for LF Input
Access: [Ampt]
Access VNC: [w]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 163

available for LF input.
Grid Y Max.................................................................................................................. 164
Y % /Div...................................................................................................................... 164
Grid Unit...................................................................................................................... 164
Range..........................................................................................................................164
Coupling...................................................................................................................... 164
DC Reference............................................................................................................. 164
LF In Factor.................................................................................................................165
Grid Y Max
Defines the maximum value of the y-axis.
Y % /Div
Defines the value range displayed in each division of the y-axis. The full y-axis range is
eight times this value.
Grid Unit
Access: [CONFIG]
Access VNC: [s]
Switches the unit of the y-axis between V and % for LF input (see Chapter 5.4.1, "Con-
figuring the Input Signal", on page 161).
Range
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
overload.
Remote command:
Coupling
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
Remote command:
DC Reference
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 164

Remote command:
LF In Factor
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
input system.
Remote command:
5.4.5 Configuring the Measurement Time
Access: [MTime] > "Time/Div"

Access VNC: [d] > "F1"
Time/Div
Defines the time range displayed in each division of the x-axis. The full x-axis range,
that is: the total measurement time, is eight times this value.
Remote command:
SCOPE_TIMEDIV_RF on page 371
5.4.6 Configuring the Trigger
Access: [Trigger]
Access VNC: [k]
The trigger determines how often and when a new measurement is performed.
Performing a single sweep

To perform a single sweep, press [Single] (VNC: [L]).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 165

Trigger mode............................................................................................................... 166

Trigger Source.............................................................................................................166
Trigger Edge................................................................................................................166
Trigger Level............................................................................................................... 166
Trigger mode
Determines how the trigger is evaluated.
"Norm" Each time a trigger event occurs, a measurement is performed.
"Auto" Each time a trigger event occurs, a measurement is performed.
If no trigger event occurs during a predefined waiting period, a mea-
surement is performed without a trigger. This helps you determine the
required trigger level.
"Single" When the trigger event occurs, a single measurement is performed.
Trigger Source
Determines how often and when a new sweep is performed.
"Ext." A measurement is performed each time a trigger signal from a con-
nected external trigger device is received. The trigger device must be
connected to the "Trigger In" connector on the rear panel of the
R&S EVSG1000.
"Level" A measurement is performed when the input signal reaches the
defined trigger level.
Trigger Edge
For external triggering, this setting defines whether a measurement is performed when
the positive (rising) or negative (falling) edge of the trigger signal is received. Select the
key repeatedly to toggle between the two settings.
Remote command:
SCOPE_TRIGSLOPE on page 372
Trigger Level
For the Trigger Source = "Level", this value specifies the level in percent the input sig-
nal must reach to trigger a measurement.
Remote command:
SCOPE_TRIGLEVEL_RFPCT on page 371
Access: [Meas]
Access VNC: [a]
ues.
Trace mode................................................................................................................. 167
Average Count............................................................................................................ 167
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 166

Using Markers in the Graphical Displays
Trace mode
Remote command:
Average Count
aging or maxhold).
Remote command:
5.5 Using Markers in the Graphical Displays

Marker functions allow you to analyze specific details in the spectrum or time domain
diagrams.
Active markers are displayed as colored triangles in the spectrum at the position they
were placed. The exact position (frequency or time) and measured level at that position
is indicated in the marker box in the upper right-hand corner of the diagram. Active
markers are indicated by a highlighted softkey.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 167

Up to four markers can be active at the same time. Markers 2 to 4 can be either normal
markers or delta markers. A normal marker indicates the absolute signal value at the
defined position in the diagram. A delta marker indicates the value of the marker rela-
tive to marker 1.
Activating/Deactivating a marker.................................................................................168
└ Marker type (Type Mrk <2-4>)...................................................................... 168
Deactivating all markers..............................................................................................169
Moving a marker to a peak in the diagram..................................................................169
Adapting the center frequency to the current marker position.................................... 169
Relative Unit (for AF spectrum only)........................................................................... 169
Activating/Deactivating a marker
Access: [Marker] > "Marker<x>"
Access VNC: [i] > "F1"- "F4"
To activate a marker, select the corresponding softkey. An active marker is highlighted.
To select a marker that is already active, for example to move its position (see "Moving
a marker to a peak in the diagram" on page 169), select the softkey again. A selected
(editable) marker is highlighted orange.
To deactivate an active marker, select the marker until the highlighting is no longer dis-
played.
Marker type (Type Mrk <2-4>) ← Activating/Deactivating a marker

Determines the type of marker results.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 168

"Normal" A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position
in the diagram.
"Delta" A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to marker 1
(which is always of type "normal").
Deactivating all markers

Access: [Mkr Fct] > "All Markers Off"
Access VNC: [j] > "F1"
Deactivates all markers in the diagram.
Moving a marker to a peak in the diagram

Access: [Marker ->] > "Peak" / "Next Peak"
Access VNC: [o] > "F1" / "F2"
Sets the currently active and selected marker (indicated in the softkey) to the highest
or next-highest peak detected in the diagram. If no marker is active or selected, this
function has no effect. To select a marker, see "Activating/Deactivating a marker"
on page 168.
Adapting the center frequency to the current marker position

Access: [Marker ->] > "Center = Marker Freq"
Access VNC: [o] > "F3"
Sets the center frequency of the spectrum to the position of the currently active and
selected marker (indicated in the softkey). The spectrum is updated to the new fre-
quency range. The span is maintained.
If no marker is active or selected, this function has no effect. To select a marker, see
"Activating/Deactivating a marker" on page 168.
Relative Unit (for AF spectrum only)

Determines the unit for relative markers in the AF Spectrum diagram. Percentage and
dB values are available.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 169

R&S®EVSG1000 GBAS/SCAT-I Mode (Options R&S EVSG-K4/-K5)
6 GBAS/SCAT-I Mode (Options R&S EVSG-

K4/-K5)
Access: [Mode] > "GBAS"
The R&S EVSG-K4/-K5 options are firmware applications that add functionality to per-
form GBAS and SCAT-I analysis on the R&S EVSG1000.
The R&S EVSG-K4 option enables you to receive and analyze the very high frequency
(VHF) data broadcast (VDB) signal-in-space transmitted from a ground-based aug-
mentation system (GBAS) ground subsystem to the airborne subsystem. This imple-
mentation is in line with the specification ICAO AN10 Vol1 [3] and RTCA DO-246 [1]
(see Chapter C, "References", on page 397).
Similarly, using option R&S EVSG-K5, data from special category I (SCAT-I) systems
can be received and analyzed. The main difference is the content of the message data.
This implementation is in line with the specification ICAO AN10 Vol1 [3] and RTCA
DO-217 [2] (see Chapter C, "References", on page 397).
The R&S EVSG-K4/-K5 applications feature:
● Receiving GBAS signal data from a GBAS ground station in a frequency range
between 108.025 MHz and 117.950 MHz with a channel spacing of 25 kHz
● Receiving SCAT-I signal data from a SCAT-I ground station in a frequency range
between 108.025 MHz and 117.950 MHz with a channel spacing of 25 kHz
● Analyzing the RF characteristics, signal strength and frequency accuracy of the
GBAS/SCAT-I signal
● Demodulating, decoding and displaying GBAS/SCAT-I signal data
● Analyzing up to 8 time slots or individual time slot details in the GBAS/SCAT-I sig-
nal data
● Analyzing individual Final Approach Segment (FAS) data blocks
● Logging and storing up to 9999 lists of received GBAS/SCAT-I signal data
We strongly recommend that you provide a PPS signal for reference. Without PPS
synchronization, signal timing and slot positions may not be correct.
For details, see Chapter 6.1.4, "Time Slot Synchronization via PPS", on page 174.
● Basics on GBAS and SCAT-I Analysis .................................................................171

● GBAS / SCAT-I Measurement Information............................................................174
● GBAS / SCAT-I Measurement Views and Results................................................ 176
● GBAS/ SCAT-I Measurement Configuration......................................................... 189
● Message XML Interface........................................................................................ 193
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 170

Basics on GBAS and SCAT-I Analysis
6.1 Basics on GBAS and SCAT-I Analysis

The following topics summarize some background information on the GBAS and other
avionics-related standards. The provided overview information is intended as an
explanation of the used terms and does not aim to be comprehensive.
● GBAS Specifics.....................................................................................................171
● Broadcast Timing Structure...................................................................................173
● Final Approach Segment (FAS) Construction Data...............................................173
● Time Slot Synchronization via PPS.......................................................................174
6.1.1 GBAS Specifics
GBAS is a ground based augmentation system that can enhance satellite navigation.
The GBAS is intended to improve aircraft safety and to enhance satellite navigation
and the full range of precision approach and landing procedures, as well as the termi-
nal area operations.
GBAS components
The illustration in Figure 6-1 is a simplified representation of the GBAS' three main
components:
● the GNSS satellite subsystem
● the airborne subsystem
● the GBAS ground subsystem.
The ground equipment consists of four reference GNSS receivers at exactly defined
positions around the airport, GBAS ground station, and a VHF data broadcast transmit-
ter (VDB).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 171

Figure 6-1: GBAS components and signals (simplified representation)
1 = GNSS reference receiver

2 = GBAS ground station
3 = VHF data broadcast (VDB) transmitter
a = GNSS navigation message
b = Pseudorange
c = GBAS Correction message
d = VDB signal
The GBAS GNSS reference receivers receive the GNSS navigation message, perform
pseudorange measurements and transmit this information to the GBAS ground station.
The GBAS ground station determines errors in the calculated positions, adds additional
parameters and approach path information, produces a GBAS correction message and
sends it the VDB transmitter. The VDB transmitter modulates and encodes this mes-
sage and broadcasts it to the airborne GBAS equipment, for example a GBAS receiver
in the airplane. The GBAS equipment in the airplane is a high-precision multimode
receiver that evaluates the message and applies corrections parameters to improve
the navigation algorithms from GPS.
This list outlines the three signals transmitted between the components and referred to
as GBAS Signal-in-Space:
● GNSS satellite to GBAS ground subsystem navigation signal
● GNSS satellite to GBAS airborne subsystem navigation signal
● GBAS ground subsystem to GBAS airborne subsystem VHF data broadcast
Carrier frequencies and frequency channels

The VHF data broadcast is defined for carrier frequencies within the range of
108.025 MHz to 117.950 MHz and carrier spacing of 25.0 kHz.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 172

6.1.2 Broadcast Timing Structure
The broadcast is a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA). According to [1], the TDMA
timing structure uses a two level hierarchy, composed of 500 ms long frames, each
divided into 8 VDB time slots (A - H), see Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2: TDMA timing structure (simplified representation)
A VDB time slot is the minimum resource that an individual VDB transmitter can use.
During one time slot, a VDB transmitter transmits exactly one burst.
The GBAS specification [1] defines the TDMA timing structure, including timing budget
of the VDB bursts, burst data contents and message encoding in great details. The
R&S EVSG1000 receives the required training sequence, decodes the message
according to [1] and demodulates the D8PSK modulated data automatically.
6.1.3 Final Approach Segment (FAS) Construction Data
According to the standard [1], the message type 4 contains one or more data sets that
contain approach data, associated vertical/lateral alert limits, and/or the Terminal Area
Path (TAP).
The FAS path is a line in space that defines the path an airplane follows on its final
approach. This line is defined by the Landing Threshold Point/Fictitious Threshold
Point (LTP/FTP), Flight Path Alignment Point (FPAP), Threshold Crossing Height
(TCH), and the Glide Path Angle (GPA).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 173

GBAS / SCAT-I Measurement Information
Figure 6-3: Final Approach Segment (FAS) diagram, according to [1]
LTP/FTP = Landing Threshold Point/Fictitious Threshold Point; point at the center of the landing runway,
defined by its WGS84 coordinates
GPIP = Glide Path Intercept Point; the point where the final approach path intercepts the local level plane
FPAP = Flight Path Alignment Point; point at the end of the runway that in conjunction with the LTP/FTP
defines the geodesic plane of the precision final approach, landing and flight path.
TCH = Threshold Crossing Height
GPA = Glide Path Angle; angle at the TCH that describes the intended angle of descent at the final
approach path.
The coordinates of the LTP/FTP are defined in WGS84 coordinates. In this coordinate
system, a location is identified by three coordinates, the altitude, the latitude and the
longitude.
6.1.4 Time Slot Synchronization via PPS
The GBAS/SCAT-I signal is synchronous to the PPS signal of the GPS system. With
the help of this synchronization, the GBAS/SCAT-I signal is assigned to eight time slots
(twice a second).
If the R&S EVSG1000 finds a valid PPS signal at its selected trigger connector, the
status line of the display indicates "PPS Locked". In this case, the R&S EVSG1000 can
analyze the GBAS/SCAT-I signal and detect the individual GBAS time slots.
If no valid PPS signal is detected, the R&S EVSG1000 still analyzes the GBAS/SCAT-I
signal and tries to synchronize to the GBAS/SCAT-I burst raster. In this case, the status
line of the display indicates "Burst Locked". Without PPS synchronization, signal timing
and slot positions may not be correct.
6.2 GBAS / SCAT-I Measurement Information

The following measurement information is displayed in all GBAS / SCAT-I views.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 174

GBAS / SCAT-I Measurement Information
RX board (RX1 | RX2).................................................................................................175

Measurement mode.................................................................................................... 175
Frame..........................................................................................................................175
Slot.............................................................................................................................. 175
Frequency (Freq)........................................................................................................ 175
RF attenuation (Att).....................................................................................................175
Level correction (Lev Corr)..........................................................................................175
Bandwidth (IF BW)...................................................................................................... 175
Time reference status (Time Ref.)...............................................................................176
Display Update Status (Mode).................................................................................... 176
RX board (RX1 | RX2)

The currently active receiver board. See Chapter 3.2, "Receiver Board", on page 52.
Measurement mode
The currently active measurement mode on the active receiver board; in this case:
"GBAS" (for both GBAS and SCAT-I modes). See Chapter 3.3, "Measurement Mode",
on page 52.
Frame
The currently selected frame for which the results are displayed. The most recent
frame is referred to as T, previous frames are T minus 1 (T-1), T-2, to T-39.
Slot
The currently selected slot for which the results are displayed. The slots are labeled A,
B, C, D, E, F, G, H.
Frequency (Freq)
The channel frequency that determines the carrier frequency at which the measure-
ment is performed.
108.025 MHz to 117.950 MHz with a channel spacing of 25 kHz.
Remote command:
GBAS:FREQRF on page 335
RF attenuation (Att)
Level correction (Lev Corr)

The applied level correction by a transducer. See "Transducer Correction" on page 81.
Bandwidth (IF BW)

Bandwidth on which the measurement is performed. The default bandwidth is
16.8 kHz. For GBAS/SCAT-I measurements, the complete bandwidth is 25 kHz.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 175

GBAS / SCAT-I Measurement Views and Results
See also "IF Filter" on page 191.
Time reference status (Time Ref.)

Indicates the status of the PPS signal from an external GPS device.
"PPS Locked" A GPS receiver or a valid signal is available at the PPS-In,Trigger-In,
or RS232-GPS connector.
"Burst Locked" No valid PPS signal available at any input connector, but a valid
GBAS/SCAT-I burst raster was found. Signal timing and slot positions
may not be correct.
"Unlocked" No valid signal available at any input connector, and no valid GBAS/
SCAT-I burst raster was found. GBAS/SCAT-I signals cannot be
detected correctly.
Remote command:
GBAS:PPSLOCKED? on page 342
Display Update Status (Mode)

Indicates whether the display is updated or not.
Note: Data recording and streaming continue regardless of the display update status.
"Run" Display is updated continuously.
"Pause" Display is temporarily not updated.
Remote command:
GBAS:BUFFER_RUNPAUSE on page 334
6.3 GBAS / SCAT-I Measurement Views and Results

The GBAS/SCAT-I measurement provides both numerical and graphical results in vari-
ous views.
Remote command:
GBAS:SCREENVIEW on page 336
● Sequence View..................................................................................................... 176
● Frame View........................................................................................................... 178
● Burst View............................................................................................................. 182
● Constellation View.................................................................................................185
● Message View.......................................................................................................186
● Recording View..................................................................................................... 187
6.3.1 Sequence View
Access: [Meas] > "View" > "Sequence"

The "Sequence" view is the default view in GBAS/SCAT-I mode and provides an over-
view of the GBAS/SCAT-I transmissions over time. Each frame contains 8 TDMA slots
(see also Chapter 6.1.2, "Broadcast Timing Structure", on page 173). Six sequential
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 176

frames are displayed at a time, in a table with one column for each slot and one row
per frame. You can scroll through all available frames using the rotary knob or the
Frame and Slot functions.
In the "Sequence" view, the data from the last 40 frames is available. The data is
stored in a so-called ring buffer. When the ring buffer is full, the next data set over-
writes the first data set, that is: the oldest. Thus, the most recent 40 data sets are avail-
able. The most recently received frame is referred to as T. Each previous frame is
referred to as T minus 1 (T-1), T-2 etc. Every 500 ms, a new frame is inserted, over-
writing the frame T-39, and becomes the new frame T. Thus, the display is updated
every 500 ms. To freeze the current display for evaluation, you can pause the table
update (see "Run/Pause" on page 190). Data recording and streaming, however, con-
tinue as usual. When updating is resumed, all frames in the table are updated.
Results for a single frame or slot

The currently selected frame and slot are indicated by a dotted rectangle in the table.
To view the details for a particular frame or slot, turn the rotary knob to scroll through
the slots and frames. When the required slot or frame is selected, select the view you
want to see the slot results in.
For more details, see:
● Chapter 6.3.2, "Frame View", on page 178
● Chapter 6.3.3, "Burst View", on page 182
● Chapter 6.3.4, "Constellation View", on page 185
● Chapter 6.3.5, "Message View", on page 186
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 177

For each slot in each displayed frame, the following information is provided in the cor-
responding table cell (for a valid GBAS burst, if available).
GBAS ID......................................................................................................................178
Burst Level Average (Av [dBm]).................................................................................. 178
Application Data (App. Dat.)........................................................................................178
Status.......................................................................................................................... 178
GBAS ID
4-character identifier of the ground station broadcasting the message. If there is more
than one message inside the burst, the first GBAS ID is displayed.
Remote command:
GBAS:GBASID? on page 338
Burst Level Average (Av [dBm])

Arithmetic average of the burst power level measured over the period of the synchroni-
zation and ambiguity resolution field of the burst.
If no burst was detected, the arithmetic average of the noise power is displayed.
Remote command:
LA? on page 336
Application Data (App. Dat.)

Detected message types (MT) in the burst
Example: "MT:1,2": messages of type 1 and 2 detected
Status
The burst status is indicated by the color of the slot cell:
Green The status is "OK". The received burst passed the cyclic redundancy
check (CRC).
Red An error occurred. The received burst did not pass the cyclic redun-
dancy check (CRC).
Gray No burst received.
6.3.2 Frame View
Access: [Meas] > "View" > "Frame"

To use the available spectrum most efficiently, despite the low data rate, GBAS trans-
missions use the Time Division Mulitple Access (TDMA) method (see also Chap-
ter 6.1.2, "Broadcast Timing Structure", on page 173). Thus, multiple GBAS bursts,
even from different transmitters, can be sent in a single frame. To do so, the transmit-
ters must adhere to the time slots strictly. Nevertheless, time delays can occur during
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 178

transmission. The GBAS "Frame" view allows you to measure the time behavior of the
slots precisely.
As opposed to the "Sequence" view, the "Frame" view displays the results of a single
frame only. By default, the most recently measured frame T is displayed. To display the
results for a different frame, use the Frame function.
The display is updated each time a complete frame has been measured, that is: every
500 ms. To freeze the current display for evaluation, you can pause the view update
(see "Run/Pause" on page 190). Data recording and streaming, however, continue as
usual. When updating is resumed, the displayed results in the view are updated.
The "Frame" view contains two different displays:

● Chapter 6.3.2.1, "Frame Power Vs. Time Diagram", on page 179
● Chapter 6.3.2.2, "Frame Results Table", on page 180
6.3.2.1 Frame Power Vs. Time Diagram
The power vs. time diagram displays the measured power per time, normalized to the
PPS signal. The fixed slot grid defined by the PPS (reference) signal is indicated by
vertical lines in the diagram. In addition to the time in milliseconds, the slot label A to H
is indicated on the x-axis. The time axis always starts at 0 seconds or 500 millisec-
onds.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 179

The measured power is indicated for a range of -120 dBm to 0 dBm on the y-axis.
6.3.2.2 Frame Results Table
In the frame results table, the details for each slot in the selected frame are displayed,
one slot per column. The currently selected slot is indicated by a dotted rectangle in
the frame results table. If a slot timing error or a signal level error occurs, the slot is
highlighted red.
To scroll through the parameters in the table for a single slot, use the arrow keys up
and down.
Burst Level Average (Av [dBm]).................................................................................. 181

Slot Level Peak (Pk [dBm])......................................................................................... 181
Carrier frequency offset (Offs. [kHz])...........................................................................181
EVM RMS................................................................................................................... 181
GBAS ID......................................................................................................................181
Training Sequence FEC (Train. FEC)......................................................................... 181
Application Data (App. Dat.)........................................................................................181
Application FEC (App. FEC)....................................................................................... 182
Slot Occupancy (S.Occu [%])......................................................................................182
Bit error rate (BER) before FEC.................................................................................. 182
Valid Bursts (Valid B.)..................................................................................................182
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 180

Failed Bursts (Failed B.)..............................................................................................182

Sync. Sequence (Sync. [us]).......................................................................................182
Overload......................................................................................................................182
Burst Level Average (Av [dBm])

Arithmetic average of the burst power level measured over the period of the synchroni-
zation and ambiguity resolution field of the burst.
If no burst was detected, the arithmetic average of the noise power is displayed.
Remote command:
LA? on page 336
Slot Level Peak (Pk [dBm])

Highest measured power level in the slot in dBm
Remote command:
GBAS:PEAKLEV? on page 342
Carrier frequency offset (Offs. [kHz])

Offset of the measured carrier frequency from the nominal frequency
Remote command:
GBAS:FMEAS? on page 335
EVM RMS
Error vector magnitude RMS in percent.
Indicates the quality of the transmitted symbols in relation to the ideal constellation
point. The EVM normalization reference is the mean constellation power.
Remote command:
GBAS:EVM? on page 337
For baseband input also:
GBAS:EVM_ANGLE_NORM on page 335
GBAS ID
4-character identifier of the ground station broadcasting the message. If there is more
than one message inside the burst, the first GBAS ID is displayed.
Remote command:
GBAS:GBASID? on page 338
Training Sequence FEC (Train. FEC)

Training sequence status based on the FEC
"OK" Training sequence correct
"NOK" Training sequence not valid, no bits corrected
<x> Number of corrected bits in the training sequence
Application Data (App. Dat.)

Detected message types (MT) in the burst
Example: "MT:1,2": messages of type 1 and 2 detected
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 181

Application FEC (App. FEC)

Application data status based on the FEC
"OK" Application data correct
"NOK" Application data not valid, no bits corrected
<x> Number of corrected bits in the application data
Slot Occupancy (S.Occu [%])

The percentage of the available bits in the slot that contain burst data, calculated as:
<bits_burst> / 1968.75 bits *100 %
Bit error rate (BER) before FEC

Bit error rate (BER) before forward error correction (FEC). The Training Sequence FEC
(Train. FEC) and the Application FEC (App. FEC) are used to detect the bit errors.
Calculated as:
<bits_ok> / <bits_error>
To reset the BER value use the Reset BER function.
Remote command:
GBAS:GBASBER? on page 338
Valid Bursts (Valid B.)

Number of received bursts that passed the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) and are
thus considered valid.
To reset the value use the Reset BER function.
Failed Bursts (Failed B.)

Number of received bursts that did not pass the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) and
are thus considered invalid.
To reset the value use the Reset BER function.
Sync. Sequence (Sync. [us])

Position of the synchronization sequence within the burst in μs.
Overload
Indicates a power overload at any of the input connectors, which may account for inac-
curate results. If an overload occurs, an error message is also displayed in the mea-
surement information in all GBAS / SCAT-I views.
"OK" No overload
"RF Ovld" Input signal too high
"IF Ovld" IF signal too high
"ADC Ovld" ADC input signal too high
6.3.3 Burst View
Access: [Meas] > "View" > "Burst view"
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 182

The "Burst" view is similar to the "Frame" view. However, the "Burst" view displays the
results for an individual slot.
Figure 6-4: Example for a "Burst" view with a diagram and result table
By default, the first slot (A) from the most recently measured frame T is selected. To
display the results for a different slot, use the Frame and Slot functions.
The display is updated each time a complete slot has been measured, that is: every
62.5 ms. To freeze the current display for evaluation, you can pause the view update
(see "Run/Pause" on page 190). Data recording and streaming, however, continue as
usual. When updating is resumed, the displayed results in the view are updated.
The "Burst" view contains two different displays:
● Chapter 6.3.3.1, "Slot Power vs. Time Diagram", on page 183
● Chapter 6.3.3.2, "Slot Results Table", on page 184
● Slot Power vs. Time Diagram................................................................................183
● Slot Results Table................................................................................................. 184
6.3.3.1 Slot Power vs. Time Diagram
A power vs. time diagram displays the measured power in the slot per time, normalized
to the PPS signal. The x-axis shows the time in milliseconds. It always starts at 0 sec-
onds or a multiple of 62.5 milliseconds. The default range is 62.5 milliseconds. If a
TDMA timing error occurs, the GBAS/SCAT burst can exceed the displayed time
range.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 183

The measured power is indicated for a range of -120 dBm to 0 dBm on the y-axis.
Figure 6-5: Power vs. time diagram for a slot in Burst view
The following functions are available for the slot power vs. time diagram:
Zoom +/ Zoom -
Changes the time range displayed in the diagram to view more details in a slot ("Zoom
+") or outside of the slot ("Zoom -").
Data points
Shows or hides dots in the diagram indicating the measured data points.
Figure 6-6: Power vs. time diagram with highlighted data points
6.3.3.2 Slot Results Table
In the slot results table, the slot details for the selected slot are displayed. The results
are the same as those displayed in the Frame Results Table.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 184

If no valid burst is detected in the slot, the slot results table shows only the measured
noise level.
6.3.4 Constellation View
Access: [Meas] > "View" > "Constell. view"

The "Constellation" view consists of a constellation diagram and the measured values
for the individual slot (see Chapter 6.3.2.2, "Frame Results Table", on page 180).
The constellation diagram shows the in-phase and quadrature components of the
received D8PSK symbols in the slot. The in-phase components (I) are displayed on the
x-axis, the quadrature (Q) components on the y-axis.
The eight ideal constellation points for D8PSK modulation are indicated by red dots.
The following functions are available for the constellation diagram:
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 185

Clear Inter.
Determines the interval after which the constellation diagram is cleared automatically.
"Off" (Default:) All constellation points from all bursts are displayed in the
same diagram, no automatic clearance.
"Burst" After each burst, the diagram is cleared and a new constellation dia-
gram is displayed.
Clear
Clears all points from previous bursts in the constellation diagram and starts a new dia-
gram.
6.3.5 Message View
Access: [Meas] > "View" > "Message view"

The "Message" view shows the messages received during a single slot or burst. In
addition to the message itself, the header and footer are analyzed. If the burst contains
multiple messages, they are listed in the table one after the other.
The data is interpreted from the received burst bitstream according to rules and data
definitions configured in XML files. You can configure the information provided in the
"Message" view table using the message xml interface (see Chapter 6.5, "Message
XML Interface", on page 193).
For each type of data content, a separate row is displayed with the following informa-
tion:
● "Data content": textual description of the type of information
● "Bits": number of bits from the burst bitstream that were evaluated to obtain the
information
● "Value": result of the interpreted bits
● "Binary representation": the raw data in the evaluated bits
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 186

Use the arrow keys and the rotary knob to scroll through the table.
6.3.6 Recording View
Access: [Meas] > "View" > "Rec."

The Recording view displays the recorded data for GBAS/SCAT-I measurements from
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 187

The individual measurement results are described in Chapter 6.3.2.2, "Frame Results
Table", on page 180.
Recording GBAS/SCAT-I measurement results

When recording data in GBAS/SCAT-I mode, one record is stored for each slot, with a
duration of 62.5 ms. The record contains measurement values and message data.
Recording is continued even if the display update is temporarily stopped (by the
"Pause" function, see "Run/Pause" on page 190). Start and stop recording from any
measurement view using the [Record] key. Record only the selected and currently dis-
played slot or frame using the [Single] key.
You can define which data is stored; see Chapter 8.2.3, "Recording Settings",
on page 219.
For details on data logging, see Chapter 8.2, "Recording Measurement Data",
on page 217.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 188

GBAS/ SCAT-I Measurement Configuration
Status flags
● I: Invalid
● P: PPS-synced
The following functions are available to configure the "Recording" view.

DL Line........................................................................................................................189
-> Rec. Burst View / -> Rec. Const. View / -> Rec. Msg. View................................... 189
DL Line
Selects a particular line (record) in the data recording file.
-> Rec. Burst View / -> Rec. Const. View / -> Rec. Msg. View
Displays the selected data record in detail in the selected view. Message view is only
available if message data was stored in the data record.
To return to the "Recording" view, select "-> Return".
6.4 GBAS/ SCAT-I Measurement Configuration

The following settings are available for GBAS/ SCAT-I measurements.
Settings for recording are described in Chapter 8.2, "Recording Measurement Data",
on page 217.
● View Configuration................................................................................................ 189

● Frequency Configuration.......................................................................................190
● Amplitude Configuration........................................................................................191
● Bandwidth Configuration.......................................................................................191
● General Configuration...........................................................................................192
6.4.1 View Configuration
The following functions are available to configure the GBAS/ SCAT-I views except for
the "Recording" view.
Access: [Meas]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 189

Access VNC: [A]

Run/Pause.................................................................................................................. 190
View.............................................................................................................................190
Frame..........................................................................................................................190
Slot.............................................................................................................................. 190
Run/Pause
Stops and resumes the display update. Data recording and streaming continue as
usual. When updating is resumed, the display reflects the latest results again.
View
Switches between
● Sequence View
● Frame View
● Burst View
● Constellation View
● Message View
● Recording View
Frame
Selects the frame to be displayed in the power vs. time diagram and at the top of the
results table. By changing the frame number, for example using the rotary knob, you
can scroll through the frames in the table and through the most recent 40 frames in the
diagram.
Slot
Selects the slot to be displayed in the power vs. time diagram and at the top of the
results table. By changing the slot name, for example using the rotary knob, you can
scroll through the slots in the table and in the diagram.
Remote command:
GBAS:SEQN_SLOT on page 336
6.4.2 Frequency Configuration
Access: > [CH Freq] > "Freq"

Access VNC: [Q] > [F2]
Frequency (Freq)
The channel frequency that determines the carrier frequency at which the measure-
ment is performed.
108.025 MHz to 117.950 MHz with a channel spacing of 25 kHz.
Remote command:
GBAS:FREQRF on page 335
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 190

6.4.3 Amplitude Configuration
Access: [AMPT]
Access VNC: [w]
RF Att
Determines whether the RF attenuation is defined automatically or manually.
"Manual" Select the RF Mode manually.
For signals with mostly constant signal levels, it is recommended that
you select the optimal mode manually.
"Auto" The optimal mode is selected automatically according to the input sig-
nal strength.
In difficult receiving conditions, for example the presence of high-level
interferers or areas with strong multi-path conditions, selecting the
suitable attenuation mode manually can lead to more stable mea-
surement results.
If the R&S EVSG1000 has to adapt the attenuation frequently, indica-
ted by a frequent clicking noise from the attenuator, spikes can occur
in the trace.
Remote command:
GBAS:ATTMODE AUTO, see GBAS:ATTMODE on page 334
RF Mode
tant signals.
"Norm" 0 dB
Remote command:
6.4.4 Bandwidth Configuration
Access: [BW]
Access VNC: [e]
IF Filter
The IF filter determines the bandwidth on which the measurement is performed. The
default filter bandwidth is 16.8 kHz. For GBAS/SCAT-I measurements, the complete
channel bandwidth is 25 kHz.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 191

6.4.5 General Configuration
Access: [Config]
Access VNC: [S]
PPS SRC.................................................................................................................... 192
Export xml................................................................................................................... 192
Import xml................................................................................................................... 192
DEC DEF.................................................................................................................... 192
Reset BER.................................................................................................................. 192
EVM Mode.................................................................................................................. 192
PPS SRC
Source of the PPS signal required as a time reference
"TRIG" Signal provided at the Trigger In connector
"PPS SMA" Signal provided at the PPS In connector
"PPS GPS" Signal provided at the RS232-GPS connector
Export xml
Exports the internal message type xml definition to a connected USB storage device
(see Chapter 6.5, "Message XML Interface", on page 193).
This is useful to create a customized definition without having to start from an empty
file.
Import xml
Imports a customized message type xml definition from a connected USB storage
device to the R&S EVSG1000 (see Chapter 6.5, "Message XML Interface",
on page 193).
Note that this definition is only used if you set DEC DEF to "Custom".
DEC DEF
Determines which message type xml definition the decoder uses.
"Default" Uses the definition stored internally on the R&S EVSG1000
"Custom" Uses the imported definition (see "Import xml" on page 192).
Reset BER
Resets the values for the following measurement results:
● "Bit error rate (BER) before FEC" on page 182
● "Valid Bursts (Valid B.)" on page 182
● "Failed Bursts (Failed B.)" on page 182
Remote command:
GBAS:RESETBER on page 343
EVM Mode
Determines the mode of EVM calculation for baseband input in "GBAS" mode.
"ANGLE" Only angle deviations are considered in EVM calculation.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 192

Message XML Interface
"NORM" Both angle and amplitude deviation are considered in EVM calcula-
tion.
Remote command:
GBAS:EVM_ANGLE_NORM on page 335
6.5 Message XML Interface

The R&S EVSG-K4 receives and analyzes VDB GBAS transmissions according to
ICAO AN10 Vol1 [3] and RTCA DO-246 [1]. Analysis includes physical measurement
values such as level, frequency or EVM. The results can be displayed or recorded. A
bitstream is also provided with each transmission (burst). The bitstream contains the
digital information required by a GPS receiver for its calculations. To display this infor-
mation in human-readable format, the bitstream needs to be interpreted as described
in the document.
The R&S EVSG GBAS/SCAT-I option provides a special parser that transforms the
data efficiently, controlled by a set of XML files. The XML files contain the rules and
data definitions for conversion and are loaded during runtime. The converted, human-
readable data is then displayed in the "Message" view (see Chapter 6.3.5, "Message
View", on page 186).
You can edit the XML control files with any text editor to obtain specific outputs, for
example, or to accommodate the output to changes in the specifications. However, a
good knowledge of the ICAO AN10 Vol1 [3] and RTCA DO-217 [2] specifications is
essential to understand the transformation process.
The R&S EVSG1000 provides a default set of XML files for an initial message type def-
inition. These files are stored internally on the instrument. You can export the files to a
USB storage device and import the customized files back to the R&S EVSG1000 (see
"Import xml" on page 192).
To customize the "Message" view results

1. Connect a USB storage device to the R&S EVSG1000.
2. Select [Config] > "Export xml".

The required file structure and files are stored on the storage device.
3. Edit the files as required. See the descriptions below for more information.
4. Select [Config] > "Import xml".

The edited files are stored on the R&S EVSG1000.
5. Select [Config] > "DEC DEF" > "Custom".

The R&S EVSG1000 decoder uses the edited, imported message definition and
displays the defined results in the "Message" view.
● General Processing...............................................................................................194
● Output Elements and Control Elements................................................................195
● XML File Format Description.................................................................................198
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 193

● Format Description of Elements............................................................................200

● Output Elements................................................................................................... 200
● Control Elements...................................................................................................208
● Auxiliary Elements.................................................................................................212
6.5.1 General Processing
The parser in the R&S EVSG GBAS/SCAT-I application uses the first message control
XML file as instructions for processing. As input, it receives a bitstream from the GBAS
burst in the input signal.
The general process of interpreting the bitstream consists of the following steps:
1. The parser applies the first instruction on the leading bits of the bitstream, which
usually produces a value or text as output.
2. The parser applies the next instruction on the subsequent bits of the bitstream.
As a result, either an output is produced, or further instructions are provided. Fur-
ther instructions can be provided in additional XML files, or depend on the current
bitstream value, or on a previous value (see "Control elements" on page 196).
3. The parser continues to process the instructions as defined in the XML file, apply-
ing them to the subsequent, not-yet-processed bits of the bitstream.
4. When the end of the last XML file has been processed, the parser stops.
The converted, human-readable data is displayed in the "Message" view.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 194

Step 1
<Element> XML file

<data_content>ABC_XYZ</data_content>
<data_content_short>ABC</data_content_short>
<bits_used>4</bits_used>
<type>value</type>
</Element>
Interpretation
bitstream parser
...00001001111000000111 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
Step 2
<Element> XML file

<data_content>KLMO</data_content>
<data_content_short>KLM</data_content_short>
<type>value</type>
</Element>
Interpretation
bitstream parser
. ...0000100111100000 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
.
.
Step n
<Element> XML file
<data_content>Fill Bits</data_content>
<data_content_short>FILL_BITS</
data_content_short>
<type>fill</type>
</Element>
</Gbas>
bitstream parser Output in Message view table
End
6.5.2 Output Elements and Control Elements
Different types of elements are supported to interpret all existing values in a GBAS
burst. However, the types are generic and can be configured to handle other values, as
well.
Many elements simply convert a binary value in the bitstream to human-readable out-
put for the "Message" view table. Conversion in this case can consist of various differ-
ent instructions, such as:
● Comparing bitstrings and providing a check result
● Converting binary values to decimal values
● Converting binary values to text descriptions
For different instructions, you must define different element types.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 195

Example: Interpretation of a "fixed"-type element

The fixed-type element expects a certain number of bits to have a specific value. If
the incoming bitstream matches, the result value is OK, otherwise it is NOK.
The result of the interpretation on the R&S EVSG1000 is a table similar to the exam-
ples in DO246, in this case:
Table 6-1: Output in Message view table
Data Content Bits used Value Binary
Power stabilization 15 OK 000000000000000
Sync. and ambiguity resolution 48 OK 0100011111011111

1000110001110110
0000011110010000
All available element types are described in Chapter 6.5.4, "Format Description of Ele-
ments", on page 200.
Control elements
Each GBAS burst can contain one or more messages. The messages have different
message types with different content. The content of the same message type can
depend on certain parameters which are only known during runtime. Therefore, control
elements such as a case-dependent branch to a further XML file are supported.
Example: Case-dependent processing

This example shows how the parser is directed to different instructions, which are
stored in additional XML files, depending on the determined message type:
<Element>
<data_content>Message</data_content>
<data_content_short>MSG</data_content_short>
<type>link_sel</type>
<link_sel>MTI</link_sel>
<link_case>
<value>1</value>
<link>GbasMsgType1.xml</link>
</link_case>
<link_case>
<value>2</value>
</link_case>
<link_case>
<value>4</value>
</link_case>
</Element>
The additional XML files have the same format and supported elements. They can
branch to even more files, there is no limit to how deeply the files are nested.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 196

Further control elements implement loops which repeat sequences for a number of
repetitions ("for"-loop) or while there is enough data left ("while"-loop).
Control elements can also contain references to previous elements, that is: to results
obtained in previous instruction steps. References are defined using the element's
unique identifier, which is a mandatory part of each element.
Using links and loops, the parser can navigate through the entire bitstream.
Parser results
The result of the interpreted bitstream is a comma-separated list of values which is dis-
played in the "Message" view (see Chapter 6.3.5, "Message View", on page 186).
Recording GBAS data

When you record and export the results of a GBAS measurement, all measured values
and the bitstream for each record are stored as a comma-separated list. This basic
CSV file contains a data link for each record in the list. The link points to a further CSV
file which contains all human-readable texts for that record. All data files for the current
recording are stored in a subdirectory that is exported together with the basic CSV file.
The file with the human-readable text values contains the data that is displayed in the
"Message" view.
Example:
One row of data from the basic CSV file for list number 20 (gbas_rx1_list20.csv):
1,,3,18.09.2018,14:29:57.844,D,108.0000,0.000,-8.15,-4.63,-,7.0,CMJ ,NOK,4,NOK,
0.0e+00,882,-.-,-.-,-.-,20.553,481.0,00° 00.00000000' N,00° 00.00000000' E,0.00,0.00,
--.--.----,--.--.--.---,0,NO GPS,NO GPS,--,--,--,MAN:Norm,0,1 82 30 00 55 05 4B 30 20
3A 94 0F F0 40 60 30 F2 98 C0 C8 40 28 E0 61 47 5D 48 09 7B C9 00 AD D8 33 3C BF 34
07 40 AA 81 34 80 26 00 B2 15 A5 45 26 13 94 08 F0 40 60 30 86 90 A8 04 70 28 E0 3D
83 ED 48 38 C5 E9 00 4B D8 DF 46 40 3C 21 BF 8C 81 B4 80 26 00 EB 05 B2 F5 26 13 D9
7F C0 EA A1 A4 3D 54 89 D8 00 00 ,=HYPERLINK("gbas_rx1_list20/MSG000003_D.csv")
Extract of data file gbas_rx1_list20/MSG000003_D.csv:

Name,Type,bits used,Value,Unit,binary
Power Stabilization,fixed,15,OK,,000000000000000
Sync. and Amb. Resolution,fixed,48,OK,,010001111101111110001100011101100000011110010000
Power stabilization 15 OK 000000000000000
Sync. and ambiguity resolu- 48 OK 0100011111011111100011000111011000

tion 00011110010000
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 197

6.5.3 XML File Format Description
The GBAS/SCAT-I message interpretation files comprise at least the following XML
files:
● Burst.xml: describes the basic structure of a message and is identical for all
messages; This is the basic (root) file for interpretation.
● GbasMsgBlock.xml: describes the LAAS message block; This file is referred to
by Burst.xml and can refer to further XML files.
● GbasMsgType<x>.xml: describes each message type in an individual file; These
files are referred to by Burst.xml and can refer to further XML files.
Figure 6-7: Examples for xml message interpretation files; left: message type 1; right: message types
1 and 4
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 198

The R&S EVSG GBAS/SCAT-I option provides XML files for all currently supported
GBAS/SCAT-I message types, as shown in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3: Provided XML files for GBAS/SCAT-I message types
Message type Description Reference
GBAS-MT1 Pseudo-range corrections – 100 second ICAO AN10 Vol1 / RTCA DO-246
smoothed pseudo-ranges.
GBAS-MT2 GBAS-related data. ICAO AN10 Vol1 / RTCA DO-246
GBAS-MT4 Final approach segment (FAS) data. ICAO AN10 Vol1 / RTCA DO-246
GBAS-MT11 Pseudo-range corrections – 30 second ICAO AN10 Vol1 / RTCA DO-246

smoothed pseudo-ranges.
SCAT-I-MT1 RTCA DO-217
SCAT-I-MT4 RTCA DO-217
Burst.xml
Each GBAS bitstream consists of a number of elements. The first elements are the
same for all bursts:
● Power stabilization (15 bits)
● Synchronicity & ambiguity resolution (48 bits)
● SSID (3 bits)
● Transmission length (17 bits)
● …
This general information is provided in the Burst.xml file, which is the start file for
conversion. The root element in this file is <Gbas>, which means the file starts with
<Gbas> and ends with </Gbas>.
Within the <Gbas> element, a definition for each subelement (<Element>) is provi-
ded.
Example: Element definition in Burst.xml file

<Gbas>
<Element>
<data_content>Power Stabilization</data_content>
<data_content_short>POW_STAB</data_content_short>
<bits>000000000000000</bits>
<type>fixed</type>
</Element>
<Element>
<data_content>Sync. and Amb. Resolution</data_content>
<data_content_short>SYNC_AMB_RES</data_content_short>
<bits>000010011110000001101110001100011111101111100010</bits>
<type>fixed</type>
</Element>
...
</Gbas>
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 199

The format of the individual elements is described in the following sections.
6.5.4 Format Description of Elements
Different types of elements are supported to interpret all existing values in a GBAS
burst. However, the types are generic can be configured to handle other values, as
well.
Each <Element> in the XML file must have the following subelements:
Table 6-4: Mandatory subelements
Name Description
<data_content> Text that describes the content, usually the description from the DO246
document
<data_content_short> A short description or unique keyword used to reference the element.

Select the name carefully - changing the name later can cause errors in
the functionality of other elements
<type> Determines how the parser processes the element
The element type determines how the data is interpreted. Depending on the <type>,
further elements can be mandatory.
6.5.5 Output Elements
● Unsigned Type...................................................................................................... 200

● Signed Type.......................................................................................................... 201
● Longitude Type......................................................................................................202
● Latitude Type.........................................................................................................203
● Id Type.................................................................................................................. 204
● Fixed Type.............................................................................................................204
● Value Type............................................................................................................ 204
● FEC Type.............................................................................................................. 205
● CRC Type..............................................................................................................205
● List Type................................................................................................................206
● Enum Type............................................................................................................207
● Dummy Type......................................................................................................... 208
6.5.5.1 Unsigned Type
Interprets the value in a given number of bits as an unsigned (positive) integer value in
decimal format
Name Description
<bits_used> Static number of bits
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 200

Table 6-6: Optional subelements
Name Description
<resolution> Determines the resolution of the element contents, e.g. a result value.
The value is multiplied with the <resolution> factor to obtain the output
result. Note that the number of decimals of the <resolution> factor also
defines the number of decimals in the result.
(Default: 1)
<unit> Additional unit which is appended to the result
<special> Special text that is provided as a result instead of using the value and
resolution
<value> Actual result value
<name> Provided result text
Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Source Availability Duration</data_content>
<data_content_short>SRC_DUR</data_content_short>
<type>unsigned</type>
<special> <value>254</value> <name>>2540</name> </special>
<special> <value>255</value> <name>not provided</name> </special>
<resolution>10</resolution>
<unit>s</unit>
</Element>
6.5.5.2 Signed Type
Interprets the value in a given number of bits as a signed integer value in decimal for-
mat
Name Description
Name Description
(Default: 1)
resolution
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 201

Name Description
Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Pseudorange Correction (PRC)</data_content>
<data_content_short>PRC</data_content_short>
<type>signed</type>
<resolution>0.01</resolution>
<unit>m</unit>
</Element>
6.5.5.3 Longitude Type
Like a signed value, but output is formatted in <degree>-<minute>-<second> format,

with "E" = East for positive and "W" = West for negative values
Name Description
Name Description
(Default: 1)
resolution
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 202

Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Longitude</data_content>
<data_content_short>Long</data_content_short>
<type>long</type>
</Element>
Longitude 32 W93°25'13.0000'' 11010111111010001000101010110000
6.5.5.4 Latitude Type
Like a signed value, but output is formatted in degree-minute-second format, with "E" =
East for positive and "W" = West for negative values
Name Description
Name Description
(Default: 1)
resolution
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 203

Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Latitude</data_content>
<data_content_short>Lat</data_content_short>
<type>lat</type>
</Element>
Latitude 32 N45°40'32.0000'' 00010011100110100001000100000000
6.5.5.5 Id Type
Decodes the unique airport ID which consists of 4 characters, coded in 24 bits.
Example:
<Element>
<data_content>GBAS ID</data_content>
<data_content_short>GBAS_ID</data_content_short>
<type>id</type>
</Element>
6.5.5.6 Fixed Type
The fixed-type element expects a certain number of bits to have a specific value. If
the incoming bitstream matches, the result value is OK, otherwise it is NOK.
Name Description
<bits> Binary bitstream content made of 0 and 1
Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Reserved and Zero</data_content>
<data_content_short>Zeroes</data_content_short>
<bits>00000</bits>
<type>fixed</type>
</Element>
6.5.5.7 Value Type
Binary data without evaluation. Used to document content when a numerical interpreta-
tion does not make sense.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 204

Name Description
Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Ephemeris CRC LSB</data_content>
<data_content_short>EPH_CRC_LSB</data_content_short>
<type>value</type>
</Element>
6.5.5.8 FEC Type
Binary data without evaluation.

Name Description
Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Ephemeris CRC LSB</data_content>
<data_content_short>EPH_CRC_LSB</data_content_short>
<type>value</type>
</Element>
6.5.5.9 CRC Type
Calculates a checksum and compares it with the given value. Evaluates to OK or NOK.
Name Description
<start> Reference (<data_content_short>) to the element at which the

checksum calculation starts
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 205

Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Message Block CRC</data_content>
<data_content_short>MSG_B_CRC</data_content_short>
<start>MBI</start>
<type>crc</type>
</Element>
Message Block 32 OK 11100000011100100001110100100100

CRC
6.5.5.10 List Type
Converts different integer values to text output

Requires a <list> subelement for each pair of <name> and <value>.
Name Description
<list> Pair of <name> and <value> subelements; Multiple <list> elements

allowed
<value> Result value (integer)

For last entry in list also default; Default applies if no other case does
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 206

Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Message Block Identifier</data_content>
<data_content_short>MBI</data_content_short>
<type>list</type>
<list>
<name>normal</name>
<value>170</value>
</list>
<list>
<name>test</name>
<value>255</value>
</list>
<list>
<name>invalid MBI</name>
<value>default</value>
</list>
</Element>
6.5.5.11 Enum Type
Converts each different result value to an output text. Requires an <enum> subelement
for each possible result value. If there are undefined values, use the list type.
Name Description
<enum> Texts to be output for specific number values; Multiple <enum> elements
allowed and required
The number of <enum> subelements must equal the number of possible
results for the number of <bits_used>.
Number values are implicitly defined as the order number of the <enum>
subelement and start at 0.
Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Ground Station Accuracy Designator</data_content>
<data_content_short>GStAccDes</data_content_short>
<type>enum</type>
<enum> <name>A</name> </enum>
<enum> <name>B</name> </enum>
<enum> <name>C</name> </enum>
<enum> <name>spare</name></enum>
</Element>
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 207

6.5.5.12 Dummy Type
No evaluation, but the binary content is documented, and the parser continues with the
next element.
Can be used when there are unknown contents whose length is known.
Name Description
<Length> Previous element (<data_content_short>) that contains the length

of the unknown elements in bit.
<Start> Previous element (<data_content_short>) after which the length

count starts
Example:
Example for a dummy that reads additional MT2 block without further definition.
<Element>
<data_content>Unknown Additional Block</data_content>
<data_content_short>UnBlk</data_content_short>
<type>dummy</type>
<Length>AddBlkLen</Length>
<Start>AddBlkLen</Start>
</Element>
6.5.6 Control Elements
● Link_sel Type........................................................................................................ 208

● Loop Type..............................................................................................................211
● While Type.............................................................................................................211
6.5.6.1 Link_sel Type
Depending on the result of the selected element, processing continues with the speci-
fied element or subprocess.
Requires a <link_sel> and one or more <link_case> subelements.
Name Description
<link_sel> Reference (<data_content_short>) to a previous element whose

value determines further processing;
If no <link_sel> subelement is provided and only one <link_case>
subelement, processing always continues with the referenced element.
<link_case> Possible case of further processing
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 208

Name Description
<value> Integer value or default

If the value of the <link_sel> subelement corresponds to this value,
processing continues with this <link_case>.
Default applies if no other case does
<link> | Reference to the element (<data_content_short>) or a file with

<sub> which processing continues
Subprocess containing further elements to be processed
Example: Link selector with files and a default value

<Element>
<data_content>Message</data_content>
<data_content_short>MSG</data_content_short>
<link_sel>MTI</link_sel>
<link_case><value>1</value><link>GbasMsgType1.xml</link></link_case>
<link_case><value>default</value><link>GbasMsgTypeX.xml</link></link_case>
</Element>
Example: Link selector with a direct link

With only one link and no decisive value, processing continues with the given file.
<Element>
<data_content>Message Block Header</data_content>
<data_content_short>MB_HEAD</data_content_short>
<link_case>
<link>GbasMsgBlock.xml</link>
</link_case>
</Element>
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 209

Example: Link selector with subdefinitions

<Element>
<data_content>Additional Data Block</data_content>
<data_content_short>AddBlk</data_content_short>
<link_sel>AddBlkNum</link_sel>
<link_case>
<value>2</value>
<sub>
<Element>
<data_content>Channel Number</data_content>
<data_content_short>ChNum</data_content_short>
</Element>
<Element>
<data_content>Delta Latitude</data_content>
<data_content_short>DLat</data_content_short>
<type>signed</type>
<unit>°</unit>
</Element>
…
</link_case>
<link_case>
<value>3</value>
<sub>
<Element>
<data_content>K md e D GPS</data_content>
<data_content_short>KmdeDGps</data_content_short>
<unit></unit>
</Element>
<Element>
<data_content>K md e D GLONASS</data_content>
<data_content_short>KmdeDGlo</data_content_short>
<unit></unit>
</Element>
…
</link_case>
</Element>
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 210

6.5.6.2 Loop Type
Repeats the included elements for a given number of times;

Name Description
<NUM> Only for type loop:

Reference to the element (<data_content_short>) whose value
determines the number of processing repetitions
<loop> Only for type loop:

Subprocess containing further elements to be processed within a loop
Example:
Abbreviated example for a loop over the MT1-satellites:
<Element>
<data_content>Measurement Block</data_content>
<data_content_short>MSG_BLK</data_content_short>
<type>loop</type>
<NUM>NOF_M</NUM>
<Loop>
<Element>
<data_content>Ranging Source ID</data_content>
<data_content_short>Z_COUNT</data_content_short>
<resolution>1</resolution>
</Element>
<Element>
<data_content>Issue of Data (IOD)</data_content>
... </Element>
</Loop>
</Element>
6.5.6.3 While Type
Repeats the included elements while there are enough bits left to proceed;
Name Description
<BitsLeft> Number of bits required at the end of the loop to perform the next cycle
(minimum+1 required); otherwise loop is finished
<TrLen> Previous element that contains the transmission length in bit. Sometimes
the transmission length is provided in bytes; in this case, make sure the
resolution of that previous element is set to 8 to convert its value to bits
<TrStart> Previous element at which the transmission length begins to count bits
<loop> Subprocess containing further elements to be processed within a loop
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 211

Example:
Example of a "while" loop that repeats the message block as long as there are more
than 48 bits left:
<Element>
<data_content>Message Block</data_content>
<data_content_short>MSG_BLOCK</data_content_short>
<type>while</type>
<BitsLeft>48</BitsLeft>
<TrLen>TRANS_L</TrLen>
<TrStart>MSG_BLOCK</TrStart>
<Loop>
<Element>
<data_content>Message Block Header</data_content>
<data_content_short>MB_HEAD</data_content_short>
<link_case>
<link>GbasMsgBlock.xml</link>
</link_case>
</Element>
</Loop>
</Element>
6.5.7 Auxiliary Elements
● Fill Type.................................................................................................................212
6.5.7.1 Fill Type
Used for the transmission end. It determines the number of bits that are left in the data
stream. This number is usually 0. Otherwise the <fill> element indicates how many
bits are still available at the end of the transmission.
Example:
<Element>
<data_content>Fill Bits</data_content>
<data_content_short>FILL_BITS</data_content_short>
<type>fill</type>
</Element>
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 212

R&S®EVSG1000 Power Sensor Support (Option R&S EVSG-K24)
7 Power Sensor Support (Option R&S EVSG-

K24)
In power-sensor mode you can select terminating sensors (R&S NRPxx) of the
Rohde & Schwarz sensor family R&S NRP.
● R&S NRP-Zxx
(xx = 11, 21, 22, 23, 24, 27, 28, 31, 32, 37, 41, 51, 52, 55, 56, 57, 58, 61, 71, 81,
85, 86, 91, 92, 96, 98, 211, 221)
● R&S NRP-Cxx
(xx = 18, 33, 40, 50)
● R&S NRP-Cxx B1
(xx = 18, 33, 40, 50)
● R&S NRP-xxS
(xx = 8, 18, 33)
● R&S NRP-xxS10
(xx = 18)
● R&S NRP-xxS20
(xx = 18)
● R&S NRP-xxS25
(xx = 18)
● R&S NRP-xxSN
(xx = 8, 18, 33)
● R&S NRP-xxSN10
(xx = 18)
● R&S NRP-xxSN20
(xx = 18)
● R&S NRP-xxSN25
(xx = 18)
● R&S NRP-xxA
(xx = 18)
● R&S NRP-xxAN
(xx = 18)
● R&S NRP-xxT
(xx = 18, 33, 40, 50, 67, 110)
● R&S NRP-xxTN
(xx = 18, 33, 40, 50, 67)
● R&S NRP-xxW
(xx = 18)
● R&S NRP-xxWN
(xx = 18)
Sensors are connected to the USB port of the R&S EVSG1000 and the used frequency
is the frequency of the active RX-board.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 213

R&S®EVSG1000 Power Sensor Support (Option R&S EVSG-K24)
The display shows the average level and the sensor type.
Figure 7-1: R&S NRP - Average Power
Remote commands:
GETNRPTYPE on page 248
GETNRPPOW on page 248
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 214

R&S®EVSG1000 Data Management
Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings (Preset)
8 Data Management
The R&S EVSG1000 allows you to store and load measurement settings, and export
measurement data for analysis later. Finally, you can store the measurement results
displayed on the screen.
● Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings (Preset)......................................... 215
● Recording Measurement Data.............................................................................. 217
● Creating and Storing Screenshots........................................................................ 223
8.1 Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings (Preset)

Possibly you would like to restore or repeat a measurement you performed under spe-
cific conditions on the R&S EVSG1000. Or you would like to troubleshoot a measure-
ment and require a defined instrument state to detect the precise cause of the error. In
these cases, you can store and recall instrument and measurement settings. Up to 20
different settings, referred to as UserPresets can be stored and recalled on the instru-
ment.
Settings stored in a UserPreset

In each UserPreset, the following current settings are stored:
● All measurement settings (see Chapter 2, "Measurements and Results",
on page 48)
● All general instrument settings except for the network settings (see Chapter 9,
"Common Instrument Settings", on page 226)
● Date and time of storage
The list of UserPresets and the corresponding functions are available in the [Preset]
softkey menu.
● Storage and Recall Functions............................................................................... 215
8.1.1 Storage and Recall Functions
Access: [Preset]
VNC access: [y]
For each stored UserPreset, the storage date and time are indicated in the "Preset"
window. Empty UserPresets are indicated as "not used".
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 215

Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings (Preset)
Use the arrow keys to scroll through the UserPresets.
While the Preset view is displayed, audio and displays settings are not available.
Return to a measurement view first ([a]).
Preset..........................................................................................................................216
└ Factory Preset...............................................................................................217
Save............................................................................................................................ 217
Save to USB................................................................................................................217
Recall.......................................................................................................................... 217
Recall from USB..........................................................................................................217
Delete..........................................................................................................................217
Rename.......................................................................................................................217
Preset
Access: [Preset] > "Preset"
When delivered, the R&S EVSG1000 has a default configuration. You can restore this
defined initial state at any time as a known starting point for measurements. Presetting
is often recommendable as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual measurement
results arise.
Two different preset functions are available, the "simple" preset and the "Factory Pre-
set".
The "simple" preset function retains the instrument's IP address and host name, and all
stored data.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 216

Recording Measurement Data
Factory Preset ← Preset

Access: [Preset] > "Factory Preset"
VNC access: [y]
The default configuration is restored, except for the instrument's IP address and host
name. All stored data is deleted!
Remote command:
FACTORY_PRESET on page 267
Save
Stores the current measurement settings in the selected UserPreset under the speci-
fied name, together with the current date and time.
If the selected UserPreset already contained settings before, they are overwritten.
Save to USB
Stores the current measurement settings under the specified name on a connected
USB storage device, together with the current date and time.
The default name is User_Preset_<no.>.evsgpreset, where <no.> is a consec-
utive number. The file name can be edited. The files are stored to the subdirectory
EVSG1000_PRESETS.
Recall
Overwrites the current measurement settings by the settings stored in the selected
UserPreset.
Recall from USB

Overwrites the current measurement settings by the settings stored in the selected
UserPreset on a connected USB storage device.
Delete
Deletes the settings and the name assigned to the selected UserPreset.
Rename
Renames the selected UserPreset.
8.2 Recording Measurement Data

During a measurement with the R&S EVSG1000, the input signal is captured and vari-
ous results are calculated and displayed on the screen (see Chapter 2, "Measurements
and Results", on page 48). These results can also be stored in data lists, which can be
exported as .csv files for further investigation.
Recording measurement data requires the R&S EVSG-K21 option.
Data is stored continuously for all measurements that are performed after recording is
started and until it is stopped. The data for each recording session is stored to a file
internally. The file name is defined by the following syntax:
<measmode>_<rx_board>_list<no.>.csv
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 217

Where:
● <measmode>: the used measurement mode
● <rx_board>: the used receiver board (rx1, rx2)
● list<no.>: the used data list
● GPS Data Synchronization................................................................................... 218
● I/Q Data Recording and Streaming (R&S EVSG1-K25)........................................218
● Recording Settings................................................................................................219
● Activating Data Recording.....................................................................................221
● Viewing Recorded Data........................................................................................ 223
● Analyzing Recorded I/Q Data................................................................................223
8.2.1 GPS Data Synchronization
Together with the measurement results, the GPS data at the time of signal input is also
stored, if available (see Chapter 9.7, "GPS Configuration", on page 240). Storing GPS
data is useful to synchronize specific measurement results with the precise time and
location of the input signal. However, signal transmission via the RS232 serial connec-
tion can cause delays in the stored GPS time as opposed to the actual time of input.
Therefore, it is useful to synchronize the stored GPS data to the PPS signal also provi-
ded by the GPS receiver.
8.2.2 I/Q Data Recording and Streaming (R&S EVSG1-K25)
Optionally, the raw, unprocessed I/Q data can also be stored with the data recording. In
this case, the I/Q data is stored as a separate file with the same file name as the data
list, but the extension .iq. This feature requires the R&S EVSG1-K25 option.
I/Q data is stored with a sample rate of 125000 samples per second. I and Q values
are stored with 32 bit each, in little endian and signed integer format. The I/Q data level
is aligned to the RF input signal of the R&S EVSG1000. That is: 0 dBm correspond to
a magnitude value of 0x10000000 (hexadecimal). Each sample requires 8 bytes of
storage, which adds up to 1 MB per second. The I/Q data files can become very large.
After 33 minutes, they exceed 2 GB, meaning they can no longer be stored on a FAT-
formatted USB storage device. In this case, you require a storage device with a linux
file system, e.g. ext4. Also consider the limitations of the internal storage device. When
using two RX boards simultaneously, the storage is filled up twice as quickly.
I/Q data can also be streamed during the measurement using the LAN interface of the
R&S EVSG1000 (TCP port 8001 (RX1) or 8002 (RX2)). Simply connect a TCP/IP client
to the port and the data is streamed immediately. The format is the same as for record-
ing.
Example:
netcat 172.23.226.22 8001 > File1.iq
Starts streaming I/Q data from the RX1 input to a file named File1.iq.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 218

You can use the I/Q data to analyze the signal in external software, for example, or to
reproduce the signal on a signal generator.
8.2.3 Recording Settings
Access: "Config" >"Rec Config"

Access VNC: [s] > [F7]
(For numeric measurement modes only)

In GBAS/SCAT-I mode, one record is stored for each slot, in a time interval of 62.5 ms,
as long as recording is active. Triggering is not supported. Recording is continued even
if the display update is temporarily stopped (by the "Pause" function).
Start and stop recording from any measurement view using the [Record] key.
Record the selected and currently displayed slot or frame only using the [Single] key.
The record contains measurement values and the message bitstream for the slot. All
records are stored in a CSV file. This basic CSV file contains a data link for each
record in the list. The link points to a further CSV file which contains all human-reada-
ble texts for that record. All data files for the current recording are stored in a subdirec-
tory that is exported together with the basic CSV file.
See also "Recording GBAS data" on page 197.
List...............................................................................................................................219
Clear List..................................................................................................................... 219
Time............................................................................................................................ 220
Data selection (Sel, not GBAS/SCAT-I mode).............................................................220
Data selection (Select, GBAS/SCAT-I mode only)...................................................... 220
└ Parameter..................................................................................................... 220
└ Msg Log........................................................................................................ 220
└ Graph Log..................................................................................................... 221
└ Slot <x> Log..................................................................................................221
Export List to USB.......................................................................................................221
Clear All Lists.............................................................................................................. 221
Rec IQ......................................................................................................................... 221
List
Selects a specific data set list (1 to 999, the list number is shown in the softkey).
Remote command:
SETACTIVELIST on page 377
GETACTIVELIST on page 374
Clear List
Deletes all entries in the current list.
Remote command:
CLEARACTIVELIST on page 373
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 219

Time
Specifies how often an entry is appended to the data list. Enter the time in millisec-
onds.
Note that the minimum spacing between two values is defined by the availability of
measurement result values (see Chapter 4.1.4.6, "Setting the Measurement Time
(MTime)", on page 86). If more values are available than are stored, that is: "Time" >
Setting the Measurement Time (MTime), the calculated values are averaged to obtain
only the required number of results.
as long as recording is active. The time interval cannot be edited.
Data selection (Sel, not GBAS/SCAT-I mode)

By default, the whole data set is recorded. You can configure the scope of the data to
be displayed and exported. For details on the individual data sets, see the remote com-
mand (SELECTLISTPARAM on page 376).
"All" Includes all EVSG1000 and R&S EVS300 values.
"Full" Compatible to R&S EVS300.
"Medium" A reduced set of values
"Short" A minimum set of values
Remote command:
SELECTLISTPARAM on page 376
Data selection (Select, GBAS/SCAT-I mode only)

By default, the whole data set for every slot is recorded. You can configure the scope
of the data to be displayed and exported. For details on the individual data sets, see
the remote command (GBAS:GETMEAS on page 339).
Parameter ← Data selection (Select, GBAS/SCAT-I mode only)

Defines which parameters are stored for each slot.
"All" Includes all EVSG1000 and R&S EVS300 values
"Full" Compatible to R&S EVS300
"Medium" A reduced set of values
"Short" A minimum set of values
"Raw" Only the decoded, non-interpreted measurement values from the bit-
stream in binary format
Remote command:
GBAS:GETMEAS on page 339
Msg Log ← Data selection (Select, GBAS/SCAT-I mode only)

Defines which message information is stored for each slot.
"All" All message data (human-readable + bitstream) is stored (default).
"TXT" Only the human-readable, interpreted message values are stored.
"RAW HEX" Only the decoded, non-interpreted message data from the bitstream
in binary format is stored.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 220

"None" Message data is not included in the slot data record.

Remote command:
GBAS:MSG_TOLOGG on page 341
Graph Log ← Data selection (Select, GBAS/SCAT-I mode only)

Defines whether graphical information such as the time domain and constellation val-
ues are stored.
Remote command:
GBAS:GRAPH_TOLOGG on page 341
Slot <x> Log ← Data selection (Select, GBAS/SCAT-I mode only)

Activates or deactivates data recording for the corresponding slot.
To toggle between the slots A to D and slots E to H in the menu, press the "More soft-
keys" key.
Export List to USB

Exports the data list to a connected USB storage device.
Remote command:
SAVEACTIVELIST2USB on page 376
Clear All Lists

Deletes all entries in all data lists.
Remote command:
CLEARALLLISTS on page 375
Rec IQ
If enabled, the raw, unprocessed I/Q data is also recorded. This feature requires the
R&S EVSG1-K25 option.
I/Q data is stored as a separate file with the same file name as the data list, but the
extension .iq. Furthermore, the data list contains two additional entries:
"IQSamples": indicates how many samples the data set includes; depending on the
measurement time this number can vary.
"IQPosition": indicates the starting position of the data set within the I/Q data file
Remote command:
RECIQ on page 375
8.2.4 Activating Data Recording
By default, data is recorded in a specific time interval (see "Time" on page 220) as long
as recording is active. Alternatively, you can use an external trigger, if available, to
determine when data is stored. For example, you can store data at regular distances
during a moving measurement, based on a rotary position transducer.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 221


as long as recording is active. Triggering is not supported. Recording is continued even
if the display update is temporarily stopped (by the "Pause" function).
Starting and Stopping Recording................................................................................ 222

Trigger Source.............................................................................................................222
Trigger Edge................................................................................................................222
Recording a single data record (GBAS/SCAT-I mode only)........................................ 222
Starting and Stopping Recording

Access: [Record]
Access VNC: [p]
When you press the key, data is recorded to the selected list, indicated in the status
bar ("Rec List"). The number of data sets that the list currently contains is indicated as
"Size". How often and when a new data set is entered in the list depends on the "Trig-
ger Source" on page 222.
If enabled, raw, unprocessed I/Q data is also recorded to a separate file (see "Rec IQ"
on page 221).
Trigger Source
Access: [Trigger] > "Source"
Access VNC: [k] > "F2"
Determines how often and when a new data set is entered in the list during recording.
"Time" Data is stored in regular time intervals, defined by "Time"
on page 220.
"Ext." Data is stored each time a trigger signal from a connected external
trigger device is received. The trigger device must be connected to
the "Trigger In" connector on the rear panel of the R&S EVSG1000.
Trigger Edge
Access: [Trigger] > "Trig Edge"
Access VNC: [k] > "F5"
For external triggering, this setting defines whether data is stored when the positive
(rising) or negative (falling) edge of the trigger signal is received. Select the key repeat-
edly to toggle between the two settings.
Recording a single data record (GBAS/SCAT-I mode only)

Access: [Single]
Records the selected and currently displayed slot or frame only.
This function is only available for GBAS/SCAT-I mode (R&S EVSG1000-K4/-K5).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 222

Creating and Storing Screenshots
8.2.5 Viewing Recorded Data
The "Recording" view displays the recorded data for the current measurement mode
from the selected data file (see "List" on page 219).
The following functions are available in the "Recording" view for all modes.
DL Line
Selects a particular line (record) in the data recording file.
8.2.6 Analyzing Recorded I/Q Data
Optionally, raw, unprocessed I/Q data is recorded to a separate file during recording
(see "Rec IQ" on page 221).
Additional information on the I/Q data is stored in the CSV data list, indicating where in
the .iq file the I/Q data for a specific data set starts and how many samples it con-
tains. You can use this information to synchronize the raw I/Q data with the evaluated
measurement data for each data set.
You can also use the stored I/Q data to reproduce the measured signal on a signal
generator. Using the R&S ARB Toolbox, for example, you can convert the .iq data file
to a .wv file.
To convert the .iq data file to a .wv file

1. In the R&S ARB Toolbox, right-click the .iq data file.
2. Select "Convert" > "Convert from Data".
3. Select the following settings for the data format:

● "File Type": "Binary"
● "Data format": "Integer"
● "Endianness": "Little-Endian (x86)"
● "Precision": "32 Bit"
● "Signedness": "Signed (Two's Complement)"
4. Define the clock rate as 125 kHz.
8.3 Creating and Storing Screenshots

Access: [Setup] > "Screenshots"
You can create a screenshot of the current display on the R&S EVSG1000 at any time
during operation. Creating screenshots is useful to document measurement results, for
example.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 223

Creating a Screenshot................................................................................................ 224

Number of Screenshots.............................................................................................. 224
Storage of screenshots on.......................................................................................... 224
Colors for copying to USB...........................................................................................225
Exporting Screenshots to a USB device..................................................................... 225
Deleting all Screenshots Stored on the R&S EVSG1000........................................... 225
Creating a Screenshot
Access: [Screenshot]
Access VNC: [x]
When you create a screenshot, the display is stored as a graphic file on the instrument
(until it is explicitly deleted). It can be copied to a USB memory device later (see
Exporting Screenshots to a USB device). Internally, the screenshot files are named
"Screenshot_", followed by a consecutive number.
If a USB device is connected to the R&S EVSG1000 when the screenshot is created,
the screenshot is stored there directly as a .PNG file. A dialog box with the default file
name is displayed. To change the name of the file on the USB device, click in the name
field and overwrite the default name. Note, however, that the file is also stored inter-
nally, and the file name remains unchanged. Thus, if you export all screenshots to a
USB device later, the same screenshot is stored with the internal name again.
The Number of Screenshots indicated in the "Setup - Screenshots" window is
increased after each new screenshot.
Number of Screenshots
Indicates the number of screenshots currently stored on the instrument.
Storage of screenshots on
Specifies the location of the screenshots to be saved.
"Internal mem" The screenshots are stored in the internal memory (default setting).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 224

"Internal + The screenshots are stored in the internal memory and on a connec-
USB" ted USB device.
"USBstick" The screenshots are stored directly on a connected USB device.
Colors for copying to USB

If the screenshots are stored to a USB device, you can specify the colors used for the
screenshot.
"Normal" The screenshot is stored as shown on the screen.
"Converted" The screenshot is stored with inverted colors, that is: black text on a
white background for better legibility on paper.
"Norm + Con- Default: two screenshots are stored, one as shown on the screen,
vert" one with inverted colors.
Exporting Screenshots to a USB device

All internally stored screenshots on the R&S EVSG1000 are stored as .PNG files in the
main directory of the connected USB device. The file name is defined by the following
syntax:
EVSx_<date>_<time>[_converted].png
where the _converted suffix is only applied to screenshots with inverted colors.
Deleting all Screenshots Stored on the R&S EVSG1000

All screenshots stored on the R&S EVSG1000 are deleted irrevocably.
Once the screenshots have been stored to an external memory device, you can delete
them from the instrument. Otherwise you copy them again each time you create new
screenshots and want to store them to a USB device.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 225

R&S®EVSG1000 Common Instrument Settings
Audio Output Settings
9 Common Instrument Settings

Common instrument settings are applied regardless of which measurement mode is
selected.
Configuring screenshots is described in Chapter 8, "Data Management", on page 215.

Configuring the signal input is described in Chapter 3.1, "Input Signal Settings",
on page 51.
9.1 Audio Output Settings

Access: [Audio]
Access VNC: [c]
(Not in "Preset" view.)
Audio output is available at the loudspeaker on the rear panel or the headphones con-
nector on the front panel of the R&S EVSG1000.
For example, the demodulated identifier in ILS mode is output as a 1020 Hz morse sig-
nal.
AF Volume...................................................................................................................226
Squelch....................................................................................................................... 226
Demod.........................................................................................................................227
Audio BW.................................................................................................................... 227
Speaker.......................................................................................................................227
KB Beep...................................................................................................................... 227
AF Volume
Defines the volume of the AF output at the at the loudspeaker or the headphones con-
nector. Enter a percentage value (0 % to 100 %).
Remote command:
SETUP:VOLUME on page 257
Squelch
Defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0. This is use-
ful, for example, to avoid demodulation noise during transmission breaks.
This setting is only relevant for numeric measurement modes.
The squelch level is an absolute value.
The current squelch level is indicated numerically on the softkey and graphically on the
bargraph indicator.
Remote command:
SQUELCH on page 258
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 226

Display
Demod
Selects between AM / FM modulation for receiver signals.
Audio BW
Frequency range to be output to the speaker or headphones.
"Full" Full bandwidth is output
"Voice (def)" Voice frequencies (> 3 kHz) filtered out
"ID Notch" ID frequency (1020 Hz) filtered out
"V/ID Notch" Voice and ID frequencies filtered out
Remote command:
SETUP:AUDIOBW on page 255
Speaker
Enables or disables AF output at the loudspeaker on the rear panel of the
R&S EVSG1000.
Remote command:
SETUP:SPEAKER on page 257
KB Beep
Enables or disables a tone when a key on the keyboard is pressed. This is useful as
feedback during operation in a noisy environment.
9.2 Display
Access: [Display]
Access VNC: [v]
(Not in "Preset" view.)
Some general settings are available for the display on the R&S EVSG1000. In particu-
lar, you can configure the display brightness depending on the used power source.
RX Unit 1 / RX Unit 2.................................................................................................. 227
Level View...................................................................................................................228
Zoom........................................................................................................................... 228
Brightness Mains.........................................................................................................228
Brightness Battery.......................................................................................................229
RX Unit 1 / RX Unit 2
Select the receiver board whose settings and results are displayed. The currently
selected receiver board is indicated by a vertical blue line on the softkey.
This setting is only available if a second receiver board is installed (requires the
R&S EVSG-B1 option, see Chapter 3.2, "Receiver Board", on page 52).
While two different measurements can be performed simultaneously using two receiver
boards, the results can only be displayed for one board at a time. Use this function to
toggle between the two measurements.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 227

Display
Remote command:
CH on page 248
Level View
Configure the display of power levels.
"Digits" The level value is displayed numerically, as digits.
"Bargraph" The level value is displayed graphically, as a bargraph.
Remote command:
SETUP:UNIT:BARGRAPH on page 251
Zoom
This command is available in LOC, GS, VOR and COM modes.
If enabled, the most important measurement parameters are displayed enlarged for
better readability.
Brightness Mains
Defines the brightness of the display if an external power supply is used (as opposed
to "Brightness Battery" on page 229).
Enter a percentage value (0 % to 100 %). The default value is 50 %.
Remote command:
DISPLAY_BRIGHTNESS_MAINS on page 266
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 228

Demodulation Output Settings
Brightness Battery
Defines the brightness of the display if the power is supplied by a battery. This is useful
to save energy when the available power is limited.
Enter a percentage value (0 % to 100 %). The default value is 50 %.
Remote command:
DISPLAY_BRIGHTNESS_BATTERY on page 266
9.3 Demodulation Output Settings

Access: [Setup] > "Demod Out"
After demodulation of the signal, the signal data is available in the baseband (BB). The
R&S EVSG1000 provides this baseband signal at the Demod Out connector of the
instrument. Thus, you can analyze the data with other connected devices, for example
an oscilloscope.
Demod. Out Source.................................................................................................... 229

Demod Out Coupling...................................................................................................229
Demod Out AGC......................................................................................................... 230
Demod. Out Source

Specifies the source of the output signal.
"RX 1 BB Out | Output provided by the BB Out connector on receiver board "RX1" or
RX 2 BB Out" "RX 2".
"Off" No output signal is provided.
Remote command:
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT on page 256
Demod Out Coupling

Determines the coupling mode for demodulation output.
"AC" The DC component of the AF signal is not output.
"DC" The DC component of the AF signal is also output.
Remote command:
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_COUPLING on page 247
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 229

Network (Remote) Settings
Demod Out AGC

Determines whether the level for demodulation output is automatically corrected using
the automatic gain control (AGC).
Remote command:
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_AGC on page 246
9.4 Network (Remote) Settings

Access: [Setup] > "Remote"
The following settings are required to operate the R&S EVSG1000 in a network, for
example from a controller PC.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 230

Network (Remote) Settings
TCP/IP DHCP............................................................................................................. 231

TCP/IP Address.......................................................................................................... 231
TCP/IP Netmask......................................................................................................... 231
TCP/IP Gateway......................................................................................................... 231
Hostname....................................................................................................................232
VNC Password............................................................................................................232
Used IP Address......................................................................................................... 232
Used IP Netmask........................................................................................................ 232
Used IP Gateway........................................................................................................ 232
TCP/IP DHCP
If the network supports dynamic TCP/IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Configu-
ration Protocol (DHCP), all address information can be assigned automatically. In this
case, the TCP/IP parameters are not editable. The currently used settings are indica-
ted as Used IP Address, Used IP Netmask, Used IP Gateway.
If the network does not support DHCP, the addresses must be set manually.
By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and
obtain all address information automatically. This means that it is safe to establish a
physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.
To toggle this setting via the remote keyboard, press the [Tab] key.
Note: When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address may be assigned each time the
instrument is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument itself.
Thus, when using a DHCP server, it is recommended that you use the permanent
instrument name, which determines the address via the DNS server (see "Hostname"
on page 232).
TCP/IP Address
Unique address of the instrument in the network. The currently assigned IP address
and submask are indicated next to the setting.
The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains
values between 0 and 255.
To change the IP address via the remote keyboard, press the [INS] key and enter the
new address.
Example:
172.17.40.139
TCP/IP Netmask
The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block con-
tains values between 0 and 255.
Example:
255.255.255.0
TCP/IP Gateway
The gateway consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains
values between 0 and 255.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 231

System Settings
Example:
192.168.1.1
This setting is only required if the R&S EVSG1000 is installed in a network and the
instrument needs to communicate with other connected devices. For simple 1:1 con-
nections between the instrument and control PC, the setting is irrelevant.
Hostname
Unique instrument name in the network, as an alternative to the unique IP address.
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned instrument name, but this name can be
changed.
The default instrument name is a non-case-sensitive string with the following syntax:
<Type><variant>-<serial_number>
For example, EVSG1000-123456.
For information on determining the serial number, see Chapter 1.5.2.10, "Device ID",
on page 35.
Use the keypad to enter the name, see Table 1-6.
Remote command:
GETHOSTNAME on page 270
VNC Password
Enables or disables the requirement of a passwort to access the instrument remotely
via VNC.
After enabling the use of a password, you must reboot the R&S EVSG1000 before it
becomes active.
The password for VNC access is instrument. It cannot be changed.
Used IP Address
If "DHCP" is activated, the assigned IP address is displayed.
Used IP Netmask
If "DHCP" is activated, the assigned netmask is displayed.
Used IP Gateway
If "DHCP" is activated, the assigned gateway address is displayed.
9.5 System Settings

Access: [Setup] > "System"
The following settings configure the general instrument system.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 232

System Settings
Date.............................................................................................................................233
Time............................................................................................................................ 233
Energy Saver.............................................................................................................. 233
Boot on Power Up....................................................................................................... 234
Flash size / Flash used............................................................................................... 234
Date
Sets the date of the internal clock in the format dd.mm.yyyy.
Example:
10.05.2017
Remote command:
SETUP:DATE on page 268
Time
Sets the time of the internal clock in the format hh.mm.ss.
Example:
12.08.23
Remote command:
SETUP:TIME on page 268
Energy Saver
Switches the energy saver setting ON and OFF. If the energy saver setting is activated,
the display is switched off when the specified time elapses. Data is still connected, only
the backlight is turned off.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 233

Instrument Configuration and Operating Status Settings
To turn the backlight back on, press [Enter].

The timer can be set from one minute to 60 minutes.
Remote command:
SETUP:ENERGYSAVER on page 267
Boot on Power Up
Automatically switches on the R&S EVSG1000 when it is connected to an external
power supply (if not in operation already).
Remote command:
SETUP:BOOTONPOWERUP on page 267
Flash size / Flash used

Indicates the size of the flash memory in the R&S EVSG1000, and the percentage cur-
rently in use.
9.6 Instrument Configuration and Operating Status Set-

tings
The following settings concern the instrument operating status, and hardware and soft-
ware configuration.
Auto-Calibration (Cal)..................................................................................................234
Error Log..................................................................................................................... 235
└ Copy to USB................................................................................................. 236
└ Delete all error messages............................................................................. 236
HW Status................................................................................................................... 236
Installed Options......................................................................................................... 237
Inventory..................................................................................................................... 238
└ SW Update....................................................................................................239
Power supply and battery charge state.......................................................................239
Auto-Calibration (Cal)
Access: [Setup] > "Cal"
Access VNC: [n] > [F8] > [F1]
Auto-calibration corrects changes in the attenuation characteristics of the internal RF
signal paths (on both receiver boards, if available) using an internal calibration signal.
These changes can occur due to the aging process or temperature drifts. The calibra-
tion optimizes the accuracy of the level measurements.
The "Setup - CAL" display shows the status for each calibration step for the most
recent calibration. The first line of the result table indicates the date and time of the
auto-calibration, and the temperature during the auto-calibration.
Note: Before starting the auto-calibration, the instrument should be in operation for at
least 15 minutes to ensure the instrument has reached its operating temperature (for
details, refer to the data sheet).
During the auto-calibration procedure, do not apply any input signal to the
R&S EVSG1000.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 234

To start the auto-calibration, select "Start Autocal " and press the [Enter] key.
The auto-calibration procedure is ready after a few minutes and in the result table, all
entries must have the status "OK".
Figure 9-1: Successful auto-calibration
If an error occurs during the auto-calibration process, switch the instrument off and on
again and repeat the auto-calibration process. If the error still exists, contact the
Rohde & Schwarz service.
It is recommended that you perfom an auto-calibration every 2 months or if the differ-
ence of the environment temperature changes by more than 10 °C.
Remote command:
AUTOKALSTATUS on page 269
KALSCREEN on page 269
STARTKAL on page 269
GETKALSTATUS on page 269
Error Log
Access: [Setup] > "Error Log"
The last 100 instrument status messages or errors displayed in the status bar during
operation of the R&S EVSG1000 are also stored in an error log file on the instrument.
Thus, if problems occur, you can check the error log for irregular behavior or failures.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 235

Remote command:
GETERRORLOG on page 259
Copy to USB ← Error Log

Copies all entries in the error log to a text file on a connected USB device. The default
file name is EVSx_errorlog_<datetime>.txt.
This file is useful if problems occur and you need support. Send the copied error file to
the Rohde & Schwarz support center for troubleshooting.
Delete all error messages ← Error Log

Deletes all entries in the error log irrevocably.
Remote command:
CLEARERRORLOG on page 259
HW Status
Access: [Setup] > "HW Status"
The hardware status overview provides information on the current operating status of
the individual hardware components in the R&S EVSG1000 (individually for RX1 and
RX2 boards), such as test voltages and temperatures.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 236

The test voltages are measured continuously, internally, and checked against defined
limit values. If one of the test voltages exceeds the tolerance for more than 10 s, the
following measures are taken by the R&S EVSG1000:
● An error message is created in the error log (see "Error Log" on page 235).
● The measured test voltage is indicated in red.
● "UNCAL" is displayed in the measurement window to indicate the measured values
may be invalid.
Remote command:
BI? on page 259
GETTEMP on page 259
Installed Options
Displays a table with the currently installed option keys.
For all purchased R&S EVSG1000 options, a license key is provided by
Rohde & Schwarz.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 237

To activate a new option key, select "Activate new..." and enter the number of the
license key.
Alternatively, select "Install license.xml" to install a license from the main directory of a
connected USB device.
The following information is displayed in the Options table:
"Designation" Specifies the name of the the license key.
"License Type" The license type can be permanent or limited to a temporary duration.
"Validity" For temporary licenses, the validity is indicated. If the expiry date has
passed, the license becomes invalid.
Additional information on the selected option is displayed below the table.
Remote command:
GETOPTIONS on page 259
Inventory
The hardware and software inventory list provides information on the hardware version
of the instrument (integrated modules, options etc.) and on the currently installed soft-
ware versions. Additionally installed software options are provided in the Installed
Options list.
For each piece of hardware, the identification number, serial number and revision is
provided in the inventory list. For each software item, the installed version number is
provided.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 238

Remote command:
INV? on page 260
VER? on page 260
SW Update ← Inventory
Updates the R&S EVSG1000 software using an update file on a connected USB
device.
The R&S EVSG1000 automatically searches the USB device for new software. The
update file has the extension .evs and must be located in the main directory of the
USB device. The search may take a few seconds.
When the software has been found, press the [ENTER] key to confirm the message to
install the software.
Note: Never remove the USB device or switch off the instrument during a software
update. Otherwise, an undefined software state might be the result.
Power supply and battery charge state

The currently used power supply and the charge state of the battery is indicated in the
status bar of the R&S EVSG1000 display. The following status messages are availa-
ble:
"Mains" No battery is installed in the instrument.
"Charge" Battery is currently being charged.
"Bat" The instrument is running on the battery power supply.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 239

GPS Configuration
Full Battery is fully charged.

Charge susp. Charge suspended, but not yet fully charged; for example due to
overheating during the charge process
Remote command:
BATT on page 258
9.7 GPS Configuration

Access: [Setup] > "GPS"
If a GPS receiver is connected to the R&S EVSG1000, the basic GPS receiver settings
are displayed here.
Baudrate......................................................................................................................240
GPS-Delay.................................................................................................................. 241
PPS-Sync....................................................................................................................241
Interface...................................................................................................................... 241
Baudrate
Specifies the baudrate of the GPS signal. The following values are supported:
4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 | 230400
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 240

GPS Configuration
Remote command:
SETUP:SETGPSBAUDRATE on page 263
GPS-Delay
Specifies a delay between the received GPS time and the actual time. This value cor-
rects the delay of the transmission of GPS coordinates via a serial interface. Supported
values are from -300 ms to +1000 ms.
Remote command:
SETUP:SETGPSDELAY on page 264
PPS-Sync
Activates/deactivates synchronization between the GPS time in the stored data sets
and the PPS signal provided by the GPS receiver.
Note: PPS input recommended. It is strongly recommended that you connect the PPS
signal of the GPS receiver to the "PPS In" connector of the R&S EVSG1000. Although
it is possible to store data on the R&S EVSG1000 without the PPS signal connected,
this may lead to an incorrect assignment of the stored data to the actual GPS time.
For details see Chapter 8.2.1, "GPS Data Synchronization", on page 218.
"OFF" No PPS synchronization is performed.
"PPS_IN rise" Stored GPS time is synchronized to the rising edge of the incoming
PPS signal.
"PPS_IN fall" Stored GPS time is synchronized to the falling edge of the incoming
PPS signal.
"RS232 rise" Stored GPS time is synchronized to the rising edge of the incoming
GPS signal.
"RS232 fall" Stored GPS time is synchronized to the falling edge of the incoming
GPS signal.
Remote command:
SETUP:PPS_SYNC on page 264
Interface
Determines the interface used to connect a GPS receiver.
"RS-232" (See Chapter 1.5.2.4, "RS232 GPS", on page 34)
"USB" Chapter 1.5.1.4, "USB", on page 29
"USB u-blox" Chapter 1.5.1.4, "USB", on page 29
Remote command:
SETUP:SETGPSINTERFACE on page 263
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 241

R&S®EVSG1000 Remote Commands
Common Instrument and Measurement Setup
10 Remote Commands
Through the LAN connection (Fast Ethernet), nearly all device functions and the trans-
fer of measurement data can be remotely operated from a PC / network using the TCP
port 8000 (for I/Q data: 8001 (RX1) or 8002 (RX2)).
The command syntax is not SCPI-conform.
IP addresses and subnet mask identifier are set in the setup menu (see Chapter 9.4,
"Network (Remote) Settings", on page 230).
Only one remote session can be active. A new attempt to establish a connection dis-
connects the current active session.
Channel Addressing
The R&S EVSG1000 offers two possibilities to address one of two independent RX
boards by remote control.
● Active RX board
Any remote command is valid for the current active RX board as shown in the Info
Line of the display (see Chapter 1.6.1, "Understanding the Display Information",
on page 38).
● Direct Addressing
To address an RX board directly, any command can be preceded by the prefix @1
or @2 followed by the command.
Example: Set frequency of RX board 1
@1 RF108100
Example: Get DDM from RX board 2
@2 DD0
10.1 Common Instrument and Measurement Setup

The following commands are required to configure general instrument and measure-
ment settings that are independant of the measurement mode.
● Common Measurement Settings...........................................................................243
● Signal Input........................................................................................................... 247
● Trigger Settings.....................................................................................................249
● Baseband Input.....................................................................................................249
● Result Display Settings......................................................................................... 250
● Audio, Demodulation and Output Configuration................................................... 253
● Retrieving Instrument Information......................................................................... 258
● GPS Data..............................................................................................................261
● System Settings.................................................................................................... 266
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 242

● Calibration.............................................................................................................269
● Network Settings and Remote Operation..............................................................270
● Deprecated Commands........................................................................................ 271
10.1.1 Common Measurement Settings
The following commands are required for all measurements.

GETMEAS.................................................................................................................... 243
GETMDEF.................................................................................................................... 244
LA?.............................................................................................................................. 244
MEASTIME?..................................................................................................................245
MEASTIME................................................................................................................... 245
RF?.............................................................................................................................. 245
RF................................................................................................................................245
RFCH........................................................................................................................... 245
SETATTMODE...............................................................................................................246
SETUP:DEMODAMFM................................................................................................... 246
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_AGC........................................................................................... 246
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_COUPLING................................................................................. 247
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX1?........................................................................................247
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX1......................................................................................... 247
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX2?........................................................................................247
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX2......................................................................................... 247
GETMEAS <result type>,<RX-board>

This command outputs the current measurement result for one or both RX-boards.
Several measurement result types are defined.
Parameters:
<result type> Outputs the measurement result as one of the listed types.
FULL
EVS300 compatibility mode
ALL
All values of the current measurement mode are sent as comma
separated text, using actual units.
MEDIUM
A fixed selection of parameters is exported.
SHORT
A short fixed selection of parameters is exported.
<RX-Board> Output measurement result for the selected RX board.
1
RX board 1 selected
2
RX board 2 selected
1+2
Both RX boards selected
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 243

Return values:
<results> Measurement result.
<State> READY.
The command was executed successfully.
Example: GETMEAS FULL,1+2
GETMDEF <ParamSel>,<RX-board>
This command outputs the header columns for data provided by GETMEAS.
Parameters:
<ParamSel> Determines which parameter selection is output.
FULL
ALL
MEDIUM
SHORT
<RX-Board> Selects the RX board for which results are exported.
1
RX board 1 selected
2
RX board 2 selected
1+2
Return values:
<Results> Comma-separated list of header data for the selected results.
<State> READY.
LA?
This command queries the RF signal level in numeric measurement modes.
Return values:
<signal level> RF signal level
Default unit: dBm
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 244

MEASTIME?
MEASTIME <Time>
This command gets or sets the measurement time for "ILS LOC","ILS GP", "ILS MB",
"VOR" and "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Time> Measurement time
Default unit: ms
Return values:
<State> READY.
RF?
RF
This command sets RF frequency. All values are interpreted with one digit behind the
decimal point, for example, RF 108700.5 in numeric measurement modes.
Parameters:
<freq> RF frequency
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Freq" on page 80
See "Freq" on page 95
RFCH <Channel>
This command sets the receiver frequency channel on the active receiver board
according to the ICAO frequency list, or returns the currently defined channel.
Parameters:
<Channel> The specified ICAO-channel for the measurement. See Chap-
ter A, "ILS Channel Frequency List", on page 393.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "CH" on page 79
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 245

SETATTMODE
This command selects the attenuation of the active mode ("ILS LOC","ILS GP", "ILS
MB", "VOR" or "COM" mode).
Parameters:
<Attenuation> Select the attenuation type from the listed ones.
AUTO
The RF attenuation mode is selected automatically.
LN
(Low Noise) 15 dB pre-amplification
Provides a high sensitivity. Suitable when scanning the area for
distant signals.
NORM
0 dB
LD
(Low Dist) 15 dB attenuation
Provides a low sensitivity. Suitable when analyzing a nearby sig-
nal, to avoid overload due to high-level signals.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Command was executed successfully.
Manual operation: See "RF Att" on page 80
See "RF Mode" on page 81
See "RF Att" on page 136
SETUP:DEMODAMFM <Mode>
Gets or sets the audio demodulation mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> AM | FM
Return values:
<State> READY.
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_AGC <Mode>
Parameters:
<Mode> OFF | ON
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 246

Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Demod Out AGC" on page 230
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_COUPLING <Mode>
Gets or sets the coupling type for Demodulation-Out mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> AC | DC
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Demod Out Coupling" on page 229
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX1?
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX1 <Attenuation>
Gets or sets the external attenuation of "RX1 IN".
Parameters:
<Attenuation> External attenuation
Default unit: dB
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Transducer Correction" on page 81
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX2?
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX2 <Attenuation>
Gets or sets the external attenuation of "RX2 IN".
Parameters:
Default unit: dB
Return values:
<State> READY.
10.1.2 Signal Input
The following commands are required to configure the signal input.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 247

CH?..............................................................................................................................248
CH................................................................................................................................248
GETNRPTYPE.............................................................................................................. 248
GETNRPPOW .............................................................................................................. 248
SETUP:INPUT?............................................................................................................. 248
SETUP:INPUT...............................................................................................................248
CH?
CH <RX board>
This command selects the active RX-board.
Parameters:
<RX board> 1
Select the RX-board 1.
2
Select the RX-board 2.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "RX Unit 1 / RX Unit 2" on page 227
GETNRPTYPE
Gets the type of a connected NRP power sensor.
Return values:
<String> Type of NRP power sensor.
GETNRPPOW
Gets the current NRP power sensor level.
Return values:
<level> Power sensor level
Default unit: dBm
SETUP:INPUT?
SETUP:INPUT <Channel>,<Input>
This command selects the input source for channel 1 and 2.
Parameters:
<Channel> 1
Selects channel 1
2
Selects channel 2
<Input> RF
RF input at the front side
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 248

BB
Baseband input at the rear side
Return values:
<State> READY.
Example: SETUP:INPUT 1, RF
Manual operation: See "Input RF/LF" on page 75
10.1.3 Trigger Settings
The following command is required to configure basic trigger settings.

PPSSMA_TRIG_SOURCE?............................................................................................249
PPSSMA_TRIG_SOURCE? <Source>
Gets or sets the external trigger event source for "ILS LOC", "ILS GP", "ILS MB",
"VOR" and "COM" modes.
Return values:
<Source> TRIG
Signal provided at the Trigger In connector
PPS SMA
Signal provided at the PPS In connector
PPS GPS
Signal provided at the RS232-GPS connector
<State> READY.
10.1.4 Baseband Input
The following commands are required to configure baseband input.

SETUP:BB_IN_COUPL?................................................................................................ 249
SETUP:BB_IN_COUPL.................................................................................................. 249
SETUP:BB_IN_FACTOR?...............................................................................................250
SETUP:BB_IN_FACTOR................................................................................................ 250
SETUP:BB_IN_RANGE?................................................................................................ 250
SETUP:BB_IN_RANGE..................................................................................................250
SETUP:BB_IN_COUPL?
SETUP:BB_IN_COUPL <Coupling>
Gets or sets the coupling for the baseband (LF In) input.
Parameters:
<Coupling> <AC | DC>
Coupling for baseband input.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 249

Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Coupling" on page 84
SETUP:BB_IN_FACTOR? <Value>
SETUP:BB_IN_FACTOR <Value>
Gets or sets a compensation factor for the baseband (LF In) input power.
Parameters:
<Value> Factor to be applied to the measured LF power.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "LF In Factor" on page 85
SETUP:BB_IN_RANGE?
SETUP:BB_IN_RANGE <Sensitvity>
Gets or sets sensitivity range for the baseband (LF In) input.
Parameters:
<Sensitvity> 100_MV
Sets 100 mV.
5V
Sets 5 V.
1V
Sets 1 V.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Range" on page 84
10.1.5 Result Display Settings
The following commands are required to configure the result displays for measure-
ments.
SETUP:UNIT:BARGRAPH?............................................................................................ 251
SETUP:UNIT:BARGRAPH.............................................................................................. 251
SETUP:UNIT:DDM?....................................................................................................... 251
SETUP:UNIT:DDM......................................................................................................... 251
SETUP:UNIT:ILSPHASE?...............................................................................................251
SETUP:UNIT:ILSPHASE.................................................................................................251
SETUP:UNIT:POLARITYDDM?....................................................................................... 252
SETUP:UNIT:POLARITYDDM......................................................................................... 252
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 250

SETUP:UNIT:SDM?....................................................................................................... 252
SETUP:UNIT:SDM......................................................................................................... 252
SETUP:UNIT:UPPERFREQ?.......................................................................................... 253
SETUP:UNIT:UPPERFREQ............................................................................................ 253
SETUP:UNIT:VORDIRECTION?......................................................................................253
SETUP:UNIT:VORDIRECTION........................................................................................253
SETUP:UNIT:BARGRAPH?
SETUP:UNIT:BARGRAPH <MesDe>
This command sets the representation of bar graph.
Parameters:
<MesDe> ILSPHASE
Sets the MesDe parameter as ILSPHASE.
Cockpit
Sets the MesDe parameter as Cockpit.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "DDM Bargr" on page 87
See "Level View" on page 228
SETUP:UNIT:DDM?
SETUP:UNIT:DDM <Unit>
This command sets the DDM unit.
Parameters:
<Unit> 1
Sets DDM unit as dimensionless.
uA
Sets DDM unit as μA.
PCT
Sets DDM unit as percentage.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "DDM Unit" on page 86
SETUP:UNIT:ILSPHASE?
SETUP:UNIT:ILSPHASE <ILS phase>
This command gets or sets the ILS phase representation.
Parameters:
<ILS phase> BIPOLAR
The phase is represented as bipolar, if between -60...+60.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 251

UNIPOLAR
The phase is represented as unipolar, if between 0...+120.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "ILS Phase" on page 87
SETUP:UNIT:POLARITYDDM?
SETUP:UNIT:POLARITYDDM <Value>
This command gets or sets the DDM polarity.
The phase is represented as unipolar, if between 0...+120.
Parameters:
<Value> 90-150
Sets DDM polarity as 90-150.
150-90
Sets DDM polarity as 150-90.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "DDM Polarity" on page 87
SETUP:UNIT:SDM?
SETUP:UNIT:SDM <Unit>
This command sets the SDM unit.
Parameters:
<Unit> 1
Sets SDM unit as dimensionless.
uA
Sets SDM unit as μA.
PCT
Sets SDM unit as percentage.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "SDM Unit" on page 86
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 252

SETUP:UNIT:UPPERFREQ?
SETUP:UNIT:UPPERFREQ <Upper frequency>
This command gets or sets the upper frequency to course or clearance (while the
lower frequency is always vice versa).
Parameters:
<Upper frequency> CRS
Sets the upper frequency to course.
CRL
Sets the upper frequency to clear.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Upper Freq" on page 79
SETUP:UNIT:VORDIRECTION?
SETUP:UNIT:VORDIRECTION <Direction>
This command gets or sets the VOR direction point of view.
Parameters:
<Direction> from | to
Sets the VOR direction point of view as "from" or "to".
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Signal Direction" on page 114
10.1.6 Audio, Demodulation and Output Configuration
The following commands are required to configure various types of output.

SETUP:AF_SOURCE_OUT............................................................................................ 254
SETUP:ANALOG_OUT1.................................................................................................254
SETUP:ANALOG_OUT2.................................................................................................254
SETUP:AUDIOBW......................................................................................................... 255
SETUP:BB_SOURCE_OUT............................................................................................ 255
SETUP:DDM_RANGE_LLZ............................................................................................ 256
SETUP:DDM_RANGE_GS ............................................................................................ 256
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT?.................................................................................................. 256
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT....................................................................................................256
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_AGC?......................................................................................... 257
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_AGC........................................................................................... 257
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_COUPLING?............................................................................... 257
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_COUPLING................................................................................. 257
SETUP:SPEAKER......................................................................................................... 257
SETUP:VOLUME...........................................................................................................257
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 253

SQUELCH?...................................................................................................................258
SQUELCH.....................................................................................................................258
SETUP:AF_SOURCE_OUT <Source>
Selects the source for "AF Out" for active RX-Board.
Parameters:
<Source> AM_DEMOD_CC_BB
AM Demodulation at the center carrier
AM_DEMOD_UC
AM Demodulation at the upper carrier of a 2F ILS signal
AM_DEMOD_LC
AM Demodulation at the lower carrier of a 2F ILS signal
FM_DEMOD_CC
FM Demodulation at the center carrier
FM_DEMOD_UC
FM Demodulation at the upper carrier of a 2F ILS signal
FM_DEMOD_LC
FM Demodulation at the lower carrier of a 2F ILS signal
Return values:
<State> READY.
SETUP:ANALOG_OUT1 <Source>
Selects the source for Analog Out 1.
Parameters:
<Source> CH1_DDM | CH2_DDM | CH1_BB_FULL | CH2_BB_FULL |
CH1_BB_AUDIO | CH2_BB_AUDIO
Return values:
<State> READY.
SETUP:ANALOG_OUT2 <Source>
Selects the source for Analog Out 2.
Parameters:
<Source> CH1_DDM | CH2_DDM | CH1_BB_FULL | CH2_BB_FULL |
CH1_BB_AUDIO | CH2_BB_AUDIO
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 254

SETUP:AUDIOBW <output volume>

This command specifies the bandwidth for audio output.
Parameters:
<output volume> FULL | VOICE | ID_NOTCH | V_ID_NOTCH
FULL
Full bandwidth is output
VOICE
Voice frequencies (> 3 kHz) output
ID_NOTCH
ID frequency (1020 Hz) output
V_ID_NOTCH
Voice and ID frequencies output
Range: 0 to 100
*RST: VOICE
Default unit: %
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Audio BW" on page 227
SETUP:BB_SOURCE_OUT <Source>
Selects the source for "BB Out" for active RX-Board.
Parameters:
<Source> AM_DEMOD_CC_BB
AM Demodulation at the center carrier
AM_DEMOD_UC
AM Demodulation at the upper carrier of a 2F ILS signal
AM_DEMOD_LC
AM Demodulation at the lower carrier of a 2F ILS signal
FM_DEMOD_CC
FM Demodulation at the center carrier
FM_DEMOD_UC
FM Demodulation at the upper carrier of a 2F ILS signal
FM_DEMOD_LC
FM Demodulation at the lower carrier of a 2F ILS signal
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 255

SETUP:DDM_RANGE_LLZ <Channel>,<Range>
This command selects a predefined DDM range. This command is active for analog
output in ILS localizer mode.
Parameters:
<Channel> 1
Selects input source for channel 1.
2
<Range> Range: 1 to 4
Return values:
<State> READY.
SETUP:DDM_RANGE_GS <Channel>,<Range>
This command selects a predefined DDM range. The command is active for analog
output in ILS glidepath mode.
Parameters:
<Channel> 1
2
<Range> Range: 1 to 4
Return values:
<State> READY.
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT? <Mode>
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT <Mode>
Gets or sets the Demodulation-Out mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> OFF
No output signal is provided.
RX_1_BB_OUT
Output provided by the BB Out connector on receiver board
"RX1" or "RX 2".
RX_2_BB_OUT
Output provided by the BB Out connector on receiver board
"RX1" or "RX 2".
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 256

Manual operation: See "Demod. Out Source" on page 229
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_AGC? <Value>
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_AGC <Mode>
Parameters:
<Mode> OFF | ON
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Demod Out AGC" on page 230
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_COUPLING? <Mode>
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_COUPLING <Mode>
Gets or sets the coupling type for Demodulation-Out mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> AC | DC
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Demod Out Coupling" on page 229
SETUP:SPEAKER <State>
This command activates/deactivates the speaker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Speaker" on page 227
SETUP:VOLUME <output volume>

This command specifies the AF output volume.
Parameters:
<output volume> Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: %
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 257

Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "AF Volume" on page 226
SQUELCH?
SQUELCH <Level>
This command gets or sets the squelch level of the active mode ("ILS LOC","ILS GP",
"ILS MB", "VOR" or "COM" mode).
Parameters:
<Level> Squelch level of active mode
Default unit: dBm
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Squelch" on page 226
10.1.7 Retrieving Instrument Information
The following commands are required to retrieve information on the instrument and
operation status.
BATT............................................................................................................................ 258
BI?............................................................................................................................... 259
CLEARERRORLOG.......................................................................................................259
GETERRORLOG........................................................................................................... 259
SETUP:GETERRORLOG .............................................................................................. 259
GETOPTIONS............................................................................................................... 259
GETTEMP.....................................................................................................................259
*IDN?............................................................................................................................259
INV?............................................................................................................................. 260
OPTIONGETCHECKED ................................................................................................ 260
SAVEDATA....................................................................................................................260
VER?............................................................................................................................260
BATT
Gets the battery status.
Return values:
<Battery level> Battery charge state
Default unit: %
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Power supply and battery charge state" on page 239
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 258

BI?
This command returns built-in-test information.
Return values:
<BI-Info>
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "HW Status" on page 236
CLEARERRORLOG
This command clears the error log.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Delete all error messages" on page 236
GETERRORLOG
SETUP:GETERRORLOG
Returns the error log.
Return values:
<string> Entries of the error log
GETOPTIONS
This command returns a list of installed and available options.
Return values:
<list of options> Examples: ILS CRS/CLR Analysis, VOR Analysis, MB Analy-
sis, ...
Manual operation: See "Installed Options" on page 237
GETTEMP
This command queries the temperatures of main board, RX 1 and RX 2 boards.
Return values:
<temperature> Temperature value of a main board, RX1 and RX2 boards.
Manual operation: See "HW Status" on page 236
*IDN?
This command queries the instrument identification.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 259

Return values:
<Instrument
Identification>
Usage: Query only
INV?
This command queries the inventory that contains, among other information, serial
numbers of device and boards.
Return values:
<Inv-Info>
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Inventory" on page 238
OPTIONGETCHECKED
Check if all options are available.
Return values:
<Option State> true
The option is availabe.
false
The option is not available.
Example: OPTIONGETCHECKED
K1=true,K2=true,K3=true,K4=false
SAVEDATA
This command stores the current settings in the Flash. This storage is normally done
during shutdown. However if the R&S EVSG1000 is restarted after a power interrup-
tion, it will not remember the settings.
The command prevents data loss, but shall not be used too often.
Return values:
<State> READY.
VER?
This command queries SW version.
Return values:
<sw-version>
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Inventory" on page 238
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 260

10.1.8 GPS Data
The following commands are required to configure and retrieve GPS data.
GETGPSGPBOD........................................................................................................... 261
GETGPSGPGGA...........................................................................................................261
GETGPSGPGLL............................................................................................................ 261
GETGPSGPHDT........................................................................................................... 262
GETGPSGPRMC...........................................................................................................262
GETGPSGPGSA........................................................................................................... 262
GETGPSGPGSV........................................................................................................... 262
GETGPSGPTRF............................................................................................................262
GETGPSGPVBW...........................................................................................................262
GETGPSGPVTG........................................................................................................... 262
GETGPSGPXTE............................................................................................................263
GETGPSGPZDA............................................................................................................263
SETUP:SETGPSINTERFACE......................................................................................... 263
GETGPSUNDULATION ................................................................................................. 263
SETUP:GPS_BAUDRATE?.............................................................................................263
SETUP:GPS_BAUDRATE...............................................................................................263
SETUP:SETGPSBAUDRATE.......................................................................................... 263
SETUP:SETGPSDELAY................................................................................................. 264
SETUP:PPS_SYNC?..................................................................................................... 264
SETUP:PPS_SYNC....................................................................................................... 264
SETUP:GPSREF........................................................................................................... 265
SETUP:REFLAT?...........................................................................................................265
SETUP:REFLAT............................................................................................................ 265
SETUP:REFLONG?....................................................................................................... 265
SETUP:REFLONG.........................................................................................................265
SETUP:TIMESYNC?...................................................................................................... 266
SETUP:TIMESYNC........................................................................................................266
GETGPSGPBOD
This command requests the last incoming GPBOD message from the GPS receiver.
Return values:
<message> The last incoming GPBOD message.
GETGPSGPGGA
This command requests the last incoming GPGGA message from the GPS receiver.
Parameters:
<message> The last incoming GPGGA message.
GETGPSGPGLL
This command requests the last incoming GPGLL message from the GPS receiver.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 261

Return values:
<message> The last incoming GPGLL message.
GETGPSGPHDT
This command requests the last incoming GPHDT message from the GPS receiver.
Return values:
<message> The last incoming GPHDT message.
GETGPSGPRMC
This command requests the last incoming GPRMC message from the GPS receiver.
Parameters:
<message> The last incoming GPRMC message.
GETGPSGPGSA
This command requests the last incoming GPGSA message from the GPS receiver.
Return values:
<message> The last incoming GPGSA message.
GETGPSGPGSV
This command requests the last incoming GPGSV message from the GPS receiver.
Return values:
<message> The last incoming GPGSV message.
GETGPSGPTRF
This command requests the last incoming GPTRF message from the GPS receiver.
Return values:
<message> The last incoming GPTRF message.
GETGPSGPVBW
This command requests the last incoming GPVBW message from the GPS receiver.
Return values:
<message> The last incoming GPVBW message.
GETGPSGPVTG
This command requests the last incoming GPVTG message from the GPS receiver.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 262

Return values:
<message> The last incoming GPVTG message.
GETGPSGPXTE
This command requests the last incoming GPXTE message from the GPS receiver.
Return values:
<message> The last incoming GPXTE message.
GETGPSGPZDA
This command requires the last incoming GPZDA message from the GPS receiver.
Return values:
<message> The last incoming GPZDA message.
SETUP:SETGPSINTERFACE <Connector>
Determines the interface used to connect a GPS receiver.
Parameters:
<Connector> RS_232
RS-232 interface
USB
USB interface
USB_UBLOX
USB u-blox interface
*RST: RS_232
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Interface" on page 241
GETGPSUNDULATION
Gets the undulation.
Return values:
<string>
SETUP:GPS_BAUDRATE? <Baudrate>
SETUP:GPS_BAUDRATE <Baudrate>
SETUP:SETGPSBAUDRATE <Baudrate>
This command changes the baud rate.
NOTE: Make sure to use a valid GPS baud rate.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 263

Parameters:
<Baudrate> 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 | 230400
Possible baud rates
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Baudrate" on page 240
SETUP:SETGPSDELAY <Delay>
This command specifies the GPS delay compensation.
NOTE: This setting has no effect, when using PPS synchronization.
Parameters:
<Delay> Specify the delay compensation. Default is 100 ms.
Range: -500 to +500
Default unit: ms
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "GPS-Delay" on page 241
SETUP:PPS_SYNC?
SETUP:PPS_SYNC <synchronization>
Gets or sets the PPS synchronization for the instrument.
Parameters:
<Synchronization> OFF
No PPS synchronization is performed.
PPS_IN_RISE
Stored GPS time is synchronized to the rising edge of the
incoming PPS signal.
PPS_IN_FALL
Stored GPS time is synchronized to the falling edge of the
incoming PPS signal.
RS232_RISE
Stored GPS time is synchronized to the rising edge of the
incoming GPS signal.
RS232_FALL
Stored GPS time is synchronized to the falling edge of the
incoming GPS signal.
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 264

Manual operation: See "PPS-Sync" on page 241
SETUP:GPSREF <Latitude>,<Longitude>
By default, the reference point for GPS information is automatically taken from the
position of the built-in GPS antenna of the R&S EVSG1000. However, it can be
changed manually to any other position using this command.
Parameters:
<Latitude> <degrees><minutes><direction>
Latitude of the reference point in degrees, minutes (decimal for-
mat) and direction (S | N)
<Longitude> <degrees><minutes><direction>
Longitude of the reference point in degrees, minutes (decimal
format) and direction (W | E)
Example: SETUP:GPSREF 89°44.123456789S,23°55.123456789S
SETUP:REFLAT?
SETUP:REFLAT <Latitude>
Gets or sets the latitude of the GPS reference point.
Parameters:
<Latitude> GPS reference point latitude
Return values:
<State> READY.
SETUP:REFLONG?
SETUP:REFLONG <Longitude>
Gets or sets the longitude of the GPS reference point.
Parameters:
<Longitude> GPS reference point longitude.
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 265

SETUP:TIMESYNC?
SETUP:TIMESYNC <Source>
Defines or queries the time source with which the R&S EVSG1000 clock is synchron-
ized. If the R&S EVSG1000 clock differs from the selected synchronization source time
by more than 1000 ms, the R&S EVSG1000 clock is adjusted accordingly.
Parameters:
<Source> OFF
No synchronization is performed for the internal R&S EVSG1000
clock.
GPS
Synchronization with a connected GPS (see the main
R&S EVSG1000 User Manual).
Example: SETUP:TIMESYNC OFF
10.1.9 System Settings
The following commands are required to configure basic system settings.

DISPLAY_BRIGHTNESS_BATTERY................................................................................266
DISPLAY_BRIGHTNESS_MAINS....................................................................................266
FACTORY_PRESET...................................................................................................... 267
SETUP:ENERGYSAVER................................................................................................ 267
SETUP:BOOTONPOWERUP..........................................................................................267
SETUP:DATE................................................................................................................ 268
SETUP:TIME.................................................................................................................268
WAIT4EXE.................................................................................................................... 268
DISPLAY_BRIGHTNESS_BATTERY <Percentage>
This command sets the display brightness in battery mode.
Parameters:
<Percentage> numeric value
Setting of display brightness.
Range: 0 to 100
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Brightness Battery" on page 229
DISPLAY_BRIGHTNESS_MAINS <Percentage>
This command sets the display brightness in mains mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 266

Parameters:
<Percentage> numeric value
Setting of display brightness.
Range: 0 to 100
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Brightness Mains" on page 228
FACTORY_PRESET
This command restores the factory default settings, the IP-settings and Data logger
lists will be not modified.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Factory Preset" on page 217
SETUP:ENERGYSAVER <Value>
This command specifies the energy saver properties.
Parameters:
<Value> ON
The energy saver is on.
OFF
The energy saver is off.
1 to 60
The energy saver is started after the defined time.
Default unit: min
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Energy Saver" on page 233
SETUP:BOOTONPOWERUP <State>
If power is applied to the instrument, it can be started immediately.
Parameters:
<State> ON
The R&S EVSG1000 is started immediately after power is
applied to the instrument.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 267

OFF
The R&S EVSG1000 must be started manually after power is
applied to the instrument.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Example: SETUP:BOOTONPOWERUP ON
Manual operation: See "Boot on Power Up" on page 234
SETUP:DATE <Date>
This command sets the instrument date.
Parameters:
<Date> DD.MM.YYYY
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Date" on page 233
SETUP:TIME <Time>
This command sets the instrument time.
Parameters:
<Time> HH:MM:SS
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Time" on page 233
WAIT4EXE <State>
Sets the behavior of the status message "READY.".
Parameters:
<State> ON
The "READY." message is delayed until every command is exe-
cuted.
OFF
The "READY." message is returned as soon as a command is
syntactically accepted.
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 268

10.1.10 Calibration
The following commands are required to perform and analyze calibration.

AUTOKALSTATUS.........................................................................................................269
AUTOKALSTATUS_EXTENDED..................................................................................... 269
GETKALSTATUS........................................................................................................... 269
KALSCREEN.................................................................................................................269
STARTKAL....................................................................................................................269
AUTOKALSTATUS
This command gets the auto-calibration (Autocal) status and date for the boards RX1
and RX2.
Manual operation: See "Auto-Calibration (Cal)" on page 234
AUTOKALSTATUS_EXTENDED
This command gets the extended autocal state for RX1 and RX2 boards.
Return values:
<State> Extended autocal state
GETKALSTATUS
This command shows the current task of auto-calibration.
Return values:
Status Current task of auto-calibration.
KALSCREEN
This command shows the auto-calibration ("Setup - Cal") screen.
Return values:
<State> READY.
STARTKAL
This command launches the auto-calibration for current RX-board.
The command returns immediately, while the calibration takes several minutes. To find
out when the calibration is ready, use the GETKALSTATUS command.
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 269

10.1.11 Network Settings and Remote Operation
The following commands are required to configure network settings and remote opera-
tion.
GETHOSTNAME........................................................................................................... 270
LO................................................................................................................................270
MLOC...........................................................................................................................270
RLC..............................................................................................................................270
REMOTELOCK..............................................................................................................270
SETUP:NTPSERVER?................................................................................................... 271
SETUP:NTPSERVER.....................................................................................................271
GETHOSTNAME
This command returns the host name of the instrument.
Return values:
<hostname>
Manual operation: See "Hostname" on page 232
LO
This command sets the R&S EVSG1000 back to local control.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Usage: Setting only
MLOC
The MLOC command is identical to the LO command.
Return values:
<State> READY.
RLC <State>
REMOTELOCK <State>
This command deactivates/activates local operation by keyboard.
Parameters:
<State> ON
If set, no local operation by keyboard is possible.
The "ESC" button has no effect.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 270

OFF
The R&S EVSG1000 must be set to "OFF”" or must be restarted
to activate local operation by keyboard.
Return values:
<State> READY.
SETUP:NTPSERVER?
SETUP:NTPSERVER <IPAdress>
Defines the IP address of the NTP server used for time synchronization of the internal
R&S EVSG1000 clock (see SETUP:TIMESYNC on page 266).
Parameters:
<IPAdress> TCP/IP address between 0.0.0.0 and 0.255.255.255
Example: SETUP:TIMESYNC NTP
SETUP:NTPSERVER 10.0.2.166
Usage: Setting only
10.1.12 Deprecated Commands
The following commands are maintained for compatibility with former

Rohde & Schwarz analyzers only. For new remote control programs, use the following
commands:
● MODE_LOC on page 273
● MODE_LOC on page 273
● MODE_GP on page 273
● MODE_MB on page 306
● MODE_VOR on page 313
● MODE_COM on page 322
● MODE_FSCAN on page 351
● MODE_IFSPECT on page 355
● MODE_FFT on page 360
● MODE_SCOPE on page 367
M?................................................................................................................................272
MB............................................................................................................................... 272
MI.................................................................................................................................272
MV............................................................................................................................... 273
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 271

M?
This command queries the current active mode.
Return values:
<ActiveMode> ILS_LOC
ILS Localizer mode
ILS_GP
ILS Glide Path mode
MB
Marker Beacon mode
VOR
VHF Omni directional radio Range mode
COM
COM mode
FSCAN
RF spectrum mode
IFSPECTUM
IF spectrum mode
FFT
AF Spectrum mode
SCOPE
AF Time Domain mode
GBAS
GBAS/SCAT-I mode (Options R&S EVSG-K4/-K5)
NDB
Non-directional beacon mode (option R&S EVSG1-K7)
Usage: Query only
MB
This command switches the instrument to the "ILS MB" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
MI
This command switches the instrument to the "ILS LOC" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 272

ILS Localizer (LOC) and Glidepath (GP) Modes
MV
This command switches the instrument to the "VOR" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
10.2 ILS Localizer (LOC) and Glidepath (GP) Modes

The following commands are required to configure and perform measurements in the
ILS Localizer and Glidepath modes.
● Configuring the ILS LOC and GP Modes.............................................................. 273
● Configuring ILS Localizer Measurements............................................................. 273
● Configuring ILS Glidepath Measurements............................................................ 283
● Retrieving ILS Loc and GP Results.......................................................................292
● Retrieving ID Results............................................................................................ 301
10.2.1 Configuring the ILS LOC and GP Modes
The following commands are required to activate the modes.

MODE_LOC.................................................................................................................. 273
MODE_GP.................................................................................................................... 273
MODE_LOC
The MODE_LOC command is identical to the MI command.
For description, see MI on page 272.
MODE_GP
This command switches the instrument to the "ILS GP" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
10.2.2 Configuring ILS Localizer Measurements
The following commands are required to configure ILS Loc measurements

DEMODE_LLZ?.............................................................................................................275
DEMODE_LLZ...............................................................................................................275
LLZ_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ..............................................................................................275
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 273

LLZ_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ..............................................................................................275
LLZ_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ?..................................................................................... 276
LLZ_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ.......................................................................................276
LLZ_BB_BW_KHZ?....................................................................................................... 276
LLZ_BB_BW_KHZ......................................................................................................... 276
LLZ_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV?.........................................................................................276
LLZ_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV.......................................................................................... 276
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ?............................................................................... 277
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ.................................................................................277
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ?........................................................................................... 277
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ............................................................................................. 277
LLZ_BB_WIDE1F?.........................................................................................................277
LLZ_BB_WIDE1F...........................................................................................................277
LLZ_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB?................................................................................ 278
LLZ_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB.................................................................................. 278
LLZ_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?......................................................................................... 278
LLZ_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP........................................................................................... 278
LLZ_DEM_ID_BW?........................................................................................................278
LLZ_DEM_ID_BW..........................................................................................................278
LLZ_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW?..............................................................................................278
LLZ_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW............................................................................................... 278
LLZ_DEM_WIDE_BW?...................................................................................................279
LLZ_DEM_WIDE_BW.................................................................................................... 279
LLZ_DEM_1F2F_BW?................................................................................................... 279
LLZ_DEM_1F2F_BW..................................................................................................... 279
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F?.....................................................................................279
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F...................................................................................... 279
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN?........................................................................ 280
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN.......................................................................... 280
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ?................................................................... 280
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ..................................................................... 280
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ...................................................................... 280
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ...................................................................... 280
FILTER_LLZ_RESIDFM?................................................................................................281
FILTER_LLZ_RESIDFM..................................................................................................281
LLZ_RFLF_INPUT?....................................................................................................... 281
LLZ_RFLF_INPUT......................................................................................................... 281
LLZ_START_FINDCARRIER...........................................................................................281
LLZ_TRIG_EDGE.......................................................................................................... 282
LLZ_TRIG_EDGE.......................................................................................................... 282
LLZ_TRIG_SOURCE?....................................................................................................282
LLZ_TRIG_SOURCE..................................................................................................... 282
VIEW_GS?....................................................................................................................282
VIEW_GS..................................................................................................................... 282
VIEW_LLZ?...................................................................................................................283
VIEW_LLZ.....................................................................................................................283
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 274

DEMODE_LLZ?
DEMODE_LLZ <1F/2F mode>
Gets or sets the 1F/2F mode in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<1F/2F mode> 1F
ILS system with one carrier. The nominal frequency is the carrier
frequency.
2F
ILS system with two carriers. The carrier frequencies (Course
and Clearance) are above and below the nominal frequency (in
a distance of a few kHz).
2F_CRS
Course of an ILS system (depending on the ILS system, it can
be the upper or lower carrier frequency).
2F_CLR
Clearance of an ILS system (depending on the ILS system, it
can be the upper or lower carrier frequency).
WIDE
In the wideband mode, 1-frequency and 2-frequency systems
can be analyzed. Both carriers are inside one filter and can be
demodulated together.
Note: In this mode, there is no configuration and display of the
carrier offset.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "1F/2F" on page 76
LLZ_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ <Offset>
LLZ_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ <Offset>
This command gets or sets the frequency of the low IF signal for LF input in "ILS LOC"
mode.
Parameters:
<Offset> Offset of the low IF signal from 0 Hz.
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Low IF Offset" on page 84
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 275

LLZ_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
LLZ_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth for LF input (AF mode) for ID
and distortion measurement in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 0_5KHZ | 1_5KHZ | 3KHZ | 5KHZ
Bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "IF/AF Bandwidth (Dist/ID)" on page 85
LLZ_BB_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
LLZ_BB_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth for LF input (AF mode) in "ILS
LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 0.5KHZ | 1.5KHZ | 3KHZ | 5KHZ | 9KHZ | 12.5KHZ | 18KHZ |
25KHZ
Bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Bandwidth (IF BW/AF In BW)" on page 85
LLZ_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV? <DCOffset>
LLZ_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV <Power>
This command gets or sets the reference power for LF input (AF signals only) in "ILS
LOC" mode. This value is used to determine the modulation depth and corresponds to
Parameters:
<Power> Reference DC power of the AF signal
Default unit: V
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "DC Reference" on page 84
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 276

LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth for LF input (low IF mode) for
ID and distortion measurement in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
Bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth for LF input (low IF mode) in
"ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 1KHZ | 3KHZ | 6KHZ | 10KHZ | 18KHZ | 25KHZ | 36KHZ |
50KHZ
Bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
LLZ_BB_WIDE1F? <1F mode>

LLZ_BB_WIDE1F <1F mode>
Determines the type of LF input. Depending on the type of input, the available settings
and results can vary.
Parameters:
<1F mode> AF
Measures the AF signal at 0 Hz.
IF
Measures the signal at a low intermediate frequency, for exam-
ple from a test point at the transmitter.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "LF In Mode" on page 83
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 277

LLZ_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB?
LLZ_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB <Threshold>
Gets or sets the carrier threshold in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<Threshold> Carrier threshold
Default unit: dB
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Carrier Thresh" on page 79
LLZ_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP? <StepSize>
LLZ_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP <StepSize>
Gets or sets the default RF frequency step size in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<StepSize> 8.33_KHZ | 12.5_KHZ | 25_KHZ | 50_KHZ
*RST: 50_KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Step Size" on page 80
LLZ_DEM_ID_BW?
LLZ_DEM_ID_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth for ID and distortion measurement in "ILS
LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 1KHZ | 3KHZ | 6KHZ | 10KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "IF BW Dist/ID" on page 82
LLZ_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW? <Bandwidth>
LLZ_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the WIDE demodulator bandwidth for ID and distortion analysis in "ILS
LOC" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 278

Return values:
<State> READY.
LLZ_DEM_WIDE_BW?
LLZ_DEM_WIDE_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the WIDE demodulator bandwidth in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "IF BW" on page 82
LLZ_DEM_1F2F_BW?
LLZ_DEM_1F2F_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or Sets the 1F2F demodulator bandwidth in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
Return values:
<State> READY.
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F?
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F <Freq. Offset>
Gets or sets the demodulator 1F frequency offset in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq. Offset> Frequency offset
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "1F Offset" on page 78
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 279

LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN?
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN <Mode>
Gets or sets the mode of the demodulator frequency offset in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO
Sets the demodulator frequenecy offset automatically.
MANUAL
Sets the demodulator frequency offset manually.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "CRS/CLR Carr (Autotune function)" on page 78
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ?
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ <Freq. Offset>
Gets or Sets the demodulator lower frequency offset in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq. Offset> Lower frequency offset
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Clearance" on page 78
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ <Freq. Offset>
Gets or Sets the demodulator upper frequency offset in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq. Offset> Upper frequency offset
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Course" on page 78
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 280

FILTER_LLZ_RESIDFM?
FILTER_LLZ_RESIDFM <Bandwidth>
Defines or queries the filter type used to determine residual FM
Return values:
<Bandwidth> ICAO
Filter according to ICAO specification
NARROW
Narrow filter; the DDM filters used to determine the 90 Hz/
150 Hz modulation values are used to avoid interference
between the signals
*RST: ICAO
Example: FILTER_LLZ_RESIDFM NARROW
Manual operation: See "Res. FM Filt. (ILS only)" on page 82
See "Res. FM Filt." on page 85
LLZ_RFLF_INPUT? <Input>
LLZ_RFLF_INPUT <Input>
Configures the input source for the receiver in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<Input> RX_IN
RF input from RX 1 In/RX 2 In connectors on the front of the
R&S EVSG1000
LF_IN
An AF or low frequency signal is provided at the LF In input con-
nector on the rear side of the R&S EVSG1000.
Return values:
<State> READY.
LLZ_START_FINDCARRIER
Starts to search for a carrier in "ILS LOC" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Find Carrier" on page 78
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 281

LLZ_TRIG_EDGE <TrigEdge>
LLZ_TRIG_EDGE <TrigEdge>
Gets or sets whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls
down to it in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<TrigEdge> POSITIVE | NEGATIVE
POSITIVE
Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level
NEGATIVE
Triggers when the signal falls down to the trigger level
Return values:
<State> READY.
LLZ_TRIG_SOURCE? <TrigSource>
LLZ_TRIG_SOURCE <TrigSource>
Gets or sets the trigger source in "ILS LOC" mode.
Parameters:
<TrigSource> OFF | TIME | EXT
OFF
Free run mode, no trigger used
TIME
time trigger
EXT
external trigger
Return values:
<State> READY.
VIEW_GS?
VIEW_GS <View type>
Gets or sets the view in "ILS GP" mode. See Chapter 4.1.3, "ILS Localizer and Glide-
path Measurements and Results", on page 56 for details.
Parameters:
<View type> MAIN
Main view
CRS|CLR
Course or clearance view
DIST
Distortion view
REC
Recording view
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 282

Return values:
<State> READY.
VIEW_LLZ?
VIEW_LLZ <View type>
Gets or sets the view in "ILS LOC" mode. See Chapter 4.1.3, "ILS Localizer and Glide-
path Measurements and Results", on page 56 for details.
Parameters:
<View type> MAIN
Main view
CRS|CLR
Course or clearance view
DIST
Distortion view
ID
ID Analysis view
REC
Recording view
Return values:
<State> READY.
10.2.3 Configuring ILS Glidepath Measurements
The following commands are required to configure ILS GP measurements

DEMODE_GS?..............................................................................................................284
DEMODE_GS................................................................................................................284
GS_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ?............................................................................................. 285
GS_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ...............................................................................................285
GS_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ?...................................................................................... 285
GS_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ........................................................................................285
GS_BB_BW_KHZ?........................................................................................................ 285
GS_BB_BW_KHZ.......................................................................................................... 285
GS_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV?......................................................................................... 286
GS_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV........................................................................................... 286
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ?................................................................................286
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ..................................................................................286
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ?............................................................................................ 286
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ.............................................................................................. 286
GS_BB_WIDE1F?..........................................................................................................287
GS_BB_WIDE1F........................................................................................................... 287
GS_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB?................................................................................. 287
GS_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB................................................................................... 287
GS_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?.......................................................................................... 287
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 283

GS_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP............................................................................................ 287
GS_DEM_1F2F_BW?.................................................................................................... 288
GS_DEM_1F2F_BW...................................................................................................... 288
GS_DEM_ID_BW?.........................................................................................................288
GS_DEM_ID_BW...........................................................................................................288
GS_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW?.............................................................................................. 288
GS_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW................................................................................................ 288
GS_DEM_WIDE_BW?................................................................................................... 289
GS_DEM_WIDE_BW..................................................................................................... 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN?......................................................................... 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN...........................................................................289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F?..................................................................................... 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F....................................................................................... 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ?.................................................................... 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ...................................................................... 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ?..................................................................... 290
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ.......................................................................290
FILTER_GS_RESIDFM?.................................................................................................290
FILTER_GS_RESIDFM.................................................................................................. 290
GS_RFLF_INPUT?........................................................................................................ 290
GS_RFLF_INPUT.......................................................................................................... 290
GS_START_FINDCARRIER............................................................................................291
GS_TRIG_EDGE........................................................................................................... 291
GS_TRIG_EDGE........................................................................................................... 291
GS_TRIG_SOURCE?.....................................................................................................291
GS_TRIG_SOURCE...................................................................................................... 291
DEMODE_GS?
DEMODE_GS <1F/2F mode>
Gets or sets the 1F/2F mode in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
<1F/2F mode> 1F
ILS system with one carrier. The nominal frequency is the carrier
frequency.
2F
ILS system with two carriers. The carrier frequencies (Course
and Clearance) are above and below the nominal frequency (in
a distance of a few kHz).
2F_CRS
Course of an ILS system (depending on the ILS system, it can
be the upper or lower carrier frequency).
2F_CLR
Clearance of an ILS system (depending on the ILS system, it
can be the upper or lower carrier frequency).
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 284

WIDE
In the wideband mode, 1-frequency and 2-frequency systems
can be analyzed. Both carriers are inside one filter and can be
demodulated together.
Note: In this mode, there is no configuration and display of the
carrier offset.
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ? <Offset>
GS_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ <Offset>
This command gets or sets the offset of the AF signal for LF input in "ILS GS" mode.
Parameters:
<Offset> Offset of the AF signal from 0 Hz.
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Low IF Offset" on page 84
GS_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
GS_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth for LF input (AF mode) for ID
and distortion measurement in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
Bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_BB_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
GS_BB_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the bandwidth for LF input in "ILS GP" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 285

Parameters:
25KHZ
Bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV? <DCOffset>
GS_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV <DCOffset>
This command gets or sets the reference power for LF input (AF signals only) in "ILS
GS" mode. This value is used to determine the modulation depth and corresponds to
Parameters:
<Power> Reference DC power of the AF signal.
Default unit: V
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth for LF input (low IF mode) for
ID and distortion measurement in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
Bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth for LF input (low IF mode) in
"ILS GP" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 286

Parameters:
50KHZ
Bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_BB_WIDE1F? <1F mode>

GS_BB_WIDE1F <1F mode>
Determines the type of LF input in "ILS GP" mode. Depending on the type of input, the
available settings and results can vary.
Parameters:
<1F mode> AF
Measures the AF signal at 0 Hz.
IF
Measures the signal at a low intermediate frequency, for exam-
ple from a test point at the transmitter.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "LF In Mode" on page 83
GS_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB?
GS_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB <Threshold>
Gets or sets the carrier threshold in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
<Threshold> Carrier threshold
Default unit: dB
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Carrier Thresh" on page 79
GS_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP? <StepSize>
GS_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP <StepSize>
Gets or sets the default RF frequency step size in "ILS GP" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 287

Parameters:
*RST: 50_KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_DEM_1F2F_BW?
GS_DEM_1F2F_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or Sets the 1F2F demodulator bandwidth in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
Demodulator bandwidth
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_DEM_ID_BW?
GS_DEM_ID_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the ID demodulator Bandwidth in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW? <Bandwidth>
GS_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the WIDE demodulator bandwidth for ID and distortion analysis in "ILS
GP" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 288

GS_DEM_WIDE_BW?
GS_DEM_WIDE_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the WIDE demodulator bandwidth in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN?
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN <Mode>
Gets or sets the mode of the demodulator frequency offset in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO
Sets the demodulator frequenecy offset automatically.
MANUAL
Sets the demodulator frequency offset manually.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "CRS/CLR Carr (Autotune function)" on page 78
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F?
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F <Freq. Offset>
Gets or sets the demodulator 1F frequency offset in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "1F Offset" on page 78
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ?
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ <Freq. Offset>
Gets or Sets the demodulator lower frequency offset in "ILS GP" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 289

Parameters:
<Freq. Offset> Lower frequency offset
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Clearance" on page 78
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ?
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ <Freq. Offset>
Gets or Sets the demodulator upper frequency offset in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq. Offset> Upper frequency offset
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Course" on page 78
FILTER_GS_RESIDFM?
FILTER_GS_RESIDFM <Bandwidth>
Defines or queries the filter type used to determine residual FM in "ILS GP" mode
Return values:
<Bandwidth> ICAO
Filter according to ICAO specification
NARROW
Narrow filter; the DDM filters used to determine the 90 Hz/
150 Hz modulation values are used to avoid interference
between the signals
*RST: ICAO
Example: FILTER_GS_RESIDFM NARROW
GS_RFLF_INPUT? <Input>
GS_RFLF_INPUT <Input>
Configures the input source for the receiver in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
<Input> RX_IN
R&S EVSG1000
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 290

LF_IN
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_START_FINDCARRIER
Starts to search for a carrier in "ILS GP" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Find Carrier" on page 78
GS_TRIG_EDGE <TrigEdge>
GS_TRIG_EDGE <TrigEdge>
down to it in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
POSITIVE
NEGATIVE
Return values:
<State> READY.
GS_TRIG_SOURCE? <TrigSource>
GS_TRIG_SOURCE <TrigSource>
Gets or sets the trigger source in "ILS GP" mode.
Parameters:
OFF
TIME
time trigger
EXT
external trigger
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 291

Return values:
<State> READY.
10.2.4 Retrieving ILS Loc and GP Results
The following commands are required to retrieve results for ILS Loc or GP measure-
ments
Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere:
● GETDATADEF on page 378
● GETDATASET on page 378
● LA? on page 244
● RF on page 245
● FFT_GETSPECT on page 366
Remote commands exclusive to ILS Loc and GP results:

AC8.............................................................................................................................. 293
AF2.............................................................................................................................. 293
AF3.............................................................................................................................. 293
AF8.............................................................................................................................. 293
AM2..............................................................................................................................294
AM2CLR....................................................................................................................... 294
AM2CRS.......................................................................................................................294
AM3..............................................................................................................................294
AM3CLR....................................................................................................................... 294
AM3CRS.......................................................................................................................294
AM8..............................................................................................................................295
AM9..............................................................................................................................295
AMMOD240.................................................................................................................. 295
GS_BB_DC_V............................................................................................................... 295
GS_BB_LEV_V..............................................................................................................295
GS_BB_LEV_V..............................................................................................................295
DCLR........................................................................................................................... 296
DCRS........................................................................................................................... 296
DD0..............................................................................................................................296
DD1..............................................................................................................................296
FCLR............................................................................................................................296
FCRS........................................................................................................................... 296
FSINGLE...................................................................................................................... 297
K2_150......................................................................................................................... 297
K2_90...........................................................................................................................297
K3_150......................................................................................................................... 297
K3_90...........................................................................................................................297
K4_90...........................................................................................................................297
K4_150......................................................................................................................... 298
LCLR............................................................................................................................ 298
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 292

LCRS............................................................................................................................298
PH................................................................................................................................298
PH_90_90..................................................................................................................... 298
PH_150_150................................................................................................................. 298
RESIDFM_90 ............................................................................................................... 299
RESIDFM_150 ..............................................................................................................299
SCLR............................................................................................................................299
SCRS........................................................................................................................... 299
SD0.............................................................................................................................. 299
SD1.............................................................................................................................. 299
THD_150...................................................................................................................... 300
THD_90........................................................................................................................ 300
LLZ_BB_DC_V.............................................................................................................. 300
LLZ_BB_LEV_V.............................................................................................................300
LLZ_BB_VMAXPP_V..................................................................................................... 300
AC8
This command queries the code of identifier, LLZ only.
Return values:
<[CODE]> AC8 value of the identifier
Manual operation: See "ID Code" on page 68
AF2
This command queries the AF frequency of 90 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[Hz]> AF2 value of the frequency
Manual operation: See "Freq 90 Hz" on page 68
AF3
Return values:
AF8
This command queries the AF frequency of the identifier, LLZ only.
Return values:
Manual operation: See "ID Freq" on page 73
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 293

AM2
This command shows the AM modulation depth of 90 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> AM modulation depth value of 90 Hz
Manual operation: See "AM 90 Hz" on page 68
AM2CLR
This command shows the AM modulation depth of 90 Hz clearance signal.
Return values:
<[%]> AM modulation depth value of 90 Hz clearance signal
AM2CRS
This command shows the AM modulation depth of 90 Hz course signal.
Return values:
<[%]> AM modulation depth value of 90 Hz course signal
AM3
This command shows the AM modulation depth of 150 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> AM modulation depth value of 150 Hz
AM3CLR
This command shows the AM modulation depth of 150 Hz clearance signal.
Return values:
<[%]> AM modulation depth value of 150 Hz clearance signal
AM3CRS
This command shows the AM modulation depth of 150 Hz course signal.
Return values:
<[%]> AM modulation depth value of 150 Hz course signal
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 294

AM8
This command queries the AM modulation of identifier, LLZ only.
Return values:
<[%]> AM8 value of the identifier
Manual operation: See "ID AM" on page 73
AM9
This command queries the AM modulation of voice, LLZ only.
Return values:
<[%]> AM9 value of voice
AMMOD240
This command queries the AM modulation depth of 90 + 150 = 240 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> AM modulation depth
Manual operation: See "AM (90+150)" on page 71
GS_BB_DC_V
This command queries the measured DC power level in Volt for LF input (AF mode) in
"ILS GP" mode.
Return values:
<Power> Measured DC power of the AF signal
Default unit: V
GS_BB_LEV_V
This command queries the measured power level in Volt for LF input in "ILS GP" mode.
Return values:
<Power> Measured power of the LF input
Default unit: V
GS_BB_LEV_V
This command queries the maximum peak-to-peak power level in Volt for LF input in
"ILS GP" mode.
Return values:
<Power> maximum peak-to-peak power of the LF input
Default unit: V
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 295

DCLR
This command queries the current DDM Clearance value.
Return values:
DDM_CLR [1] DDM Clearance Value (dimensionless)
Manual operation: See "DDM 90-150" on page 67
DCRS
This command queries the current DDM Course value.
Return values:
DDM_CRS [1] DDM Course Value (dimensionless)
DD0
This command queries the current DDM value.
Return values:
<DDM [1]> DDM value (dimensionless)
DD1
This command queries the current DDM value.
Return values:
DDM [µA] DDM value (μA)
FCLR
This command queries the current frequency Clearance value.
Return values:
<[Hz]> RF Clearance frequency in Hz.
Example: FCRS
-8000.3Hz
FCRS
This command queries the current frequency Course value.
Return values:
<[Hz]> RF Course frequency in Hz.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 296

Example: FCRS
8000.2Hz
FSINGLE
This command queries the current frequency Single value.
Parameters:
<[Hz]> RF Single Frequency in Hz
Manual operation: See "Low IF frequency" on page 63
K2_150
This command queries the K2 distortion parameter of 150 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> K2 distortion value of 150 Hz signal
Manual operation: See "K2 150 Hz" on page 70
K2_90
Return values:
K3_150
Return values:
K3_90
Return values:
K4_90
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 297

Return values:
K4_150
Return values:
LCLR
This command queries the current Clearance Level value.
Return values:
<[dBm]> Clearance Level value in dBm
LCRS
This command queries the current Course Level value.
Return values:
<[dBm]> Course Level value in dBm
PH
Phase shift between 90 Hz/150 Hz.
Return values:
<[°]> Phase shift
Manual operation: See "PHI 90/150" on page 68
PH_90_90
Return values:
<[°]> Phase shift
PH_150_150
Return values:
<[°]> Phase shift
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 298

RESIDFM_90
This command queries the residual FM distortion parameter of 90 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> Residual FM distortion value of 90 Hz signal
Manual operation: See "Res. FM 90" on page 70
RESIDFM_150
This command queries the residual FM distortion parameter of 150 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> Residual FM distortion value of 150 Hz signal
Manual operation: See "Res. FM 150" on page 71
SCLR
This command queries the current SDM Clearance value.
Return values:
SDM_CLR [1] SDM Clearance Value (dimensionless)
Manual operation: See "SDM 90,150" on page 68
SCRS
This command queries the current SDM Course value.
Return values:
SDM_CRS [1] SDM Course Value (dimensionless)
SD0
This command queries the current SDM value.
Return values:
SDM [1] SDM value (dimensionless)
SD1
This command queries the current SDM value.
Return values:
SDM [µA] SDM value (μA)
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 299

THD_150
This command queries the THD distortion parameter of 150 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> THD distortion value of 150 Hz signal
Manual operation: See "THD 150 Hz" on page 71
THD_90
This command queries the THD distortion parameter of 90 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> THD distortion value of 90 Hz signal
Manual operation: See "THD 90 Hz" on page 70
LLZ_BB_DC_V
This command queries the measured DC power level in Volt for LF input (AF mode) in
"ILS LOC" mode.
Return values:
<Power> Measured DC power of the AF signal
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "DC" on page 63
LLZ_BB_LEV_V
This command queries the measured power level in Volt for LF input in "ILS LOC"
mode.
Return values:
<Power> Measured power of the LF input
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Lev" on page 63
LLZ_BB_VMAXPP_V
This command queries the maximum peak-to-peak power level in Volt for LF input in
"ILS LOC" mode.
Return values:
<Power> maximum peak-to-peak power of the LF input
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Vmax(pp)" on page 63
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 300

10.2.5 Retrieving ID Results
The following commands are required to retrieve ILS Loc identifier results.
ID_DASH_LENGTH ...................................................................................................... 301
ID_DOT_LENGTH .........................................................................................................301
ID_DOTDASH_GAP ......................................................................................................301
ID_LETTER_GAP ......................................................................................................... 301
ID_PERIOD...................................................................................................................302
LASTID_TIME .............................................................................................................. 302
ID_DASH_LENGTH
Queries the length of time a dash is transmitted in the used Morse code in "ILS LOC"
mode
Return values:
<Time> Dash time of ID signal
Default unit: ms
Manual operation: See "Dash Length" on page 73
ID_DOT_LENGTH
Queries the length of time a dot is transmitted in the used Morse code in "ILS LOC"
mode
Return values:
<Time> Dot time of ID signal
Default unit: ms
Manual operation: See "Dot Length" on page 73
ID_DOTDASH_GAP
Queries the length of time that passes between a transmitted dot and a dash in the
used Morse code in "ILS LOC" mode.
Return values:
<Time> Dot-Dash gap time of ID signal
Default unit: ms
Manual operation: See "Dot-Dash Gap" on page 73
ID_LETTER_GAP
Queries the length of time that passes between two transmitted letters in the used
Morse code in "ILS LOC" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 301

Return values:
<Time> Letter gap time of ID signal
Default unit: ms
Manual operation: See "Letter Gap" on page 73
ID_PERIOD
Queries the periodic time between two measured ID pulses in "ILS LOC" mode.
Return values:
<Time> Periodic time between two ID pulses.
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "ID Period" on page 73
LASTID_TIME
Queries the time since last valid ID pulse was measured in "ILS LOC" mode.
Return values:
<Time> Time since last valid ID pulse
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "Last ID" on page 73

Rohde & Schwarz analyzers only. For new remote control programs, use the com-
mands described in Chapter 10.2.1, "Configuring the ILS LOC and GP Modes",
on page 273 and Chapter 10.12, "Data Management", on page 372.
MEASMODE?................................................................................................................303
MEASMODE................................................................................................................. 303
LLZ...............................................................................................................................303
GS................................................................................................................................303
FA0.............................................................................................................................. 304
FA1.............................................................................................................................. 304
FA2.............................................................................................................................. 304
FA3.............................................................................................................................. 304
FA4.............................................................................................................................. 305
FA5.............................................................................................................................. 305
GSLLZ.......................................................................................................................... 305
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 302

MEASMODE?
MEASMODE <Measurement mode>
This command sets the current LLZ or GS measurement mode and the associated
threshold distortion values.
Parameters:
<Measurement CRS+CLR_MOD
mode> Sets the Course and Clearance measurement mode.
COURSE_MOD
Sets the Course measurement mode.
CLEAR_MOD
Sets the Clearance measurement mode.
CRS|CLR_MOD
Sets Course or Clearance measurement mode.
SINGLE_MOD
Sets single frequency measurement mode.
WIDEBAND_MOD
Sets wideband frequency measurement mode.
CRS+CLR_THD
Sets the Course and Clearance THD distortion value.
COURSE_THD
Sets the Course THD distortion value.
CLEAR_THD
Sets the Clearance THD distortion value.
SINGLE_THD
Sets single frequency THD distortion value.
WIDEBAND_THD
Sets wideband frequency THD distortion value.
Return values:
<State> READY.
LLZ
This command switches the mode to the "ILS LOC" mode. The LLZ command is identi-
cal to the MODE_LOC command.
Parameters:
<State> READY.
GS
This command switches the mode to the "ILS GP" mode. The GS command is identical
to the MODE_GP command.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 303

Parameters:
<State> READY.
FA0
This command stops the continuous output that was started with FA1, FA2, FA4, FA5,
STREAM.
Return values:
<State> READY.
FA1
This command activates the continuous output of DDM /level measurement results.
The output rate is defined by the current measurement time. Values are separated by a
TAB (ASC 09) DDM [1] RF level [dBm].
The command FA0 stops the output.
Return values:
<State> READY.
FA2
This command activates the continuous repetition of a set of values. The output rate is
defined by the current measurement time.
All values are transmitted as integer values, multiplied with a constant factor:
● DDM [1], Multiplier: 10000
● RF level [dBm], Multiplier: 10
● AM-Mod90 [%], Multiplier: 100
● AM-Mod150 [%], Multiplier: 100
Return values:
<State> READY.
FA3
The same output format as FA2 on page 304, but the values are only transmitted when
triggered by another FA3 command. Note that this behavior is different from EVS200,
where the trigger is an arbitrary ASCI character.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 304

ILS Marker Beacon (MB) Mode
Return values:
<State> READY.
FA4
The same as FA1 on page 304, but output is preceded by a timestamp.
Return values:
<State> READY.
FA5
The same as FA1 on page 304, but output is preceded by the time in ms since the FA5
is started.
Return values:
<State> READY.
GSLLZ
Queries if the R&S EVSG1000 is in GS or LOC mode.
Return values:
<mode> GS | LOC
Shows the current mode.
10.3 ILS Marker Beacon (MB) Mode

ILS Marker beacon mode.
● Configuring ILS MB Measurements...................................................................... 305
● Retrieving ILS MB Results.................................................................................... 307
● Retrieving ILS MB Identifier Results..................................................................... 309
10.3.1 Configuring ILS MB Measurements
The following commands are required to configure ILS MB measurements.

MODE_MB....................................................................................................................306
MB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?.......................................................................................... 306
MB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP............................................................................................ 306
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 305

MB_DEM_BW?..............................................................................................................306
MB_DEM_BW............................................................................................................... 306
VIEW_MB?....................................................................................................................306
MB_TRIG_EDGE...........................................................................................................306
MB_TRIG_EDGE...........................................................................................................306
MB_TRIG_SOURCE?.................................................................................................... 307
MB_TRIG_SOURCE...................................................................................................... 307
VIEW_MB..................................................................................................................... 307
MODE_MB
The MODE_MB command is identical to the MB command.
For description, see MB on page 272.
MB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP? <StepSize>
MB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP <StepSize>
Gets or sets the default RF frequency step size in "ILS MB" mode.
Parameters:
*RST: 50_KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
MB_DEM_BW?
MB_DEM_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth in "ILS MB" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
Demodulator bandwidht
Return values:
<State> READY.
VIEW_MB?
MB_TRIG_EDGE <TrigEdge>
MB_TRIG_EDGE <TrigEdge>
down to it in "ILS MB" mode.
Parameters:
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 306

POSITIVE
NEGATIVE
Return values:
<State> READY.
MB_TRIG_SOURCE? <TrigSource>
MB_TRIG_SOURCE <TrigSource>
Gets or sets the trigger source in "ILS MB" mode.
Parameters:
OFF
TIME
time trigger
EXT
external trigger
Return values:
<State> READY.
VIEW_MB <View type>

This command selects a view type for the MB mode.
Parameters:
<View type> MAIN | DIST | LOG
Available views for the MB mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
10.3.2 Retrieving ILS MB Results
The following commands are required to retrieve results from ILS MB measurements.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 307

Remote commands exclusive to ILS MB results:

FMEAS......................................................................................................................... 308
AF4.............................................................................................................................. 308
AF5.............................................................................................................................. 308
AF6.............................................................................................................................. 308
AF7.............................................................................................................................. 308
AM4..............................................................................................................................309
AM5..............................................................................................................................309
AM6..............................................................................................................................309
AM7..............................................................................................................................309
FMEAS
This command queries the measured value of RF frequency.
Return values:
<kHz> Provides the value of measured RF frequency in kHz.
AF4
Return values:
<Hz> Provides the AF4 frequency in Hz.
AF5
Return values:
AF6
Return values:
AF7
This command queries the AF frequency of the identifier.
Return values:
<Hz> Provides the identifier's frequency in Hz.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 308

AM4
This command queries the AM modulation of 3000 Hz signal.
Return values:
<%> Provides the AM4 modulation in %.
AM5
Return values:
AM6
Return values:
AM7
This command queries the AM modulation of the identifier.
Return values:
10.3.3 Retrieving ILS MB Identifier Results
The following commands are required to retrieve identifier results from ILS MB mea-
surements.
ID_F400_DASHLEN ......................................................................................................309
ID_F1300_DASHLEN..................................................................................................... 310
ID_F1300_DOTLEN....................................................................................................... 310
ID_F3000_DOTLEN ...................................................................................................... 310
ID_F400_GAP............................................................................................................... 310
ID_F1300_GAP............................................................................................................. 310
ID_F3000_GAP..............................................................................................................311
ID_F400_DASHLEN
Queries the dash time of 400 Hz signal in "ILS" MB mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 309

Return values:
<Time> Length of time a dash for the outer marker.
Default unit: ms
Manual operation: See "400 Hz Dash" on page 93
ID_F1300_DASHLEN
Queries the dash time of 1300 Hz signal in "ILS" MB mode.
Return values:
<Time> Length of time a dash is transmitted for the middle marker.
Default unit: ms
Manual operation: See "1300 Hz Dash" on page 93
ID_F1300_DOTLEN
Queries the dot time of 1300 Hz signal in "ILS" MB mode.
Return values:
<Time> Length of time a dot is transmitted for the middle marker.
Default unit: ms
Manual operation: See "1300 Hz Dot" on page 93
ID_F3000_DOTLEN
Queries the dot time of 3000 Hz signal in "ILS" MB mode.
Return values:
<Time> Length of time a dot is transmitted for the inner marker.
Default unit: ms
Manual operation: See "3000 Hz Dot" on page 93
ID_F400_GAP
Queries the dash-dash gap time of 400 Hz signal in "ILS MB" mode.
Return values:
<Time> Length of time that passes between two transmitted dashes for
the outer marker.
Default unit: ms
Manual operation: See "400 Hz Gap" on page 93
ID_F1300_GAP
Queries the dash-dot gap time of 1300 Hz signal in "ILS MB" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 310

Return values:
<Time> Length of time that passes between a transmitted dot and a
dash for the middle marker.
Default unit: ms
ID_F3000_GAP
Queries the dot-dot gap time of 3000 Hz signal in "ILS MB" mode.
Return values:
<Time> Length of time that passes between two transmitted dots for the
inner marker.
Default unit: ms

mands described in Chapter 10.3.1, "Configuring ILS MB Measurements", on page 305
and Chapter 10.12, "Data Management", on page 372.
FA0...............................................................................................................................311
FA2...............................................................................................................................311
FA0
This command stops the continuous output that was started with FA2.
Return values:
<State> READY.
FA2
All values are transmitted as integer values, multiplied with a constant factor.
The following multipliers are applied:
● 10 for RF level [dBm]
● 100 for AM-Mod400 [%]
● 100 for AM-Mod1300 [%]
● 100 for AM-Mod3000 [%]
● 100 for AM-Mod ID [%]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 311

VOR Mode

Return values:
<State> READY.
10.4 VOR Mode

VOR mode. They are only available if the R&S EVSG-K2 option is installed.
● Configuring VOR Measurements.......................................................................... 312
● Retrieving VOR Results........................................................................................ 316
10.4.1 Configuring VOR Measurements
The following commands are required to configure VOR measurements.

Useful commands for VOR measurements described elsewhere:
● RFCH on page 245
Remote commands exclusive to VOR measurements:

MODE_VOR..................................................................................................................313
VIEW_VOR?................................................................................................................. 313
VIEW_VOR................................................................................................................... 313
VOR_BB_BW_KHZ?...................................................................................................... 313
VOR_BB_BW_KHZ........................................................................................................313
VOR_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV?....................................................................................... 313
VOR_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV.........................................................................................313
VOR_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?........................................................................................ 314
VOR_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP..........................................................................................314
VOR_DEM_AM_BW?.....................................................................................................314
VOR_DEM_AM_BW.......................................................................................................314
VOR_DEM_BEARFILTER?.............................................................................................314
VOR_DEM_BEARFILTER...............................................................................................314
VOR_DEM_BW?........................................................................................................... 314
VOR_DEM_BW............................................................................................................. 314
VOR_DEM_FM_BW?..................................................................................................... 315
VOR_DEM_FM_BW.......................................................................................................315
VOR_DEMFREQS_OFFSET?.........................................................................................315
VOR_DEMFREQS_OFFSET.......................................................................................... 315
VOR_RFLF_INPUT?...................................................................................................... 315
VOR_RFLF_INPUT........................................................................................................315
VOR_TRIG_EDGE.........................................................................................................316
VOR_TRIG_EDGE.........................................................................................................316
VOR_TRIG_SOURCE?.................................................................................................. 316
VOR_TRIG_SOURCE.................................................................................................... 316
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 312

VOR Mode
MODE_VOR
The MODE_VOR command is identical to the MV command.
For description, see MV on page 273.
VIEW_VOR?
VIEW_VOR <View type>
This command selects a view type for the VOR mode.
Parameters:
<View type> MAIN | DIST | ID | LOG
Available views for VOR mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
VOR_BB_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
VOR_BB_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the bandwidth for LF input in "VOR" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
Bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
VOR_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV? <DCOffset>
VOR_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV <DCOffset>
This command gets or sets the DC offset for LF input in "VOR" mode.
Parameters:
<DCOffset> Power offset of the LF input at 0 Hz.
Default unit: V
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 313

VOR Mode
VOR_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP? <StepSize>
VOR_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP <StepSize>
Gets or sets the default RF frequency step size in "VOR" mode.
Parameters:
*RST: 50_KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
VOR_DEM_AM_BW?
VOR_DEM_AM_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth for the AM 30 Hz modulation in "VOR" mode.
Parameters:
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "AM30 BW" on page 117
VOR_DEM_BEARFILTER? <Type>
VOR_DEM_BEARFILTER <Type>
Defines the filter type used to determine the bearing angle.
Parameters:
<Type> NARROW
For small input levels
WIDE
Faster; used in previous software releases
*RST: WIDE
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Bear.Filt." on page 117
VOR_DEM_BW?
VOR_DEM_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the demodulator Bandwidth in "VOR" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 314

VOR Mode
Parameters:
50KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
VOR_DEM_FM_BW?
VOR_DEM_FM_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the demodulator bandwidth for the FM 9960 Hz modulation in "VOR"
mode.
Parameters:
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "FM BW" on page 117
VOR_DEMFREQS_OFFSET? <Freq. Offset>

VOR_DEMFREQS_OFFSET <Freq. Offset>
Gets or sets a frequency offset of the carrier frequency in "VOR" mode.
Parameters:
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Freq Offset" on page 115
VOR_RFLF_INPUT? <Input>
VOR_RFLF_INPUT <Input>
Configures the input source for the receiver in "VOR" mode.
Parameters:
<Input> RX_IN
R&S EVSG1000
LF_IN
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 315

VOR Mode
Return values:
<State> READY.
VOR_TRIG_EDGE <TrigEdge>
VOR_TRIG_EDGE <TrigEdge>
down to it in "VOR" mode.
Parameters:
POSITIVE
NEGATIVE
Return values:
<State> READY.
VOR_TRIG_SOURCE? <TrigSource>
VOR_TRIG_SOURCE <TrigSource>
Gets or sets the trigger source in "VOR" mode.
Parameters:
OFF
TIME
time trigger
EXT
external trigger
Return values:
<State> READY.
10.4.2 Retrieving VOR Results
The following commands are required to retrieve results from VOR measurements.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 316

VOR Mode
Remote commands exclusive to VOR results:

AC8.............................................................................................................................. 317
AF0.............................................................................................................................. 317
AF1.............................................................................................................................. 317
AF2.............................................................................................................................. 318
AF8.............................................................................................................................. 318
AM0..............................................................................................................................318
AM1..............................................................................................................................318
AM8..............................................................................................................................318
AM9..............................................................................................................................318
BE?.............................................................................................................................. 319
BE_TO?........................................................................................................................319
BE................................................................................................................................319
DIST_9960....................................................................................................................319
FM0..............................................................................................................................319
FM1..............................................................................................................................319
FMEAS......................................................................................................................... 319
SUBCARR_AM1K44...................................................................................................... 319
SUBCARR_AM1K50...................................................................................................... 320
SUBCARR_AM60HZ......................................................................................................320
SUBCARR_K2...............................................................................................................320
SUBCARR_K3...............................................................................................................320
SUBCARR_K4...............................................................................................................320
SUBCARR_K5...............................................................................................................321
AC8
This command queries the CODE of an identifier.
Return values:
<CODE> Code of an identifier
AF0
This command queries the AF frequency of the 30 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[Hz]> AF frequency of 30 Hz signal
AF1
This command queries the AF frequency of the 9960 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[Hz]> AF frequency 9960 Hz signal
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 317

VOR Mode
AF2
This command queries the AF frequency of the FM 30 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[Hz]> AF frequency of FM 30 Hz signal
Manual operation: See "Freq FM30" on page 108
AF8
This command queries the AF frequency of identifier.
Return values:
<[Hz]> Identifier AF frequency
AM0
This command queries the modulation of the 30 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> 30 Hz signal modulation
AM1
This command queries the modulation of the 9960 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> 9960 Hz signal modulation
AM8
This command queries the modulation of identifier.
Return values:
<[%]> Identifier modulation
AM9
This command queries the modulation of voice.
Return values:
<[%]> Voice modulation
Manual operation: See "Voice AM" on page 108
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 318

VOR Mode
BE?
BE_TO?
BE
This command queries the bearing angle.
Return values:
<[°]> Bearing angle in [°].
Manual operation: See "Bearing (from)" on page 107
DIST_9960
This command queries the AM distortion of the 9960 Hz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> AM distortion of 9960 Hz signal
FM0
This command queries the FM deviation.
Return values:
<[Hz]> FM deviation
Manual operation: See "FM-Deviation" on page 108
FM1
This command queries the FM index.
Return values:
<[1]> FM index (dimensionless)
Manual operation: See "FM Index" on page 108
FMEAS
This command queries the measured value of the RF frequency.
Return values:
<Hz> Measured RF frequency
SUBCARR_AM1K44
Queries the AM distortion at 1440 Hz (48 segments * 30 Hz) in "VOR" mode.
Return values:
<Distortion> Distortion
Default unit: %
Manual operation: See "Subcarrier AM Distortion" on page 109
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 319

VOR Mode
SUBCARR_AM1K50
Queries the AM distortion at 1500 Hz (50 segments * 30 Hz) in "VOR" mode.
Return values:
Default unit: %
SUBCARR_AM60HZ
Queries the AM distortion at a modulation frequency of 60 Hz in "VOR" mode.
Return values:
Default unit: %
SUBCARR_K2
Queries K2 subcarrier harmonic of VOR signal in "VOR" mode.
Return values:
<Distortion> Distortion 2nd order
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See "Subcarrier Harmonics" on page 109
SUBCARR_K3
Queries K3subcarrier harmonic of VOR signal in "VOR" mode.
Return values:
<Distortion> Distortion 3rd order
Default unit: dB
SUBCARR_K4
Return values:
<Distortion> Distortion 4th order
Default unit: dB
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 320

VOR Mode
SUBCARR_K5
Return values:
<Distortion> Distortion 5th order
Default unit: dB

mands described in Chapter 10.4.1, "Configuring VOR Measurements", on page 312
and Chapter 10.12, "Data Management", on page 372.
FA2.............................................................................................................................. 321
FA0.............................................................................................................................. 321
FA2
All values are transmitted as integer values, multiplied with a constant factor.
The following multipliers are applied:
● 10 for RF level [dBm]
● 100 for Bearing [DEG]
● 100 for AM-Mod30 [%]
● 100 for AM-Mod9960 [%]
● 10 for FM-Deviation [Hz]
● 10 for FM-Index [1]
Return values:
<State> READY.
FA0
This command stops the continuous output that was started with FA2.
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 321

COM Mode
10.5 COM Mode

COM mode. They are only available if the R&S EVSG-K6 option is installed.
● Configuring COM Measurements..........................................................................322
● Retrieving COM Results........................................................................................326
10.5.1 Configuring COM Measurements
The following commands are required to configure COM measurements.

MODE_COM................................................................................................................. 322
VIEW_COM?.................................................................................................................322
VIEW_COM...................................................................................................................322
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX1?.............................................................................................. 323
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX1................................................................................................ 323
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX2?.............................................................................................. 323
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX2................................................................................................ 323
COM_1F2F_MEASMODE?.............................................................................................323
COM_1F2F_MEASMODE...............................................................................................323
COM_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?....................................................................................... 324
COM_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP......................................................................................... 324
COM_DEMOD_BW_1F?................................................................................................ 324
COM_DEMOD_BW_1F.................................................................................................. 324
COM_DEMOD_BW_2F?................................................................................................ 324
COM_DEMOD_BW_2F.................................................................................................. 324
COM_TONEFREQ_1K01K2?..........................................................................................324
COM_TONEFREQ_1K01K2............................................................................................324
COM_TRIG_EDGE?...................................................................................................... 325
COM_TRIG_EDGE........................................................................................................ 325
COM_TRIG_SOURCE?..................................................................................................325
COM_TRIG_SOURCE................................................................................................... 325
RF_MHZ_5DECIMALS?................................................................................................. 325
RF_MHZ_5DECIMALS................................................................................................... 325
MODE_COM
This command switches the instrument to the "COM" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
VIEW_COM?
VIEW_COM
Gets or sets the view in "COM" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 322

COM Mode
Parameters:
<View type> MAIN_1_0kHz | MAIN_1_2kHz | REC
Available views for COM mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX1?
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX1 <Freq>
Gets or Sets the demodulator upper frequency offset in"COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> Dmodulator upper frequency offset.
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "TX1 Offset/TX2 Offset" on page 125
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX2?
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX2 <Freq>
Gets or Sets the demodulator lower frequency offset in"COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> Dmodulator lower frequency offset.
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "TX1 Offset/TX2 Offset" on page 125
COM_1F2F_MEASMODE? <Mode>
COM_1F2F_MEASMODE <Mode>
Parameters:
<Mode> 1F
One frequency only is measured, namely the nominal frequency,
2F
Two frequencies are measured at the same time. Which fre-
quencies are measured is configured by the
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX1 and AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX2 commands.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 323

COM Mode
COM_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP? <StepSize>
COM_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP <StepSize>
Gets or sets the default RF frequency step size in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
*RST: 50_KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
COM_DEMOD_BW_1F?
COM_DEMOD_BW_1F <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the 1F demodulator bandwidth in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "BW 1FBW 2F" on page 127
COM_DEMOD_BW_2F?
COM_DEMOD_BW_2F <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the 2F demodulator bandwidth in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "BW 1FBW 2F" on page 127
COM_TONEFREQ_1K01K2? <Frequency>
COM_TONEFREQ_1K01K2 <Frequency>
Gets or sets the tone frequency to measure AM and distortion values in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Tone frequency
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 324

COM Mode
Manual operation: See "Tone Freq." on page 125
COM_TRIG_EDGE? <TrigEdge>
COM_TRIG_EDGE <TrigEdge>
down to it in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
POSITIVE
NEGATIVE
Return values:
<State> READY.
COM_TRIG_SOURCE? <TrigSource>
COM_TRIG_SOURCE <TrigSource>
Gets or sets the trigger source in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
OFF
TIME
time trigger
EXT
external trigger
Return values:
<State> READY.
RF_MHZ_5DECIMALS?
RF_MHZ_5DECIMALS <Frequency>
Gets or sets RF frequency in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Frequency> RF frequency
Default unit: MHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 325

COM Mode
10.5.2 Retrieving COM Results
The following commands are required to retrieve results from COM measurements.
GET_K2_1K0................................................................................................................ 326
GET_K2_1K2................................................................................................................ 327
GET_K3_1K0................................................................................................................ 327
GET_K3_1K2................................................................................................................ 327
GET_K4_1K0................................................................................................................ 327
GET_K4_1K2................................................................................................................ 327
GET_MEASFREQ..........................................................................................................327
GET_ONE_AMFREQ _1_0............................................................................................. 328
GET_ONE_AMFREQ_1_2..............................................................................................328
GET_ONE_AMMOD_1_0............................................................................................... 328
GET_ONE_AMMOD_1_2............................................................................................... 328
GET_ONE_SINAD _1_0................................................................................................. 328
GET_ONE_SINAD_1_2..................................................................................................328
GET_ONE_THD _1_0.................................................................................................... 329
GET_ONE_THD_1_2..................................................................................................... 329
GET_THD_1K0..............................................................................................................329
GET_THD_1K2..............................................................................................................329
GET_TX1_AMFREQ_1_0............................................................................................... 329
GET_TX1_AMFREQ_1_2............................................................................................... 330
GET_TX1_AMMOD_1_0................................................................................................ 330
GET_TX1_AMMOD_1_2................................................................................................ 330
GET_TX1_LEVEL.......................................................................................................... 330
GET_TX1_MEASFREQ ................................................................................................. 330
GET_TX1_SINAD_1_0................................................................................................... 330
GET_TX1_SINAD_1_2................................................................................................... 331
GET_TX1_THD_1_0...................................................................................................... 331
GET_TX1_THD_1_2...................................................................................................... 331
GET_TX2_AMFREQ_1_0............................................................................................... 331
GET_TX2_AMFREQ_1_2............................................................................................... 331
GET_TX2_AMMOD_1_0................................................................................................ 332
GET_TX2_AMMOD_1_2................................................................................................ 332
GET_TX2_LEVEL.......................................................................................................... 332
GET_TX2_MEASFREQ ................................................................................................. 332
GET_TX2_SINAD_1_0................................................................................................... 332
GET_TX2_SINAD_1_2................................................................................................... 332
GET_TX2_THD_1_0...................................................................................................... 333
GET_TX2_THD_1_2...................................................................................................... 333
GET_K2_1K0
This command queries the K2 distortion parameter of 1.0 kHz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> K2 distortion value of 1.0 kHz signal
Manual operation: See "K2 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz" on page 122
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 326

COM Mode
GET_K2_1K2
Return values:
GET_K3_1K0
Return values:
GET_K3_1K2
Return values:
GET_K4_1K0
Return values:
GET_K4_1K2
Return values:
GET_MEASFREQ
Query the measured value of delta RF carrier frequency to set RF frequency in "COM"
mode.
Return values:
<freq> Delta between measured and set RF frequency.
Default unit: kHz
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 327

COM Mode
GET_ONE_AMFREQ _1_0
Query the AF frequency of 1F 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Return values:
<Freq> AF frequency of 1F 1.0 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See "Freq 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz" on page 122
GET_ONE_AMFREQ_1_2
Query the AF frequency of 1F 1.2 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Return values:
<Freq> AF frequency of 1F 1.2 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_ONE_AMMOD_1_0
Query the AM modulation depth of the 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Return values:
<ModDepth> AM modulation depth
Default unit: %
Manual operation: See "AM 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz" on page 122
GET_ONE_AMMOD_1_2
Query the AM modulation depth of 1.2 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Return values:
<ModDepth> AM modulation depth
Default unit: %
GET_ONE_SINAD _1_0
Query the SINAD frequency of 1F 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Return values:
<Freq> SINAD frequency of 1F 1.0 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_ONE_SINAD_1_2
Query the SINAD frequency of 1F 1.2 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 328

COM Mode
Return values:
<Freq> SINAD frequency of 1F 1.2 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_ONE_THD _1_0
Query the THD value of 1F 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Return values:
<Freq> THD value of 1F 1.0 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_ONE_THD_1_2
Query the THD value of 1F 1.2 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Return values:
<Freq> THD value of 1F 1.2 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_THD_1K0
This command queries the THD distortion parameter of 1.0 kHz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> THD distortion value of 1.0 kHz signal
Manual operation: See "THD 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz" on page 123
GET_THD_1K2
This command queries the THD distortion parameter of 1.2 kHz signal.
Return values:
<[%]> THD distortion value of 1.2 kHz signal
Manual operation: See "THD 1.0 kHz/ 1.2 kHz" on page 123
GET_TX1_AMFREQ_1_0
Query the AF upper frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> AF upper frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 329

COM Mode
GET_TX1_AMFREQ_1_2
Query the AF upper frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> AF upper frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_TX1_AMMOD_1_0
Query the TX1 AM modulation depth of 2F 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<ModDepth> TX1 AM modulation depth of 2F 1.0 kHz signal.
Default unit: %
GET_TX1_AMMOD_1_2
Parameters:
Default unit: %
GET_TX1_LEVEL
Query TX1 RF signal level in "COM" mode.
Return values:
<level> RF signal level of TX1
Default unit: dBm
GET_TX1_MEASFREQ
Query the measured value of delta TX1 RF carrier frequency to set RF frequency in
"COM" mode.
Return values:
<freq> Delta between measured TX1 frequency and set RF frequency.
Default unit: kHz
GET_TX1_SINAD_1_0
Query the SINAD of upper frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 330

COM Mode
Parameters:
<Freq> SINAD of upper frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_TX1_SINAD_1_2
Query the SINAD of upper frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> SINAD of upper frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_TX1_THD_1_0
Query the THD of upper frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> THD of upper frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_TX1_THD_1_2
Query the THD of upper frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> THD of upper frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_TX2_AMFREQ_1_0
Query the AF lower frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> AF lower frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_TX2_AMFREQ_1_2
Query the AF lower frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> AF lower frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 331

COM Mode
GET_TX2_AMMOD_1_0
Parameters:
Default unit: %
GET_TX2_AMMOD_1_2
Parameters:
Default unit: %
GET_TX2_LEVEL
Query TX2 RF signal level in "COM" mode.
Return values:
<level> RF signal level of TX2
Default unit: dBm
GET_TX2_MEASFREQ
Query the measured value of delta TX2 RF carrier frequency to set RF frequency in
"COM" mode.
Return values:
<freq> Delta between measured TX2 frequency and set RF frequency.
Default unit: kHz
GET_TX2_SINAD_1_0
Query the SINAD of lower frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> SINAD of lower frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_TX2_SINAD_1_2
Query the SINAD of lower frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 332

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
Parameters:
<Freq> SINAD of lower frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_TX2_THD_1_0
Query the THD of lower frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> THD of lower frequency of 2F 1.0 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
GET_TX2_THD_1_2
Query the THD of lower frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal in "COM" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> THD of lower frequency of 2F 1.2 kHz signal.
Default unit: Hz
10.6 GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode

GBAS/ SCAT-I mode. They are only available if the R&S EVSG-K4 (GBAS) or
R&S EVSG-K5 (SCAT-I) option is installed.
● Configuring GBAS/ SCAT-I Measurements...........................................................333
● Retrieving GBAS/ SCAT-I Results.........................................................................337
10.6.1 Configuring GBAS/ SCAT-I Measurements
The following commands are required to configure GBAS/ SCAT-I measurements.

Useful commands for configuring GBAS measurements described elsewhere:
● MODE_GBAS on page 336
● GBAS:GETMEAS on page 339
Remote commands exclusive to GBAS/ SCAT-I measurements

GBAS:ATTMODE?......................................................................................................... 334
GBAS:ATTMODE...........................................................................................................334
GBAS:BUFFER_RUNPAUSE?........................................................................................ 334
GBAS:BUFFER_RUNPAUSE..........................................................................................334
GBAS:EVM_ANGLE_NORM?......................................................................................... 335
GBAS:EVM_ANGLE_NORM...........................................................................................335
GBAS:FMEAS?............................................................................................................. 335
GBAS:FREQRF?........................................................................................................... 335
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 333

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
GBAS:FREQRF............................................................................................................. 335
GBAS:LEV?.................................................................................................................. 336
LA?.............................................................................................................................. 336
MODE_GBAS................................................................................................................336
GBAS:SCREENVIEW ?..................................................................................................336
GBAS:SCREENVIEW ....................................................................................................336
GBAS:SEQN_SLOT?..................................................................................................... 336
GBAS:SEQN_SLOT.......................................................................................................336
SETUP:GBAS_PPS_SOURCE?......................................................................................337
SETUP:GBAS_PPS_SOURCE?......................................................................................337
GBAS:ATTMODE?
GBAS:ATTMODE <Mode>
Selects the attenuation of the "GBAS" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO
Automatic attentuation
LN
Low noise attenuation
NORM
Normal attenuation
LD
Low distortion attenuation
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "RF Mode" on page 81
See "RF Att" on page 191
GBAS:BUFFER_RUNPAUSE? <State>
GBAS:BUFFER_RUNPAUSE <State>
This command determines whether the display is currently being updated.
Note that data recording and streaming continue regardless of the display update sta-
tus.
Parameters:
<State> RUN
Display is updated continuously.
PAUSE
Display is temporarily not updated.
Example:
Manual operation: See "Display Update Status (Mode)" on page 176
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 334

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
GBAS:EVM_ANGLE_NORM? <Mode>
GBAS:EVM_ANGLE_NORM <Mode>
Determines the mode of EVM calculation for baseband input in "GBAS" mode.
Parameters:
<State> READY.
Query parameters:
<Mode> ANGLE | NORM
ANGLE
Only angle deviations are considered in EVM calculation.
NORM
Both angle and ampltiude deviation are considered in EVM cal-
culation.
Manual operation: See "EVM RMS" on page 181
See "EVM Mode" on page 192
GBAS:FMEAS? <Slot>
This command queries the offset of the measured carrier frequency from the nominal
frequency in "GBAS" mode.
Parameters:
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
Selects the slot for which results are queried.
Return values:
<Offset> Measured offset
Default unit: kHz
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Carrier frequency offset (Offs. [kHz])" on page 181
GBAS:FREQRF?
GBAS:FREQRF <Freq>
Gets or sets the channel frequency that determines the carrier frequency at which the
GBAS measurement is performed.
Parameters:
<Freq> RF frequency
The VHF data broadcast is defined for carrier frequencies within
the range of 108.025 MHz to 117.950 MHz with a channel spac-
ing of 25 kHz.
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 335

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
Manual operation: See "Frequency (Freq)" on page 175
GBAS:LEV? <Slot>
LA? <Slot>
Queries the arithmetic average of the burst power level measured over the period of
the synchronization and ambiguity resolution field of the burst.
If no burst was detected, the arithmetic average of the noise power is returned.
Parameters:
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
Return values:
<Freq> Signal level
Default unit: dBm
Example: GBAS:LEV? 2
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Burst Level Average (Av [dBm])" on page 178
MODE_GBAS
This command starts GBAS mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
GBAS:SCREENVIEW ? <View>
GBAS:SCREENVIEW <View>
This command sets or queries the displayed measurement view in "GBAS" mode.
Parameters:
<View> SEQUENCE | FRAME | BURST | CONSTELLATION |
MESSAGE | REC
*RST: SEQUENCE
<State> READY.
GBAS:SEQN_SLOT? <Slot>
GBAS:SEQN_SLOT <Slot>
Gets or sets the slot to be displayed in the power vs. time diagram and at the top of the
results table in "GBAS" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 336

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
Parameters:
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
The slot for which results are determined.
Manual operation: See "Slot" on page 190
SETUP:GBAS_PPS_SOURCE? <Source>
SETUP:GBAS_PPS_SOURCE? <Source>
Gets or sets the source of the PPS signal required as a time reference.
Return values:
<Source> TRIG
Signal provided at the Trigger In connector
PPS SMA
Signal provided at the PPS In connector
PPS GPS
Signal provided at the RS232-GPS connector
10.6.2 Retrieving GBAS/ SCAT-I Results
The following commands are required to retrieve results from GBAS/ SCAT-I measure-
ments.
GBAS:EVM?..................................................................................................................337
GBAS:FAILEDMSGS?....................................................................................................338
GBAS:GBASBER?.........................................................................................................338
GBAS:GBASID?............................................................................................................ 338
GBAS:GETMDEF...........................................................................................................339
GBAS:GETMEAS...........................................................................................................339
GBAS:GRAPH_TOLOGG?............................................................................................. 341
GBAS:GRAPH_TOLOGG............................................................................................... 341
GBAS:MSG_TOLOGG?..................................................................................................341
GBAS:MSG_TOLOGG................................................................................................... 341
GBAS:LOGSLOTS.........................................................................................................342
GBAS:PEAKLEV?..........................................................................................................342
GBAS:PPSLOCKED?.....................................................................................................342
GBAS:RESETBER.........................................................................................................343
GBAS:STOPSTREAM.................................................................................................... 343
GBAS:STREAM.............................................................................................................343
GBAS:VALIDMSGS?......................................................................................................344
GBAS:EVM? <Slot>
Queries the error vector magnitude measured over the period of the burst.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 337

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
Query parameters:
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
Return values:
<Result> EVM
Default unit: %
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "EVM RMS" on page 181
GBAS:FAILEDMSGS? <Slot>
Queries the number of failed GBAS messages within the period of the burst.
Query parameters:
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
Return values:
<Result> integer
Number of failed messages
Default unit: None.
Usage: Query only
GBAS:GBASBER? <Slot>
Queries the bit error rate (BER) before forward error correction (FEC).
Query parameters:
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
Return values:
<Result> <bits_ok> / <bits_error>
Default unit: None.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Bit error rate (BER) before FEC" on page 182
GBAS:GBASID? <Slot>
Queries the GBAS ID. If there is more than one message inside the burst, the first
GBAS ID is displayed.
Query parameters:
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 338

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
Return values:
<ID> 4-character identifier of the ground station broadcasting the
message
Default unit: None.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "GBAS ID" on page 178
GBAS:GETMDEF <ParamSel>,<RX-board>
This command outputs the header columns for data delivered by GBAS:GETMEAS.
Parameters:
FULL
ALL
MEDIUM
SHORT
RAW
Only the non-interpreted measurement values from the bit-
stream in binary format are exported
1
RX board 1 selected
2
RX board 2 selected
1+2
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
Selects the slot for which results are exported.
Return values:
<Results> Comma-separated list of header data for the selected results.
<State> READY.
GBAS:GETMEAS <ParamSel>, <RX-board>, <Slot>

This command outputs the current measurement result for one or both RX-boards.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 339

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
For details on the parameters see Chapter 6.3.3.2, "Slot Results Table", on page 184.
Parameters:
FULL
Channel, STIOCP, Index, Date, Slot, Time,
FREQ[MHz], Lev.Av[dBm], SSID, GBAS ID,
Train.FEC, App.Dat., App.FEC, GPS_lat.,
GPS_long., GPS_alt[m], GPS_speed[km/h],
GPS_date, GPS_time, GPS_Sat, GPS_Status,
GPS_Fix, GPS_HDOP, GPS_VDOP, Temp[°C],
ATT.MODE, TrigCounter
ALL
RX, STIOCP, Index, Date, Time, Slot, FREQ[MHz],
C.Offset[kHz], Lev.Av[dBm], Lev.Pk[dBm], SSID,
EVM[%], GBAS ID, Train.FEC, App.Dat., App.FEC,
BER, Transm.Len, StartDelay[us],
GuardInterv[us], RampUp[us], BurstDur[ms],
RampDown[us], GPS_lat., GPS_long., GPS_alt[m],
GPS_speed[km/h], GPS_date, GPS_time, GPS_Sat,
GPS_Status, GPS_Fix, GPS_HDOP, GPS_VDOP,
Temp[°C], ATT.MODE, TrigCounter, RawData
MEDIUM
RX, STIOCP, Index , Time, Slot, C.Offset[kHz],
Lev.Av[dBm], GBAS ID, Train.FEC, App.Dat.,
App.FEC, GPS_lat., GPS_long., TrigCounter
SHORT
RX, Index, Time, Slot, Lev.Av[dBm], GBAS ID,
App.Dat., GPS_lat., GPS_long.
RAW
1
RX board 1 selected
2
RX board 2 selected
1+2
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 340

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
Return values:
<Results> Comma-separated list of selected results.
<State> READY.
Example: GETMEAS FULL, 1+2, 2
Returns all measurement results for slot 2 in all measurements
on both receiver boards.
Manual operation: See "Data selection (Select, GBAS/SCAT-I mode only)"
on page 220
See "Parameter" on page 220
GBAS:GRAPH_TOLOGG? <Type>
GBAS:GRAPH_TOLOGG <State>
Defines whether graphical information is stored.
Parameters:
<State> ON
Graphical information such as the time domain and constellation
values are stored.
OFF
Graphical information is not stored.
Manual operation: See "Graph Log" on page 221
GBAS:MSG_TOLOGG? <Type>
GBAS:MSG_TOLOGG <Type>
This command defines which message information is stored for each slot.
Parameters:
<Type> ALL
All message data (human-readable + bitstream) is stored
(default).
TXT
Only the human-readable, interpreted message values are
stored.
RAW
Only the decoded, non-interpreted message data from the bit-
stream in binary format is stored.
NONE
Message data is not included in the slot data record.
*RST: ALL
Manual operation: See "Msg Log" on page 220
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 341

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
GBAS:LOGSLOTS <RX-board>,<Slot>
Selects the GBAS slot to be recorded with the data recorder.
Parameters:
<RX-board> Selects the RX board for which results are exported.
1
RX board 1 selected
2
RX board 2 selected
1+2
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
Return values:
<State> READY
GBAS:PEAKLEV? <Slot>
Queries the peak burst power level measured over the period of the burst.
Query parameters:
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
Return values:
<Power> Signal level
Default unit: dBm
Example: GBAS:PEAKLEV? 2
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Slot Level Peak (Pk [dBm])" on page 181
GBAS:PPSLOCKED? <Slot>
Queries the state of the PPS synchronization.
Return values:
<Result> Unlocked
No valid PPS signal detected.
Burst Locked
Valid burst detected.
PPS Locked
Valid PPS signal detected
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 342

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
Usage: Query only

Manual operation: See "Time reference status (Time Ref.)" on page 176
GBAS:RESETBER
Resets the values for the following measurement results:
● "Bit error rate (BER) before FEC" on page 182
● "Valid Bursts (Valid B.)" on page 182
● "Failed Bursts (Failed B.)" on page 182
Parameters:
<State> READY.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Reset BER" on page 192
GBAS:STOPSTREAM
This command terminates the data stream for both RX Boards in GBAS mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
GBAS:STREAM <ParamSel>, [+MSG,] <RX Board>, <Slots>

Starts data streaming. In streaming mode, a measured data set is automatically sent to
the remote interface. One data set is provided per slot, that is: every 62.5 ms. Stream-
ing can produce large quantities of output. It is mandatory to have a fast data connec-
tion and an application that is able to handle the data.
For details on the output see Chapter 10.12.3.6, "GBAS Mode", on page 384
Parameters:
FULL
ALL
MEDIUM
SHORT
RAW
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 343

GBAS/ SCAT-I Mode
+MSG Optional: If specified, the message data is included in the data

stream, surrounded by curly brackets { }
1
RX board 1 selected
2
RX board 2 selected
1+2
<Slots> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
Selects one or more slots for which results are exported. Multi-
ple slots can be selected.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Example: GBAS:STREAM RAW,1+2,3
Sends the data for slot 3 on both receiver boards as binary data
to the USB output.
Example: GBAS:STREAM ALL,1,01234567
Outputs the evaluated data (without the message data) for all
slots on receiver board 1.
Example: GBAS:STREAM ALL+MSG,1,0
Outputs all evaluated data, including message data, for slot 0 on
receiver board 1.
GBAS:VALIDMSGS? <Slot>
Queries the number of valid GBAS messages within the period of the burst.
Query parameters:
<Slot> 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7
Return values:
<Result> integer
Number of valid messages
Default unit: None.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 344

NDB Mode
10.7 NDB Mode

NDB mode. They are only available if the R&S EVSG1-K7 option is installed.
● Configuring an NDB Measurement....................................................................... 345
● Retrieving NDB Measurement Results................................................................. 348
10.7.1 Configuring an NDB Measurement
The following commands are required to configure NDB measurements.

Useful commands for NDB measurements described elsewhere:
● RFCH on page 245
● LA? on page 244
● MEASTIME on page 245
● SQUELCH on page 258
● SETATTMODE on page 246
● Chapter 10.2.5, "Retrieving ID Results", on page 301
Remote commands exclusive to NDB measurements:

MODE_NDB..................................................................................................................345
NDB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?........................................................................................ 346
NDB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP.......................................................................................... 346
NDB_DEM_ID_BW?.......................................................................................................346
NDB_DEM_ID_BW........................................................................................................ 346
NDB_DEM_DIST_BW?.................................................................................................. 346
NDB_DEM_DIST_BW.................................................................................................... 346
NDB_EXTERNALATT_LFIN?.......................................................................................... 346
NDB_EXTERNALATT_LFIN............................................................................................346
NDB_LFIN_IMPEDENCE?..............................................................................................347
NDB_LFIN_IMPEDANCE................................................................................................347
NDB_UNIT_LEVEL?...................................................................................................... 347
NDB_UNIT_LEVEL........................................................................................................ 347
VIEW_NDB?..................................................................................................................347
VIEW_NDB................................................................................................................... 347
MODE_NDB
This command switches the instrument to the "NDB" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 345

NDB Mode
NDB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP? <StepSize>
NDB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP <StepSize>
Gets or sets the default frequency step size in "NDB"mode.
Parameters:
<StepSize> 0.1_KHZ | 1.0_KHZ | 10_KHZ
*RST: 1.0_KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
NDB_DEM_ID_BW? <Bandwidth>
NDB_DEM_ID_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the ID demodulator Bandwidth in "NDB" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
NDB_DEM_DIST_BW? <Bandwidth>
NDB_DEM_DIST_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the distortion demodulator bandwidth in "NDB" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "IF BW Dist" on page 137
NDB_EXTERNALATT_LFIN? <Attenuation>
NDB_EXTERNALATT_LFIN <Attenuation>
Gets or sets the external attenuation of the active receiver board for LF input in "NDB"
mode.
Parameters:
Default unit: dB
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 346

NDB Mode
Return values:
<State> READY.
NDB_LFIN_IMPEDENCE? <Impedance>
NDB_LFIN_IMPEDANCE <Impedance>
Gets or sets the impedance for the LF In input in "NDB" mode.
Parameters:
<Impedance> 50_OHM | 20_KOHM
Sets the impedance.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "LF Imp." on page 137
NDB_UNIT_LEVEL? <Unit>
NDB_UNIT_LEVEL <Unit>
This command sets the level unit in "NDB" mode.
Parameters:
<Unit> dBm | dBuV
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Level Unit" on page 135
VIEW_NDB? <View type>

VIEW_NDB <View type>
Gets or sets the view in "NDB" mode. See Chapter 4.5.2, "NDB Measurement and
Results", on page 128 for details.
Parameters:
<View type> ID
ID view
DIST
Distortion view
REC
Recording view
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 347

NDB Mode
10.7.2 Retrieving NDB Measurement Results
The following commands are required to retrieve results from NDB measurements.
● FMEAS on page 308
Remote commands exclusive to NDB results:

NDB_AMFREQ..............................................................................................................348
NDB_AMMOD............................................................................................................... 348
NDB_CARLEV_CHANGE............................................................................................... 348
ID_CODE......................................................................................................................349
NDB_IDFREQ_400_1020............................................................................................... 349
NDB_K2_PCT............................................................................................................... 349
NDB_K3_PCT............................................................................................................... 349
NDB_K4_PCT............................................................................................................... 349
NDB_POWSUPPL_FC................................................................................................... 349
NDB_THD_PCT.............................................................................................................350
NDB_AMFREQ
This command queries the AM modulation frequency of the ID in "NDB" mode.
Return values:
<[Hz]> AM modulation frequency of the ID
NDB_AMMOD
This command queries the AM modulation of the identifier in "NDB" mode.
Return values:
<[%]> Modulation depth of the identifier
See "AM 400/1020 Hz" on page 133
NDB_CARLEV_CHANGE
Queries the variance in power level during ID transmission in "NDB" mode.
Return values:
<PowerVariance> Peak-to-peak power level difference during ID transmission.
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See "Carr Lev Change" on page 131
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 348

NDB Mode
ID_CODE <ID>
This command queries the ID of the signal in "NDB" mode.
Parameters:
<ID> three or four characters
NDB_IDFREQ_400_1020 <Freq>
This command gets or sets the frequency of the ID in "NDB" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> 400HZ | 1020HZ
NDB_K2_PCT
This command queries the K2 distortion parameter of an NDB signal.
Return values:
<[%]> K2 distortion value of an NDB signal
Manual operation: See "K2 400/1020 Hz" on page 133
NDB_K3_PCT
Return values:
NDB_K4_PCT
Return values:
NDB_POWSUPPL_FC
Queries the distortion of the power supply frequency component in "NDB" mode.
Parameters:
<Power> Distortion caused by the power supply frequency component
Default unit: percent
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 349

RF Spectrum Mode
Manual operation: See "Unwanted AM 30 to 120 Hz" on page 133
NDB_THD_PCT
This command queries the THD distortion parameter of an NDB signal.
Return values:
<[%]> THD distortion value of an NDB signal
Manual operation: See "THD 400/1020 Hz" on page 133
10.8 RF Spectrum Mode

RF Spectrum mode. They are only available if the R&S EVSG-K10 option is installed.
● Configuring RF Spectrum Measurements.............................................................350
● Retrieving RF Spectrum Results...........................................................................354
10.8.1 Configuring RF Spectrum Measurements
The following commands are required to configure RF Spectrum measurements.

MODE_FSCAN..............................................................................................................351
FSCAN_ATTMODE?...................................................................................................... 351
FSCAN_ATTMODE........................................................................................................351
FSCAN_FREQCENTER?............................................................................................... 351
FSCAN_FREQCENTER................................................................................................. 351
FSCAN_FREQSPAN?.................................................................................................... 351
FSCAN_FREQSPAN......................................................................................................351
FSCAN_FREQSTART?.................................................................................................. 352
FSCAN_FREQSTART.................................................................................................... 352
FSCAN_FREQSTOP?....................................................................................................352
FSCAN_FREQSTOP......................................................................................................352
FSCAN_GRID_YRANGE_DB?........................................................................................352
FSCAN_GRID_YRANGE_DB..........................................................................................352
FSCAN_REFLEVEL?..................................................................................................... 352
FSCAN_REFLEVEL.......................................................................................................352
FSCAN_RESBW_AUTO?............................................................................................... 353
FSCAN_RESBW_AUTO.................................................................................................353
FSCAN_RES_BW?........................................................................................................ 353
FSCAN_RES_BW..........................................................................................................353
FSCAN_TRACE_MODE?............................................................................................... 354
FSCAN_TRACE_MODE................................................................................................. 354
FSCAN_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT?.................................................................................... 354
FSCAN_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT...................................................................................... 354
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 350

RF Spectrum Mode
MODE_FSCAN
This command switches the instrument to the "RF Spectrum" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
FSCAN_ATTMODE?
FSCAN_ATTMODE <Attenuation mode>
This command gets or selects the attenuation mode in the "RF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Attenuation mode> COUPLED
Coupled attenuation
LN
NORM
Normal attenuation (0 dB attenuation)
LD
Low distance attenuation
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "RF Mode" on page 81
FSCAN_FREQCENTER?
FSCAN_FREQCENTER <Frequency>
This command gets or sets the center frequency in "RF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Frequency> FSCAN CENTER frequency
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Center" on page 141
FSCAN_FREQSPAN?
FSCAN_FREQSPAN <Frequency>
This command gets or sets the span frequency in "RF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Frequency> FSCAN SPAN frequency
Default unit: kHz
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 351

RF Spectrum Mode
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Span" on page 141
FSCAN_FREQSTART?
FSCAN_FREQSTART <Frequency>
This command gets or sets the start frequency in "RF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Frequency> FSCAN START frequency
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Start" on page 141
FSCAN_FREQSTOP?
FSCAN_FREQSTOP <Frequency>
This command gets or sets the stop frequency in "RF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Frequency> FSCAN STOP frequency
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Stop" on page 141
FSCAN_GRID_YRANGE_DB? <Range>
FSCAN_GRID_YRANGE_DB <Range>
Gets or selects the range of the y-axis in "RF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Range> 10_DB | 20_DB | 30_DB | 40_DB | 50_DB | 60_DB | 80_DB |
100_DB | 120_DB
Return values:
<State> READY.
FSCAN_REFLEVEL?
FSCAN_REFLEVEL <Level>
This command gets or sets the reference level in "RF Spectrum" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 352

RF Spectrum Mode
Parameters:
<Level> FSCAN Reference Level
Default unit: dBm
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Ref Level" on page 142
FSCAN_RESBW_AUTO?
FSCAN_RESBW_AUTO <Mode>
This command gets or sets the mode of specifiying the resolution bandwidth in "RF
Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO
Set resolution bandwidth automatically.
MANUAL
Set resolution bandwidth manually.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Resolution Bandwidth (RBW Mode/Res BW)" on page 142
FSCAN_RES_BW?
FSCAN_RES_BW <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the resolution bandwidth in "RF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 15K | 7K5 | 3K75 | 1K87 | 937 | 468 | 234 | 117 | 12K | 6K | 3K |
1K5 | 750 | 375 | 187 | 94 | 47 | 23.4 | 11.7 | 1K2 | 600 | 300 |
150 | 75 | 37.4 | 18.7 | 9.4 | 4.7 | 2.3
FSCAN resolution bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Resolution Bandwidth (RBW Mode/Res BW)" on page 142
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 353

RF Spectrum Mode
FSCAN_TRACE_MODE?
FSCAN_TRACE_MODE <Trace mode>
Gets or selects the trace mode of the "RF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Trace Mode> CLWR
Overwrite mode (default): the trace is overwritten by each sweep
AVRG
The average is determined over several sweeps
The number of averaging procedures is defined by
FFT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT on page 366.
MAXHOLD
The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis-
The number of evaluated sweeps is defined by
RMS
The RMS value for each trace point over several sweeps is
determined and displayed.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Trace mode" on page 143
FSCAN_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT?
FSCAN_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT <trace average count>
Gets or sets the trace average count of the "RF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Trace average Range: 0 to 100
count>
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Average Count" on page 143
10.8.2 Retrieving RF Spectrum Results
The following commands are required to retrieve results from RF Spectrum measure-
ments.
FSCAN_GETSPECT...................................................................................................... 355
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 354

IF Spectrum Mode
FSCAN_GETSPECT
All measurement values are returned as one comma separated string in "RF Spec-
trum" mode.
Parameters:
<Trace Data> Measurement values
Default unit: dBm
<State> READY.
10.9 IF Spectrum Mode

IF Spectrum mode. They are only available if the R&S EVSG-K10 option is installed.
● Configuring IF Spectrum Measurements.............................................................. 355
● Retrieving IF Spectrum Results............................................................................ 359
10.9.1 Configuring IF Spectrum Measurements
The following commands are required to configure IF Spectrum measurements.

MODE_IFSPECT........................................................................................................... 355
IFSPECT_ATTMODE..................................................................................................... 356
IFSPECT_FREQRF?......................................................................................................356
IFSPECT_FREQRF....................................................................................................... 356
IFSPECT_FREQ_SPAN?................................................................................................356
IFSPECT_FREQ_SPAN................................................................................................. 356
IFSPECT_GRID_YRANGE_DB?..................................................................................... 357
IFSPECT_GRID_YRANGE_DB.......................................................................................357
IFSPECT_REFLEVEL?.................................................................................................. 357
IFSPECT_REFLEVEL.................................................................................................... 357
IFSPECT_RES_BW?..................................................................................................... 357
IFSPECT_RES_BW....................................................................................................... 357
IFSPECT_RESBW_AUTO?............................................................................................ 358
IFSPECT_RESBW_AUTO.............................................................................................. 358
IFSPECT_TRACE_MODE?............................................................................................ 358
IFSPECT_TRACE_MODE.............................................................................................. 358
IFSPECT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT?..................................................................................359
IFSPECT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT....................................................................................359
MODE_IFSPECT
This command switches the instrument to the "IF Spectrum" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 355

IF Spectrum Mode
Return values:
<State> READY.
IFSPECT_ATTMODE <Mode>
Selects the attenuation of the "IF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO
Automatic attentuation
LN
NORM
Normal attenuation
LD
Low distortion attenuation
<State> READY.
IFSPECT_FREQRF?
IFSPECT_FREQRF <Freq>
Gets or dets RF frequency in "IF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> RF frequency
Default unit: kHz
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "RF Freq" on page 146
IFSPECT_FREQ_SPAN?
IFSPECT_FREQ_SPAN <Freq>
Gets or sets the span frequency in "IF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> Span frequency
Default unit: kHz
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Span" on page 146
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 356

IF Spectrum Mode
IFSPECT_GRID_YRANGE_DB? <Range>
IFSPECT_GRID_YRANGE_DB <Range>
Gets or selects the range of the y-axis in "IF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Range> 10_DB | 20_DB | 30_DB | 40_DB | 50_DB | 60_DB | 80_DB |
100_DB | 120_DB
Return values:
<State> READY.
IFSPECT_REFLEVEL?
IFSPECT_REFLEVEL <Frequency>
Gets or sets the reference level of the "IF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> Ref Level
Default unit: dBm
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Ref Level" on page 147
IFSPECT_RES_BW?
IFSPECT_RES_BW <Bandwidth>
Gets or sets the resolution bandwidth for "IF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 200K | 100K | 50K | 25K | 12K5 | 6K2 | 3K1 | 1K6 | 800 | 240K |
120K | 60K | 30K | 15K | 7K5 | 3K75 | 1K87 | 937 | 468 | 234 |
117 | 12K | 6K | 3K | 1K5 | 750 | 375 | 187 | 94 | 47 | 23.4 | 11.7 |
1K2 | 600 | 300 | 150 | 75 | 37.4 | 18.7 | 9.4 | 4.7 | 2.3 | 120.0 |
60.0 | 30.0 | 15.0 | 7.5 | 3.7 | 1.9 | 0.9 | 0.5
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "RBW" on page 146
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 357

IF Spectrum Mode
IFSPECT_RESBW_AUTO?
IFSPECT_RESBW_AUTO <Mode>
This command gets or sets the mode of specifiying the resolution bandwidth in "IF
Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO
MANUAL
Return values:
<State> READY.
IFSPECT_TRACE_MODE?
IFSPECT_TRACE_MODE <Trace mode>
Gets or selects the trace mode of the "IF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Trace Mode> CLWR
AVRG
MAXHOLD
RMS
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 358

AF Spectrum Mode
IFSPECT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT?
IFSPECT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT <trace average count>
Gets or sets the trace average count of the "IF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
count>
Return values:
<State> READY.
10.9.2 Retrieving IF Spectrum Results
The following commands are required to retrieve results from IF Spectrum measure-
ments.
IFSPECT_GETSPECT................................................................................................... 359
IFSPECT_GETSPECT
All measurement values are returned as one comma separated string in "IF Spectrum"
mode.
Parameters:
<Trace Data> Measurement values
Default unit: dBm
<State> READY.
10.10 AF Spectrum Mode

AF Spectrum mode. They are only available if the R&S EVSG-K11 option is installed.
● Configuring AF Spectrum Measurements............................................................. 359
● Retrieving AF Spectrum Results........................................................................... 366
10.10.1 Configuring AF Spectrum Measurements
The following commands are required to configure AF Spectrum measurements.

MODE_FFT...................................................................................................................360
FFT_ATTMODE?........................................................................................................... 360
FFT_ATTMODE.............................................................................................................360
FFT_BB_AF_BW_KHZ?................................................................................................. 361
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 359

AF Spectrum Mode
FFT_BB_AF_BW_KHZ................................................................................................... 361
FFT_BB_IF_BW_KHZ?.................................................................................................. 361
FFT_BB_IF_BW_KHZ.................................................................................................... 361
FFT_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV?........................................................................................ 362
FFT_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV.......................................................................................... 362
FFT_FREQ_CENTER?...................................................................................................362
FFT_FREQ_CENTER.................................................................................................... 362
FFT_FREQ_SPAN?....................................................................................................... 362
FFT_FREQ_SPAN......................................................................................................... 362
FFT_FREQ_START?......................................................................................................362
FFT_FREQ_START....................................................................................................... 362
FFT_FREQSTOP?......................................................................................................... 363
FFT_FREQSTOP...........................................................................................................363
FFT_FREQRF?............................................................................................................. 363
FFT_FREQRF............................................................................................................... 363
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_DB?.............................................................................................363
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_DB...............................................................................................363
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_V?............................................................................................... 364
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_V................................................................................................. 364
FFT_IF_BW_KHZ?.........................................................................................................364
FFT_IF_BW_KHZ.......................................................................................................... 364
FFT_RESBW_AUTO?.................................................................................................... 364
FFT_RESBW_AUTO......................................................................................................364
FFT_RESBW_FIX_KHZ?................................................................................................365
FFT_RESBW_FIX_KHZ..................................................................................................365
FFT_RFLF_INPUT?....................................................................................................... 365
FFT_RFLF_INPUT.........................................................................................................365
FFT_TRACE_MODE?.................................................................................................... 365
FFT_TRACEMODE........................................................................................................365
FFT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT?......................................................................................... 366
FFT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT........................................................................................... 366
MODE_FFT
This command switches the instrument to the "AF Spectrum" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
FFT_ATTMODE?
FFT_ATTMODE <Mode>
This command selects the attenuation mode of the "AF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> COUPLED
Coupled attenuation
LN
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 360

AF Spectrum Mode
NORM
LD
Return values:
<State> READY.
Example: FFT_ATTMODE LD
FFT_BB_AF_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
FFT_BB_AF_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the bandwidth for LF input (AF mode) in "AF Spectrum"
mode.
Parameters:
25KHZ
IF bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "AF In BW" on page 154
FFT_BB_IF_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
FFT_BB_IF_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the IF demodulation bandwidth for AM input in "AF Spec-
trum" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
lf bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "IF BW AM" on page 154
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 361

AF Spectrum Mode
FFT_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV? <Power>
FFT_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV <Power>
This command gets or sets the reference power for LF input in "AF Spectrum" mode.
This value is used to determine the modulation depth and corresponds to the DC
power of the AF signal.
Parameters:
Default unit: V
Return values:
<State> READY.
FFT_FREQ_CENTER?
FFT_FREQ_CENTER <Frequency>
Gets or sets the FFT center frequency in "AF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Value of the FFT center frequency.
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "AF Center" on page 153
FFT_FREQ_SPAN?
FFT_FREQ_SPAN <Frequency>
Gets or sets the FFT span frequency in "AF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Value of the FFT span frequency.
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "AF Span" on page 153
FFT_FREQ_START?
FFT_FREQ_START <Frequency>
Gets or sets the FFT start frequency in "AF Spectrum" mode.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 362

AF Spectrum Mode
Parameters:
<Frequency> Value of the FFT start frequency.
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "AF Start" on page 153
FFT_FREQSTOP?
FFT_FREQSTOP <Frequency>
Gets or sets the FFT stop frequency in "AF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Value of the FFT Stop frequency.
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "AF Stop" on page 153
FFT_FREQRF?
FFT_FREQRF <Freq>
Gets or Sets RF frequency in "AF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Freq> FFT RF frequency
Default unit: <kHz>
Return values:
<State> READY.
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_DB? <Range>
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_DB <Range>
Gets or selects the range of the y-axis in "AF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Range> 10_DB | 20_DB | 50_DB | 100_DB
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Y-Range" on page 154
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 363

AF Spectrum Mode
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_V? <Range>
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_V <Range>
Gets or selects the range of the y-axis in V in "AF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Range> 100_mV | 200_mV | 500_mV | 1_V | 2_V | 5_V
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Y Range" on page 156
FFT_IF_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
FFT_IF_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the IF demodulation bandwidth for RX input in "AF Spec-
trum" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
RX bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
FFT_RESBW_AUTO? <Mode>
FFT_RESBW_AUTO <Mode>
This command gets or sets the mode of specifiying the resolution bandwidth in "aF
Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO
MANUAL
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 364

AF Spectrum Mode
FFT_RESBW_FIX_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
FFT_RESBW_FIX_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the resolution bandwidth for RX input in "AF Spectrum"
mode.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 100K | 50K | 25K | 12K5 | 6K2 | 3K1 | 1K6 | 800 | 240K | 120K |
60K | 30K | 15K | 7K5 | 3K75 | 1K87 | 937 | 468 | 234 | 117 |
12K | 6K | 3K | 1K5 | 750 | 375 | 187 | 94 | 47 | 23.4 | 11.7 | 1K2 |
600 | 300 | 150 | 75 | 37.4 | 18.7 | 9.4 | 4.7 | 2.3 | 120.0 | 60.0 |
30.0 | 15.0 | 7.5 | 3.7 | 1.9 | 0.9 | 0.5
RX input resolution bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
FFT_RFLF_INPUT? <Type>
FFT_RFLF_INPUT <Type>
Gets or sets the type of input for the "AF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Type> RX_IN
RX input
LF_IN
Baseband input
Return values:
<State> READY.
FFT_TRACE_MODE?
FFT_TRACEMODE <Trace Mode>
Gets or sets the trace mode of the "AF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Trace Mode> CLWR
AVRG
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 365

AF Spectrum Mode
MAXHOLD
RMS
Return values:
<State> READY.
FFT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT?
FFT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT <trace average count>
Gets or sets the trace average count of the "AF Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
count>
Return values:
<State> READY.
10.10.2 Retrieving AF Spectrum Results
The following commands are required to retrieve results from AF Spectrum measure-
ments.
FFT_GETSPECT........................................................................................................... 366
FFT_GETSPECT
All measurement values in dBm are returned as one comma-separated string.
Return values:
All values Shows all spectrum values.
Manual operation: See "IF spectrum preview" on page 64
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 366

AF Time Domain Mode
10.11 AF Time Domain Mode

AF Time domain mode. They are only available if the R&S EVSG-K11 option is instal-
led.
● Configuring AF Time Domain Measurements....................................................... 367
● Retrieving RF Spectrum Results...........................................................................372
10.11.1 Configuring AF Time Domain Measurements
The following commands are required to configure AF Time Domain measurements.

MODE_SCOPE............................................................................................................. 367
SCOPE_ATTMODE........................................................................................................368
SCOPE_BB_AF_BW_KHZ?............................................................................................368
SCOPE_BB_AF_BW_KHZ..............................................................................................368
SCOPE_BB_IF_BW_KHZ?............................................................................................. 368
SCOPE_BB_IF_BW_KHZ...............................................................................................368
SCOPE_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV?...................................................................................369
SCOPE_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV.....................................................................................369
SCOPE_FREQRF?........................................................................................................ 369
SCOPE_FREQRF..........................................................................................................369
SCOPE_IF_BW_KHZ?................................................................................................... 369
SCOPE_IF_BW_KHZ..................................................................................................... 369
SCOPE_REFLEVEL?.....................................................................................................370
SCOPE_REFLEVEL.......................................................................................................370
SCOPE_RESBW_FIX_KHZ?.......................................................................................... 370
SCOPE_RESBW_FIX_KHZ............................................................................................ 370
SCOPE_RFLF_INPUT?..................................................................................................370
SCOPE_RFLF_INPUT................................................................................................... 370
SCOPE_TIMEDIV_RF?.................................................................................................. 371
SCOPE_TIMEDIV_RF....................................................................................................371
SCOPE_TRIGLEVEL_RFPCT?.......................................................................................371
SCOPE_TRIGLEVEL_RFPCT.........................................................................................371
SCOPE_TRIGSLOPE?...................................................................................................372
SCOPE_TRIGSLOPE.....................................................................................................372
MODE_SCOPE
This command switches the instrument to the "AF Time Domain" mode.
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 367

AF Time Domain Mode
SCOPE_ATTMODE <Mode>
This command selects the attenuation mode of the "AF Time Domain" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> COUPLED
Coupled attenuation
LN
NORM
LD
Return values:
<State> READY.
Example: SCOPE_ATTMODE LD
SCOPE_BB_AF_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
SCOPE_BB_AF_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the bandwidth for LF input in "AF Time Domain" mode.
Parameters:
25KHZ
IF bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "AF In BW" on page 154
SCOPE_BB_IF_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
SCOPE_BB_IF_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the IF demodulation bandwidth for LF input in "AF Time
Domain" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
RX bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 368

AF Time Domain Mode
Return values:
<State> READY.
SCOPE_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV? <Power>
SCOPE_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV <Power>
This command gets or sets the reference power for LF input in "AF Time Domain"
mode. This value is used to determine the modulation depth and corresponds to the
DC power of the AF signal.
Parameters:
Default unit: V
Return values:
<State> READY.
SCOPE_FREQRF?
SCOPE_FREQRF <Freq>
This command gets or sets the RF frequency in "AF Time Domain ".
Parameters:
<Freq> RF frequency
Default unit: <kHz>
Return values:
<State> READY.
SCOPE_IF_BW_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
SCOPE_IF_BW_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the bandwidth for RX input in "AF Time Domain" mode.
Parameters:
50KHZ
RX bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 369

AF Time Domain Mode
SCOPE_REFLEVEL?
SCOPE_REFLEVEL <RefLev>
This command gets or sets the reference level of the "AF Time Domain" mode.
Parameters:
<RefLev> Set the reference level.
Default unit: <dBm>
Return values:
<State> READY.
SCOPE_RESBW_FIX_KHZ? <Bandwidth>
SCOPE_RESBW_FIX_KHZ <Bandwidth>
This command gets or sets the resolution bandwidth for RX input in "AF Time Domain"
mode.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 200K | 100K | 50K | 25K | 12K5 | 6K2 | 3K1 | 1K6 | 800 | 240K |
120K | 60K | 30K | 15K | 7K5 | 3K75 | 1K87 | 937 | 468 | 234 |
117 | 12K | 6K | 3K | 1K5 | 750 | 375 | 187 | 94 | 47 | 23.4 | 11.7 |
1K2 | 600 | 300 | 150 | 75 | 37.4 | 18.7 | 9.4 | 4.7 | 2.3 | 120.0 |
60.0 | 30.0 | 15.0 | 7.5 | 3.7 | 1.9 | 0.9 | 0.5
RX input resolution bandwidth
Default unit: kHz
Return values:
<State> READY.
SCOPE_RFLF_INPUT? <Input>
SCOPE_RFLF_INPUT <Input>
Configures the input source for the receiver in "Scope" mode.
Parameters:
<Input> RX_IN
R&S EVSG1000
LF_IN
Return values:
<State> READY.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 370

AF Time Domain Mode
SCOPE_TIMEDIV_RF?
SCOPE_TIMEDIV_RF <time/div>
This command gets or sets the Time/Div for RF input in "AF Time Domain" mode.
Parameters:
<time/div> Set value for the Time/Div for RF input.
100_MS
Sets the value to 100 ms.
50_MS
20_MS
10_MS
5_MS
2_MS
1_MS
500_US
Sets the value to 0,5 ms.
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Time/Div" on page 165
SCOPE_TRIGLEVEL_RFPCT?
SCOPE_TRIGLEVEL_RFPCT <Trig level>
This command gets or sets the trigger level for RF Input of the "AF Time Domain"
mode.
Parameters:
<Trig level> Set trigger level.
Range: -100 to 100
Default unit: <%>
Return values:
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Trigger Level" on page 166
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 371

Data Management
SCOPE_TRIGSLOPE?
SCOPE_TRIGSLOPE <Trigger edge>
This command gets or selects the trigger edge for RF Input of the "AF Time Domain"
mode.
Parameters:
<Trigger edge> POSITIVE
Sets positive SCOPE trigger slope.
NEGATIVE
Sets negative SCOPE trigger slope.
BOTH
Sets positive and negative SCOPE trigger slope.
<State> READY.
Manual operation: See "Trigger Edge" on page 166
10.11.2 Retrieving RF Spectrum Results
The following commands are required to retrieve results from AF Time Domain mea-
surements.
SCOPE_GETMEAS....................................................................................................... 372
SCOPE_GETMEAS
All measurement values in % (RF Input) or in mV (BB Input) are returned as one
comma-separated string.
Return values:
All values Shows all measured values.
10.12 Data Management

The following commands are required to configure data streaming and recording.
● Data Recording..................................................................................................... 372
● Data Streaming..................................................................................................... 377
● Results for Data Streaming................................................................................... 379
10.12.1 Data Recording
The following commands are required for data recording.

CLEARACTIVELIST.......................................................................................................373
DL_START.................................................................................................................... 373
DL_STOP......................................................................................................................373
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 372

Data Management
GETACTIVELIST........................................................................................................... 374
GETDATA_FROM_ACTIVELIST......................................................................................374
GETDLTIME?................................................................................................................ 374
GETFREEMEMORY ......................................................................................................374
GETLISTDATA ..............................................................................................................375
GETLISTSIZE................................................................................................................375
CLEARALLLISTS ..........................................................................................................375
RECIQ.......................................................................................................................... 375
SAVEACTIVELIST2USB.................................................................................................376
SELECTLISTPARAM......................................................................................................376
SETACTIVELIST............................................................................................................377
SETDLTIME.................................................................................................................. 377
CLEARACTIVELIST
This command clears the currently active list. All entries are deleted.
Return values:
<EventResult> READY
Command was executed successfully
ERROR
An error occurred; command was not successful
Example: SETACTIVELIST 2
Defines list 2 as the active list.
CLEARACTIVELIST
Clears list 2.
Manual operation: See "Clear List" on page 219
DL_START
Starts logging data for the active RX board and the currently selected parameters until
the DL_STOP command is executed. The data received from the active RX board is
stored internally.
To reduce the amount of logged data, restrict it to specific parameters.
Return values:
<EventResult> READY.
The ommand was executed successfully.
ERROR
An error occurred; command was not successful.
DL_STOP
Stops logging data.
Return values:
<EventResult> READY
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 373

Data Management
ERROR
Usage: Event
GETACTIVELIST
This command returns the number of the currently active data logger list.
Return values:
<ListNo> integer
list number
Range: 1 to 999
Sets list 2 as the active list.
GETACTIVELIST
Queries the number of the active list.
Result:
2
Manual operation: See "List" on page 219
GETDATA_FROM_ACTIVELIST <start index>,<stop index>

Exports the active data logger list data lines by remote.
Parameters:
<Start index> Specifies the start data line of the data logger list.
<Stop index> Specifies the stop. data line of the data logger list. A stop param-
eter of -1 will export the data logger list to the end.
GETDLTIME?
Gets the data logger time for the current mode: "ILS LOC", "ILS GP", "ILS MB", "VOR",
or "COM".
Parameters:
<Time> Data logger time
Default unit: ms
Usage: Query only
GETFREEMEMORY
This command queries the amount of free storage space on the internal flash memory.
Return values:
<FreeMemSize> Default unit: MByte
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 374

Data Management
GETLISTDATA <ListNo>
This command queries the contents of the selected list.
Setting parameters:
<ListNo> list number
Range: 1 to 9999
Return values:
<ListData> Contents of the list.
ERROR
GETLISTSIZE
This command queries the size of the active list.
Return values:
<NoEntries> integer
Number of entries in the active list.
Range: 0 to 1 000 000
CLEARALLLISTS
This command clears all 999 lists. All entries are deleted in all lists.
Return values:
<EventResult> READY
ERROR
Manual operation: See "Clear All Lists" on page 221
RECIQ <State>
If enabled, the raw, unprocessed I/Q data is also recorded when you execute
DL_START. This feature requires the R&S EVSG1-K25 option. I/Q data is available in
ILS, VOR, MB, COM, and GBAS mode.
I/Q data is stored as a separate file with the same file name as the data list, but the
extension .iq.
For details see Chapter 8.2.2, "I/Q Data Recording and Streaming (R&S EVSG1-K25)",
on page 218.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 375

Data Management
Parameters:
<Sate> ON | OFF
Return values:
The ommand was executed successfully.
ERROR
Manual operation: See "Rec IQ" on page 221
SAVEACTIVELIST2USB <Filename>
This command copies the active list to a connected USB storage device as a .csv file.
The file name is set automatically (e.g llz_rx1_list9.csv).
Note that this command is time-consuming for long lists (max. 1 000 000 entries).
To reduce the amount of logged data, restrict it to specific parameters.
Parameters:
<Filename> string
Path, file name and extension of the file on the USB device to
which the data is stored: Note that a specified path must already
exist on the USB device, otherwise an error occurs.
Return values:
ERROR
//Defines list 2 as the active list.
SAVEACTIVELIST2USB
Manual operation: See "Export List to USB" on page 221
SELECTLISTPARAM <Params>
This command selects the parameters to be logged.
Parameters:
<Params> Set of parameters to be included in data log.
ALL
All parameters are selected for logging.
FULL
The selected parameters are compatible to EVS300.
MEDIUM
A reduced set of parameters is selected.
SHORT
A minimum set of parameters is selected.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 376

Data Management
Example: //Select all parameters for logging

SELECTLISTPARAM ALL
Manual operation: See "Data selection (Sel, not GBAS/SCAT-I mode)" on page 220
SETACTIVELIST <ListNo>
This command selects the active data logger list (to save measurement results).
Setting parameters:
<ListNo> integer
list number
Range: 1 to 999
Return values:
<EventResult> READY
ERROR
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "List" on page 219
SETDLTIME <Time>
Sets the data logger time for the current mode: "ILS LOC", "ILS GP", "ILS MB", "VOR",
or "COM".
Parameters:
<Time> Data logger time
Default unit: ms
Return values:
<State> READY.
10.12.2 Data Streaming
The following commands are required for data streaming.

Useful commands for streaming described elsewhere:
● GBAS:STREAM on page 343
GBAS:STOPSTREAM on page 343
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 377

Data Management
Remote commands exclusive to data streaming:

GETDATADEF............................................................................................................... 378
GETDATASET............................................................................................................... 378
STREAM.......................................................................................................................378
STOPSTREAM.............................................................................................................. 379
MARKSTREAM............................................................................................................. 379
GETDATADEF
This command defines the data delivered by GETDATASET on page 378.
GETDATASET
This command creates the output of the current streaming measurement results for the
active board.
Return values:
<ActBoard> CH:1 | CH:2
The currently active receiver board for which the results are
returned.
<Data> Data for the active board as described by GETDATADEF
on page 378.
<State> READY.
STREAM <ParamSelection>, <RX Board>

Starts data streaming. In streaming mode, a measured data set is automatically send
to the remote interface. The Meastime (see MEASTIME on page 245) defines how often
the data sets are produced. Every data set is preceded by the channel number.
Streaming can produce large quantities of output. It is mandatory to have a fast data
connection and an application that is able to handle the data.
For details on the output see Chapter 10.12.3, "Results for Data Streaming",
on page 379
Parameters:
<ParamSelection> ALL
All values of the current measurement are send as comma sep-
arated text, using current units.
FULL
Compatible to R&S EVS300.
MEDIUM
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 378

Data Management
SHORT
<RX Board> 1
Data streaming is started for RX board 1.
2
Data streaming is started for RX board 2.
1+2
Data streaming is started for both RX boards.
Return values:
<State> READY.
STOPSTREAM
This command terminates the data stream for both RX Boards.
Return values:
<State> READY.
MARKSTREAM
This command sets the S flag in the running stream output.
Return values:
<State> READY.
10.12.3 Results for Data Streaming
Which parameters and results are returned during streaming depends on the measure-
ment mode and the parameter selection.
The individual measurement results are described in the result views.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 379

Data Management
Status flags
● I: Invalid
● P: PPS-synced
● ILS LOC Mode...................................................................................................... 380

● ILS GP Mode.........................................................................................................381
● ILS MB Mode........................................................................................................ 382
● VOR Mode............................................................................................................ 383
● COM Mode............................................................................................................384
● GBAS Mode.......................................................................................................... 384
● NDB Mode.............................................................................................................385
10.12.3.1 ILS LOC Mode
All parameters
RX, STIOCPM, Index , Date, Time, FREQ[MHz], SINGLE[kHz], CRS_UF,
CLR_LF[kHz], LEVEL[dBm], AM-MOD./90Hz[%], AM-MOD./150Hz[%],
FREQ_90[Hz], FREQ_150[Hz], DDM(90-150)[1], SDM[%],
PHI-90/150[°], VOICE-MOD.[%], ID-MOD.[%], ID-F.[Hz], ID-CODE,
ID-Per.[s], Last_ID[s], DotLen[ms], DashLen[ms], DotDashGap[ms],
Lettergap[ms], LEV_CLR_LF[dBm], LEV_CRS_UF[dBm],
AM-MOD_CLR_LF/90Hz[%], AM-MOD_CLR_LF/150Hz[%],
FREQ_90_CLR_LF[Hz], FREQ_150_CLR_LF[Hz], DDM_CLR_LF(90-150)[1],
SDM_CLR_LF[%], PHI-90/150_CLR_LF[°], AM-MOD_CRS_UF/90Hz[%],
AM-MOD_CRS_UF/150Hz[%], FREQ_90_CRS_UF[Hz], FREQ_150_CRS_UF[Hz],
DDM_CRS_UF(90-150)[1], SDM_CRS_UF[%], PHI-90/150_CRS_UF[°],
PHI-90/90[°], PHI-150/150[°], ResFM90[Hz], ResFM150[Hz],
K2/90Hz[%], K2/150Hz[%], K3/90Hz[%], K3/150Hz[%], K4/90Hz[%],
K4/150Hz[%], THD/90Hz[%], THD/150Hz[%], AM240[%], GPS_lat.,
GPS_long., GPS_alt[m], GPS_speed[km/h], GPS_date, GPS_time,
GPS_Sat, GPS_Status, GPS_Fix, GPS_HDOP, GPS_VDOP, GPS_Und.[m],
Temp[°C], MeasTime[ms], MeasMode, LOC_GP, ATT.MODE,
DemodOffset_1F, DemodOffset_CRS, DemodOffset_CLR, Autotune_1F,
Autotune_CRS, Autotune_CLR, IFBW_Man_WIDE, IFBW_Man_UCLC,
TrigCounter, IQPosition, IQSamples
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 380

Data Management
Full parameters
Channel, STIOCPM, Index , Date, Time, FREQ[MHz],
CRS_UF/SINGLE[kHz], CLR_LF[kHz], LEVEL[dBm], AM-MOD./90Hz[%],
AM-MOD./150Hz[%], FREQ_90[Hz], FREQ_150[Hz], DDM(90-150)[1],
SDM[%], PHI-90/150[°], VOICE-MOD.[%], ID-MOD.[%], ID-F.[Hz],
ID-CODE, LEV_CLR_LF[dBm], LEV_CRS_UF[dBm],
DDM_CLR_LF(90-150)[1], SDM_CLR_LF[%], AM-MOD_CRS_UF/90Hz[%],
AM-MOD_CRS_UF/150Hz[%], DDM_CRS_UF(90-150)[1], SDM_CRS_UF[%],
PHI-90/90[°], PHI-150/150[°], K2/90Hz[%], K2/150Hz[%],
K3/90Hz[%], K3/150Hz[%], THD/90Hz[%], THD/150Hz[%], GPS_lat.,
GPS_Sat, GPS_Status, GPS_Fix, GPS_HDOP, GPS_VDOP, Temp[°C],
MeasTime[ms], MeasMode, LOC_GP, ATT.MODE, TrigCounter
Medium parameters
RX, STIOCPM, Index , Date, Time, LEVEL[dBm], DDM(90-150)[1],
SDM[%], LEV_CLR_LF[dBm], LEV_CRS_UF[dBm], DDM_CLR_LF(90-150)[1],
SDM_CLR_LF[%], DDM_CRS_UF(90-150)[1], SDM_CRS_UF[%], GPS_lat.,
GPS_long., MeasMode, LOC_GP, ATT.MODE, TrigCounter
Short parameters
RX, Time, LEVEL[dBm], LEV_CRS_UF[dBm], LEV_CLR_LF[dBm],
DDM(90-150)[1], DDM_CRS_UF(90-150)[1], DDM_CLR_LF(90-150)[1],
SDM[%], SDM_CRS_UF[%], SDM_CLR_LF[%], GPS_lat., GPS_long.
10.12.3.2 ILS GP Mode
All parameters
RX, STIOCPM, Index , Date, Time, FREQ[MHz], SINGLE[kHz], CRS_UF,
CLR_LF[kHz], LEVEL[dBm], AM-MOD./90Hz[%], AM-MOD./150Hz[%],
FREQ_90[Hz], FREQ_150[Hz], DDM(90-150)[1], SDM[%],
PHI-90/150[°], VOICE-MOD.[%], ID-MOD.[%], ID-F.[Hz], ID-CODE,
Lettergap[ms], LEV_CLR_LF[dBm], LEV_CRS_UF[dBm],
FREQ_90_CLR_LF[Hz], FREQ_150_CLR_LF[Hz], DDM_CLR_LF(90-150)[1],
SDM_CLR_LF[%], PHI-90/150_CLR_LF[°], AM-MOD_CRS_UF/90Hz[%],
AM-MOD_CRS_UF/150Hz[%], FREQ_90_CRS_UF[Hz], FREQ_150_CRS_UF[Hz],
DDM_CRS_UF(90-150)[1], SDM_CRS_UF[%], PHI-90/150_CRS_UF[°],
PHI-90/90[°], PHI-150/150[°], ResFM90[Hz], ResFM150[Hz],
K2/90Hz[%], K2/150Hz[%], K3/90Hz[%], K3/150Hz[%], K4/90Hz[%],
K4/150Hz[%], THD/90Hz[%], THD/150Hz[%], AM240[%], GPS_lat.,
GPS_Sat, GPS_Status, GPS_Fix, GPS_HDOP, GPS_VDOP, GPS_Und.[m],
Temp[°C], MeasTime[ms], MeasMode, LOC_GP, ATT.MODE,
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 381

Data Management
DemodOffset_1F, DemodOffset_CRS, DemodOffset_CLR, Autotune_1F,

Autotune_CRS, Autotune_CLR, IFBW_Man_WIDE, IFBW_Man_UCLC,
TrigCounter, IQPosition, IQSamples
Full parameters
Channel, STIOCPM, Index , Date, Time, FREQ[MHz],
CRS_UF/SINGLE[kHz], CLR_LF[kHz], LEVEL[dBm], AM-MOD./90Hz[%],
AM-MOD./150Hz[%], FREQ_90[Hz], FREQ_150[Hz], DDM(90-150)[1],
SDM[%], PHI-90/150[°], VOICE-MOD.[%], ID-MOD.[%], ID-F.[Hz],
ID-CODE, LEV_CLR_LF[dBm], LEV_CRS_UF[dBm],
DDM_CLR_LF(90-150)[1], SDM_CLR_LF[%], AM-MOD_CRS_UF/90Hz[%],
AM-MOD_CRS_UF/150Hz[%], DDM_CRS_UF(90-150)[1], SDM_CRS_UF[%],
PHI-90/90[°], PHI-150/150[°], K2/90Hz[%], K2/150Hz[%],
K3/90Hz[%], K3/150Hz[%], THD/90Hz[%], THD/150Hz[%], GPS_lat.,
GPS_Sat, GPS_Status, GPS_Fix, GPS_HDOP, GPS_VDOP, Temp[°C],
MeasTime[ms], MeasMode, LOC_GP, ATT.MODE, TrigCounter
Medium parameters
RX, STIOCPM, Index , Date, Time, LEVEL[dBm], DDM(90-150)[1],
SDM[%], LEV_CLR_LF[dBm], LEV_CRS_UF[dBm], DDM_CLR_LF(90-150)[1],
SDM_CLR_LF[%], DDM_CRS_UF(90-150)[1], SDM_CRS_UF[%], GPS_lat.,
GPS_long., MeasMode, LOC_GP, ATT.MODE, TrigCounter
Short parameters
RX, Time, LEVEL[dBm], LEV_CRS_UF[dBm], LEV_CLR_LF[dBm],
DDM(90-150)[1], DDM_CRS_UF(90-150)[1], DDM_CLR_LF(90-150)[1],
SDM[%], SDM_CRS_UF[%], SDM_CLR_LF[%], GPS_lat., GPS_long.
10.12.3.3 ILS MB Mode
All parameters
RX, STIOCP, Index , Date, Time, FREQ[MHz], MEAS.F[kHz],
LEVEL[dBm], AM-MOD./3000Hz[%], AM-MOD./1300Hz[%],
AM-MOD./400Hz[%], FREQ_3000[Hz], FREQ_1300[Hz], FREQ_400[Hz],
ID-MOD.[%], ID-F.[Hz], GPS_lat., GPS_long., GPS_alt[m],
GPS_speed[km/h], GPS_date, GPS_time, GPS_Sat, GPS_Status,
GPS_Fix, GPS_HDOP, GPS_VDOP, Temp[°C], IFBW Manual,
MeasTime[ms], ATT.MODE, TrigCounter
Full parameters
Channel, STIOCP, Index , Date, Time, FREQ[MHz], MEAS.F[MHz],
AM-MOD./400Hz[%], FREQ_3000[Hz], FREQ_1300[Hz], FREQ_400[Hz],
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 382

Data Management
ID-MOD.[%], ID-F.[Hz], GPS_lat., GPS_long., GPS_alt[m],

GPS_Fix, GPS_HDOP, GPS_VDOP, Temp[°C], MeasTime[ms], ATT.MODE,
TrigCounter
Medium parameters
RX, STIOCP, Index , Date, Time, LEVEL[dBm], AM-MOD./3000Hz[%],
AM-MOD./1300Hz[%], AM-MOD./400Hz[%], FREQ_3000[Hz],
FREQ_1300[Hz], FREQ_400[Hz], GPS_lat., GPS_long., TrigCounter
Short parameters
RX, Time, LEVEL[dBm], AM-MOD./400Hz[%], AM-MOD./1300Hz[%],
AM-MOD./3000Hz[%], GPS_lat., GPS_long.
10.12.3.4 VOR Mode
All parameters
RX, STIOCPMV, Index , Date, Time, FREQ[MHz], MEAS.F[kHz],
LEVEL[dBm], AM-MOD./30Hz[%], AM-MOD./9960Hz[%], FREQ_30[Hz],
FREQ_9960[Hz], FREQ_FM30[Hz], BEARING(from)[°], FM-DEV.[Hz],
FM-INDEX, VOICE-MOD.[%], ID-MOD.[%], ID-F.[Hz], ID-CODE,
Lettergap[ms], SubCarr_K2[dB], SubCarr_K3[dB], SubCarr_K4[dB],
SubCarr_K5[dB], AM60Hz[%], AM1k44[%], AM1k50[%], No.Of Segm,
GPS_lat., GPS_long., GPS_alt[m], GPS_speed[km/h], GPS_date,
GPS_time, GPS_Sat, GPS_Status, GPS_Fix, GPS_HDOP, GPS_VDOP,
GPS_Und.[m], Temp[°C], IFBW Manual, MeasTime[ms], ATT.MODE,
TrigCounter, I/Q_Position, I/Q_Samples
Full parameters
Channel, STIOCPM, Index , Date, Time, FREQ[MHz], MEAS.F[MHz],
AM-DIST./9960[%], FREQ_30[Hz], FREQ_9960[Hz], FREQ_FM30[Hz],
BEARING(from)[°], FM-DEV.[Hz], FM-INDEX, VOICE-MOD.[%],
ID-MOD.[%], ID-F.[Hz], ID-CODE, GPS_lat., GPS_long., GPS_alt[m],
TrigCounter
Medium parameters
RX, STIOCPM, Index , Date, Time, LEVEL[dBm], BEARING(from)[°],
GPS_lat., GPS_long., GPS_alt[m], TrigCounter
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 383

Data Management
Short parameters
RX, Time, LEVEL[dBm], BEARING(from)[°], AM-MOD./30Hz[%],
AM-MOD./9960Hz[%], FM-DEV.[Hz], GPS_lat., GPS_long.
10.12.3.5 COM Mode
All parameters
RX, STIOCP, Index , Date, Time, FREQ[MHz], MEAS.F[MHz],
MEAS.F_TX1[MHz], MEAS.F_TX2[MHz], LEVEL[dBm], LEVEL_TX1[dBm],
LEVEL_TX2[dBm], AM-MOD[%], AM-MOD_TX1[%], AM-MOD_TX2[%],
AMFREQ[Hz], AMFREQ_TX1[Hz], AMFREQ_TX2[Hz], GPS_lat., GPS_long.,
GPS_alt[m], GPS_speed[km/h], GPS_date, GPS_time, GPS_Sat,
GPS_Status, GPS_Fix, GPS_HDOP, GPS_VDOP, Temp[°C], IFBW Manual
1F, IFBW Manual 2F, MeasTime[ms], ATT.MODE, TrigCounter
Full parameters
Channel, STIOCP, Index , Date, Time, FREQ[MHz], MEAS.F_TX1[MHz],
MEAS.F_TX2[MHz], LEVEL[dBm], LEVEL_TX1[dBm], LEVEL_TX2[dBm],
AM-MOD[%], AM-MOD_TX1[%], AM-MOD_TX2[%], AMFREQ[Hz],
AMFREQ_TX1[Hz], AMFREQ_TX2[Hz], GPS_lat., GPS_long., GPS_alt[m],
TrigCounter
Medium parameters
RX, STIOCP, Index , Date, Time, MEAS.F[MHz], MEAS.F_TX1[MHz],
MEAS.F_TX2[MHz], LEVEL[dBm], LEVEL_TX1[dBm], LEVEL_TX2[dBm],
AM-MOD[%], AM-MOD_TX1[%], AM-MOD_TX2[%], GPS_lat., GPS_long.,
TrigCounter
Short parameters
RX, Time, LEVEL[dBm], AM-MOD[%], AM-MOD_TX1[%], AM-MOD_TX2[%],
GPS_lat., GPS_long.
10.12.3.6 GBAS Mode
All parameters
RX, STIOCP, Index , Date, Time, Slot, FREQ[MHz], C.Offset[kHz],
Lev.Av[dBm], Lev.Pk[dBm], SSID, EVM[%], GBAS ID, Train.FEC,
App.Dat., App.FEC, BER, BER Recv. Bursts, BER Missed Bursts,
Transm.Len, StartDelay[us], Sync. Seq.[us], GuardInterv[ms],
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 384

Data Management
Temp[°C], ATT.MODE, TrigCounter, GraphData, IQPosition,

IQSamples, RawData
Full parameters
Channel, STIOCP, Index , Date, Slot, Time, FREQ[MHz],
Lev.Av[dBm], SSID, GBAS ID, Train.FEC, App.Dat., App.FEC,
Temp[°C], ATT.MODE, TrigCounter
Medium parameters
RX, STIOCP, Index , Time, Slot, C.Offset[kHz], Lev.Av[dBm], GBAS
ID, Train.FEC, App.Dat., App.FEC, GPS_lat., GPS_long.,
TrigCounter
Short parameters
RX, Index , Time, Slot, Lev.Av[dBm], GBAS ID, App.Dat.,
GPS_lat., GPS_long.
10.12.3.7 NDB Mode
All parameters
RX,STIOCP,
Index ,Date,Time,FREQ[kHz],IDFREQ[Hz],MEAS.F[kHz],LEVEL[dB�V],
IMP[Ohm],CarLevChange[dB],AM-MOD/[%],AM-FREQ[Hz],ID-CODE,
ID-Per.[s],Last_ID[s],DotLen[ms],DashLen[ms],DotDashGap[ms],
Lettergap[ms],K2[%],K3[%],K4[%],THD[%],PSFC[%],GPS_lat.,
GPS_long.,GPS_alt[m],GPS_speed[km/h],GPS_date,GPS_time,GPS_Sat,
GPS_Status,GPS_Fix,GPS_HDOP,GPS_VDOP,GPS_Und.[m],IF-BW[kHz],
MeasTime[ms],ATT.MODE,TrigCounter,I/Q_Position,I/Q_Samples
Medium parameters
RX,STIOCP,
Index ,Date,Time,FREQ[kHz],IDFREQ[Hz],MEAS.F[kHz],LEVEL[dB�V],
IMP[Ohm],AM-MOD/[%],AM-FREQ[Hz],ID-CODE,K2[%],K3[%],K4[%],
THD[%],PSFC[%],GPS_lat.,GPS_long.,MeasTime[ms],ATT.MODE
Short parameters
RX,STIOCP,
Index ,FREQ[kHz],IDFREQ[Hz],MEAS.F[kHz],LEVEL[dB�V],AM-MOD/[%],
AM-FREQ[Hz],ID-CODE
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 385

Information on Commands
10.13 Information on Commands
HELP?
Returns a list of all remote commands available for the R&S EVSG1000, including a
short description.
Return values:
<CommandList> List of commands, consisting of the command syntax and a
short description.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 386

R&S®EVSG1000 Maintenance, Storage and Disposal
Handling Batteries
11 Maintenance, Storage and Disposal

The product does not require regular maintenance. It only requires occasional clean-
ing. It is however advisable to check the nominal data from time to time.
11.1 Cleaning
How to clean the product is described in "Cleaning the product" on page 15.
Do not use any liquids for cleaning. Cleaning agents, solvents (thinners, acetone),
acids and bases can damage the front panel labeling, plastic parts and display.
11.2 Handling Batteries

The R&S EVSG1000 provides an optional internal battery pack (R&S EVSG-B3)
Safe handling of batteries is described in "Handling batteries safely" on page 16. Main-
tenance information is provided here.
Keep the batteries clean and dry. If the terminals become soiled, clean them with a dry,
clean cloth.
Charging batteries
Charging batteries
Charge the battery before using it for the first time. Following a long storage period, it
can be necessary to charge and discharge the battery several times to reach full
capacity.
When charging the battery, observe the following:
● For charging, use only the R&S EVSG1000 or the R&S®FSV-B34 battery charger
(1321.3950.02).
● If the instrument is connected to the provided AC/DC power supply connector or to
an external DC power supply with more than 12 V DC, the internal battery is auto-
matically charged, regardless whether the instrument is switched on or off.
● Charge in a constant ambient temperature range from +0 °C to +40 °C.
If the battery temperature rises above +53 °C, charging is interrupted until the tem-
perature drops below +45 °C. Large temperature variations can also cause the
charger to be switched off too early.
● Try not to overcharge the battery too often because overcharging reduces the ser-
vice life of the battery.
● Discharge in a temperature range from -10 °C to +45 °C.
When the battery is being charged, the Power LED blinks. During operation, the status
bar also indicates that the battery is being charged. See "Status bar" on page 40.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 387

Handling Batteries
Table 11-1: Charging times
Used charger Status Approximate duration/h
Product Running 12
Standby 7
Switched off 7
Rohde & Schwarz charger 4
Product/Rohde & Schwarz After deep discharge 12

charger
Low temperatures between 0 °C and 5 °C 12
Storing batteries
Ideally, use the original packing. Otherwise, observe the following rules:
● Do not expose to direct sunlight.
● Prevent short-circuiting of the batteries, which can happen if batteries touch each
other or come into contact with metallic objects in the storage container.
To exchange the battery pack
Use only the original battery pack R&S EVSG-B3 (1329.8821.02).
1. Switch off the instrument.
2. Disconnect the instrument from any power supply.
3. Unscrew the fours screws on the panel labeled "R&S EVSG-B3 Battery Pack" on
the back of the instrument.
4. Remove the panel.
5. Grasp the battery by the attached plastic strip and pull it to the right and upwards.
6. Lift the battery pack out completely.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 388

Disposal
7. Carefully place the new battery pack into the slot with the writing facing upwards
and not upside-down.
8. Push the battery pack to the left until you feel it snap into place, ensuring a tight
connection.
A space about 2 fingers wide remains to the right of the battery pack. This is where
the notch of the metal panel fits in.
9. Replace the panel over the battery pack so the metal notch rests in the empty
space.
10. Fasten the four screws to close the battery pack slot.
11. Reconnect the instrument to the power supply to charge the new battery.
11.3 Storage
Protect the product against dust. Ensure that the environmental conditions, e.g. tem-
perature range and climatic load, meet the values specified in the data sheet.
11.4 Disposal
Rohde & Schwarz is committed to making careful, ecologically sound use of natural
resources and minimizing the environmental footprint of our products. Help us by dis-
posing of waste in a way that causes minimum environmental impact.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 389

Disposal
Electrical and electronic equipment

A product that is labeled as follows cannot be disposed of in normal household waste
after it has come to the end of its service life. Even disposal via the municipal collection
points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted.
Figure 11-1: Labeling in line with EN 50419
Rohde & Schwarz has developed a disposal concept for the eco-friendly disposal or
recycling of waste material. As a manufacturer, Rohde & Schwarz completely fulfills its
obligation to take back and dispose of electrical and electronic waste. Contact your
local service representative to dispose of the product.
Batteries
A product that contains a battery cannot be disposed of in the normal household waste
after it has come to the end of its service life. It is labeled as follows:
Figure 11-2: Labeling in line with Battery Directive 2006/66/EC
Dispose of batteries as specified by the local waste disposal agency. Alternatively, you
can contact the Rohde & Schwarz local service representative.
For information on returning batteries to Rohde & Schwarz subsidiaries, see "Handling
batteries safely" on page 16.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 390

R&S®EVSG1000 Transporting
12 Transporting
Lifting and carrying
See:
● "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 14
● Chapter 1.4.2, "Lifting and Carrying", on page 20.
Packing
Use the original packaging material. It consists of antistatic wrap for electrostatic pro-
tection and packing material designed for the product.
If you do not have the original packaging, use similar materials that provide the same
level of protection.
Securing
When moving the product in a vehicle or using transporting equipment, make sure that
the product is properly secured. Only use items intended for securing objects.
Transport altitude
Unless otherwise specified in the data sheet, the maximum transport altitude without
pressure compensation is 4500 m above sea level.
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 391

R&S®EVSG1000 Contacting Customer Support
13 Contacting Customer Support

Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz product, contact our customer sup-
port center. A team of highly qualified engineers provides support and works with you
to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applica-
tions of Rohde & Schwarz products.
Contact information
Contact our customer support center at www.rohde-schwarz.com/support, or follow this
QR code:
Figure 13-1: QR code to the Rohde & Schwarz support page
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 392

R&S®EVSG1000 ILS Channel Frequency List
Annex
A ILS Channel Frequency List
The following table indicates the frequencies for the signals for specific ILS channels
as defined by the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO).
Table A-1: ILS LOC and ILS GP - Channel and Frequency
ICAO Channel Localizer mode Glidepath mode

Frequency (MHz) Frequency (MHz)
18X 108.10 334.70
18Y 108.15 334.55
20X 108.30 334.10
20Y 108.35 333.95
22X 108.50 329.90
22Y 108.55 329.75
24X 108.70 330.50
24Y 108.75 330.35
26X 108.90 329.30
26Y 108.95 329.15
28X 109.10 331.40
28Y 109.15 331.25
30X 109.30 332.00
30Y 109.35 331.85
32X 109.50 332.60
32Y 109.55 332.45
34X 109.70 333.20
34Y 109.75 333.05
36X 109.90 333.80
36Y 109.95 333.65
38X 110.10 334.40
38Y 110.15 334.25
40X 110.30 335.00
40Y 110.35 334.85
42X 110.50 329.60
42Y 110.55 329.45
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 393

R&S®EVSG1000 ILS Channel Frequency List
ICAO Channel Localizer mode Glidepath mode

Frequency (MHz) Frequency (MHz)
44X 110.70 330.20
44Y 110.75 330.05
46X 110.90 330.80
46Y 110.95 330.65
48X 111.10 331.70
48Y 111.15 331.55
50X 111.30 332.30
50Y 111.35 332.15
52X 111.50 332.90
52Y 111.55 332.75
54X 111.70 333.50
54Y 111.75 333.35
56X 111.90 331.10
56Y 111.95 330.95
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 394

R&S®EVSG1000 VOR Channel Frequency List
B VOR Channel Frequency List

The following table indicates the frequencies for the signals for specific VOR channels
as defined by the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO).
Table B-1: VOR - Channel and frequency list
ICAO VOR Fre- ICAO VOR Fre- ICAO VOR Fre-

Channel quency Channel quency Channel quency
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
17X 108.00 75X 112.80 103X 115.60
17Y 108.05 75Y 112.85 103Y 115.65
19X 108.20 76X 112.90 104X 115.70
19Y 108.25 76Y 112.95 104Y 115.75
21X 108.40 77X 113.00 105X 115.80
21Y 108.45 77Y 113.05 105Y 115.85
23X 108.60 78X 113.10 106X 115.90
23Y 108.65 78Y 113.15 106Y 115.95
25X 108.80 79X 113.20 107X 116.00
25Y 108.85 79Y 113.25 107Y 116.05
27X 109.00 80X 113.30 108X 116.10
27Y 109.05 80Y 113.35 108Y 116.15
29X 109.20 81X 113.40 109X 116.20
29Y 109.25 81Y 113.45 109Y 116.25
31X 109.40 82X 113.50 110X 116.30
31Y 109.45 82Y 113.55 110Y 116.35
33X 109.60 83X 113.60 111X 116.40
33Y 109.65 83Y 113.65 111Y 116.45
35X 109.80 84X 113.70 112X 116.50
35Y 109.85 84Y 113.75 112Y 116.55
37X 110.00 85X 113.80 113X 116.60
37Y 110.05 85Y 113.85 113Y 116.65
39X 110.20 86X 113.90 114X 116.70
39Y 110.25 86Y 113.95 114Y 116.75
41X 110.40 87X 114.00 115X 116.80
41Y 110.45 87Y 114.05 115Y 116.85
43X 110.60 88X 114.10 116X 116.90
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 395

R&S®EVSG1000 VOR Channel Frequency List
ICAO VOR Fre- ICAO VOR Fre- ICAO VOR Fre-

Channel quency Channel quency Channel quency
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
43Y 110.65 88Y 114.15 116Y 116.95
45X 110.80 89X 114.20 117X 117.00
45Y 110.85 89Y 114.25 117Y 117.05
47X 111.00 90X 114.30 118X 117.10
47Y 111.05 90Y 114.35 118Y 117.15
49X 111.20 91X 114.40 119X 117.20
49Y 111.25 91Y 114.45 119Y 117.25
51X 111.40 92X 114.50 120X 117.30
51Y 111.45 92Y 114.55 120Y 117.35
53Y 111.65 93Y 114.65 121X 117.40
55X 111.80 94X 114.70 121Y 117.45
55Y 111.85 94Y 114.75 122X 117.50
57X 112.00 95X 114.80 122Y 117.55
57Y 112.05 95Y 114.85 123X 117.60
53X 111.60 93X 114.60 123Y 117.65
58X 112.10 96X 114.90 124X 117.70
58Y 112.15 96Y 114.95 124Y 117.75
59X 112.20 97X 115.00 125X 117.80
59Y 112.25 97Y 115.05 125Y 117.85
70X 112.30 98X 115.10 126X 117.90
70Y 112.35 98Y 115.15 126Y 117.95
71X 112.40 99X 115.20
71Y 112.45 99Y 115.25
72X 112.50 100X 115.30
72Y 112.55 100Y 115.35
73X 112.60 101X 115.40
73Y 112.65 101Y 115.45
74X 112.70 102X 115.50
74Y 112.75 102Y 115.55
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 396

R&S®EVSG1000 References
C References
● [1] RTCA DO-246, GNSS-Based Precision Approach Local Area Augmentation
System (LAAS) Signal-in-Space Interface Control Document (ICD), July 2017
● [2] RTCA DO-217, Minimum aviation system performance standards DGNSS
instrument approach system: Special Category I (SCAT-I), August 1996
● [3] ICAO AN10 Vol1, ICAO Annex 10, Aeronautical Telecommunications, Volume 1,
July 2018
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 397

R&S®EVSG1000 Format Description of GBAS and SCAT-I Data
D Format Description of GBAS and SCAT-I

Data
The Data Recorder records and manages the data captured during one or a series of
measurements. Up to 999 lists with a maximum of 1 000 000 data lines each can be
recorded. One line corresponds to the captured data at the receive frequency for the
GBAS/SCAT-I signal in one time slot.
Similarly, a data stream consists of lines of measurement results, where one line corre-
sponds to the captured data at the receive frequency for the GBAS/SCAT-I signal in
one time slot.
You can also query a single measurement result, which corresponds to one row in the
Data Recorder list.
In all three cases, the available parameters and their format are identical.
Which parameters are recorded is user-definable and can be defined individually for
each list. The following overview describes all available parameters (full list) in their
default order.
The format of the data for each slot is identical, regardless whether a parameter con-
tains data or not. Thus, you can create a table from the exported comma-separated
list. If a slot is empty, only the general data is stored in the list entry; the message-spe-
cific parameters are cropped.
When a list is stored to a file, a header line is automatically included that describes the
provided parameters.
General Information
The following general information is always included, regardless whether the slot con-
tains data or not, and whether the signal is GBAS or SCAT type.
Table D-1: General information for the individual slot
No. Column Description
Channel RF board 1 or 2
1 STIOCP Status Flags:

● I: Invalid (power level not permitted or too low)
● P: PPS-synced (triggered by external PPS)
2 Index Counts each measurement
3 Date Date of measurement
4 Time Time of measurement
5 Temp[°C] Temperature on R&S EVSG1000 mainboard
6 SLOT Time slot (A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H )
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 398

No. Column Description
7 FREQ[MHz] Receiving frequency
8 F_DEV[kHz] Frequency deviation
9 LEVEL[dBm] Level measured over the "Synchronization and Ambiguity Resolution" period
of the GBAS/SCAT signal
10 SSID Received Station ID, equivalent to GBAS ID or SCAT ID
11 Len[bit] Length of the entire message block
12 Train.FEC FEC of the training sequence
13 Applic.FEC FEC of the data content
14 MBI Message block identifier
15 MT 1 Message type 1 available (YES | NO)
16 MT 4 Message type 4 available (YES | NO)
17 GPS_lat. Received GPS data
18 GPS_long.
19 GPS_alt[m]
20 GPS_speed[km/h]
21 GPS_date
22 GPS_time
23 GPS_Sat
24 GPS_Status
25 GPS_Fix
26 GPS_HDOP
27 GPS_VDOP
28 GPS_Dist[m] Distance between GPS reference point and current GPS position
29 GPS_Angle[°] Angle between GPS reference point and current GPS position
30 ATT.MODE Attenuator mode during slot measurement (LN | NORM | LD)

In AUTO mode: the used hardware setting
GBAS Signal - MT1

After the general information, if the slot contains a message type 1, the following burst
data is provided for each of the up to 32 satellites (in "full" list only):
Table D-2: Decoded message type 1 data for the individual slot and each satellite (GBAS)
Column Description
MT1 GBAS Section label (separator in list)
MB CRC
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 399

Column Description
MB ID Message block ID:

● 1010 1010: normal LAAS message (GBAS)
● 1111 1111: test LAAS message (GBAS)
Stat ID Received Station ID, equivalent to GBAS ID or SCAT ID
MsgLen[byte]
Z-Cnt[m:s]
Add.Msg.Flag
NrOfMeasn
MeasnType
EphDecorPar[m/m]
EphemCrcMSB
EphemCrcLSB
SrcAvailDur[sec]
SatID
IOD
PRC[m]
RRCor[m/s]
S_pr_gnd[m]
DiffnprcB1[m]
DiffnprcB2[m]
DiffnprcB3[m]
DiffnprcB4[m]
For details on the correction data parameters, refer to the GBAS specification [1].
MT4
If the slot contains a message type 4, the following decoded message data is provided
for each of the up to 15 FASDBs (in "full" list only):
Table D-3: Decoded message type 4 data for the individual slot and each FASDB (GBAS)
Column Description
MT4 GBAS Section label (separator in list)
MB CRC

● 1010 1010: normal LAAS message (GBAS)
● 1111 1111: test LAAS message (GBAS)
MsgLen[byte]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 400

Column Description
DataSetLen
OpType
SbasServProv
AirportID
RunwayNo
RunwayLtr
ApproachPerfDesig
RouteInd
RPDS
RefPathID
LTP_FTP_Lat[°]
LTP_FTP_Long[°]
LTP_FTP_Height[m]
DeltaFPAP_Lat[°]
DeltaFPAP_Long[°]
TCH
UnitTCH
GPA[°]
CourseWidth[m]
DeltaLenOffset[m]
VertAlertLim[m]
LatrAlertLim[m]
FASCRC
SCAT-I Signal - MT1

After the general information, if the slot contains a message type 1, the following burst
data is provided for each of the up to 32 satellites (in "full" list only):
Table D-4: Decoded message type 1 data for the individual slot and each satellite (SCAT-I)
Column Description
MT1 SCAT Section label (separator in list)
MB CRC

● 1001 1001: SCAT-I
MsgLen[byte]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 401

Column Description
Z-Cnt[m:s]
Acc.Err.Bnd.[m/s*s]
K_md_gnd
SatID
PRC[m]
IOD
RRCor[m/s]
S_pr_gnd[m]
B_pr_gnd[m]
S_fail_gnd[m]
B_fail_gnd[m]
PRC[m]
For details on the correction data parameters, refer to the SCAT-I specification [2].
MT4
If the slot contains a message type 4, the following decoded message data is provided
for each of the up to 15 FASDBs (in "full" list only):
Table D-5: Decoded message type 4 data for the individual slot and each FASDB (SCAT-I)
Column Description
MT4 DATA Section label (separator in list)
MB CRC

● 1001 1001: SCAT-I
MsgLen[byte]
OpType
AirportID
RunwayNo
RunwayLtr
RouteInd
ValInd
RPDS
RefPathID
ThDP_Lat[°]
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 402

Column Description
ThDP_Long[°]
ThDP_Height[m]
DERP_LAT[°]
DERP_Long[°]
TCH[ft]
GPA[°]
FASCRC
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 403

R&S®EVSG1000 List of Commands
List of Commands
*IDN?............................................................................................................................................................. 259
AC8................................................................................................................................................................293
AC8................................................................................................................................................................317
AF0................................................................................................................................................................ 317
AF1................................................................................................................................................................ 317
AF2................................................................................................................................................................ 293
AF2................................................................................................................................................................ 318
AF3................................................................................................................................................................ 293
AF4................................................................................................................................................................ 308
AF5................................................................................................................................................................ 308
AF6................................................................................................................................................................ 308
AF7................................................................................................................................................................ 308
AF8................................................................................................................................................................ 293
AF8................................................................................................................................................................ 318
AM0................................................................................................................................................................318
AM1................................................................................................................................................................318
AM2................................................................................................................................................................294
AM2CLR........................................................................................................................................................ 294
AM2CRS........................................................................................................................................................294
AM3................................................................................................................................................................294
AM3CLR........................................................................................................................................................ 294
AM3CRS........................................................................................................................................................294
AM4................................................................................................................................................................309
AM5................................................................................................................................................................309
AM6................................................................................................................................................................309
AM7................................................................................................................................................................309
AM8................................................................................................................................................................295
AM8................................................................................................................................................................318
AM9................................................................................................................................................................295
AM9................................................................................................................................................................318
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX1...............................................................................................................................323
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX1?.............................................................................................................................323
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX2...............................................................................................................................323
AMFREQ_OFFSET_TX2?.............................................................................................................................323
AMMOD240................................................................................................................................................... 295
AUTOKALSTATUS.........................................................................................................................................269
AUTOKALSTATUS_EXTENDED................................................................................................................... 269
BATT.............................................................................................................................................................. 258
BE.................................................................................................................................................................. 319
BE_TO?......................................................................................................................................................... 319
BE?................................................................................................................................................................ 319
BI?..................................................................................................................................................................259
CH..................................................................................................................................................................248
CH?................................................................................................................................................................248
CLEARACTIVELIST...................................................................................................................................... 373
CLEARALLLISTS ..........................................................................................................................................375
CLEARERRORLOG...................................................................................................................................... 259
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 404

COM_1F2F_MEASMODE............................................................................................................................. 323
COM_1F2F_MEASMODE?........................................................................................................................... 323
COM_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP....................................................................................................................... 324
COM_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?..................................................................................................................... 324
COM_DEMOD_BW_1F................................................................................................................................. 324
COM_DEMOD_BW_1F?............................................................................................................................... 324
COM_DEMOD_BW_2F................................................................................................................................. 324
COM_DEMOD_BW_2F?............................................................................................................................... 324
COM_TONEFREQ_1K01K2..........................................................................................................................324
COM_TONEFREQ_1K01K2?........................................................................................................................324
COM_TRIG_EDGE........................................................................................................................................325
COM_TRIG_EDGE?......................................................................................................................................325
COM_TRIG_SOURCE...................................................................................................................................325
COM_TRIG_SOURCE?.................................................................................................................................325
DCLR............................................................................................................................................................. 296
DCRS.............................................................................................................................................................296
DD0................................................................................................................................................................296
DD1................................................................................................................................................................296
DEMODE_GS................................................................................................................................................284
DEMODE_GS?..............................................................................................................................................284
DEMODE_LLZ...............................................................................................................................................275
DEMODE_LLZ?.............................................................................................................................................275
DISPLAY_BRIGHTNESS_BATTERY............................................................................................................ 266
DISPLAY_BRIGHTNESS_MAINS................................................................................................................. 266
DIST_9960.....................................................................................................................................................319
DL_START.....................................................................................................................................................373
DL_STOP.......................................................................................................................................................373
FA0.................................................................................................................................................................304
FA0.................................................................................................................................................................311
FA0.................................................................................................................................................................321
FA1.................................................................................................................................................................304
FA2.................................................................................................................................................................304
FA2.................................................................................................................................................................311
FA2.................................................................................................................................................................321
FA3.................................................................................................................................................................304
FA4.................................................................................................................................................................305
FA5.................................................................................................................................................................305
FACTORY_PRESET......................................................................................................................................267
FCLR..............................................................................................................................................................296
FCRS............................................................................................................................................................. 296
FFT_ATTMODE............................................................................................................................................. 360
FFT_ATTMODE?........................................................................................................................................... 360
FFT_BB_AF_BW_KHZ.................................................................................................................................. 361
FFT_BB_AF_BW_KHZ?................................................................................................................................ 361
FFT_BB_IF_BW_KHZ................................................................................................................................... 361
FFT_BB_IF_BW_KHZ?................................................................................................................................. 361
FFT_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV........................................................................................................................ 362
FFT_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV?...................................................................................................................... 362
FFT_FREQ_CENTER....................................................................................................................................362
FFT_FREQ_CENTER?..................................................................................................................................362
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 405

FFT_FREQ_SPAN.........................................................................................................................................362
FFT_FREQ_SPAN?.......................................................................................................................................362
FFT_FREQ_START.......................................................................................................................................362
FFT_FREQ_START?.....................................................................................................................................362
FFT_FREQRF................................................................................................................................................363
FFT_FREQRF?..............................................................................................................................................363
FFT_FREQSTOP...........................................................................................................................................363
FFT_FREQSTOP?.........................................................................................................................................363
FFT_GETSPECT...........................................................................................................................................366
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_DB............................................................................................................................. 363
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_DB?........................................................................................................................... 363
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_V................................................................................................................................364
FFT_GRID_YRANGE_V?..............................................................................................................................364
FFT_IF_BW_KHZ.......................................................................................................................................... 364
FFT_IF_BW_KHZ?........................................................................................................................................ 364
FFT_RESBW_AUTO..................................................................................................................................... 364
FFT_RESBW_AUTO?................................................................................................................................... 364
FFT_RESBW_FIX_KHZ................................................................................................................................ 365
FFT_RESBW_FIX_KHZ?.............................................................................................................................. 365
FFT_RFLF_INPUT.........................................................................................................................................365
FFT_RFLF_INPUT?.......................................................................................................................................365
FFT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT......................................................................................................................... 366
FFT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT?....................................................................................................................... 366
FFT_TRACE_MODE?................................................................................................................................... 365
FFT_TRACEMODE....................................................................................................................................... 365
FILTER_GS_RESIDFM................................................................................................................................. 290
FILTER_GS_RESIDFM?............................................................................................................................... 290
FILTER_LLZ_RESIDFM................................................................................................................................ 281
FILTER_LLZ_RESIDFM?.............................................................................................................................. 281
FM0................................................................................................................................................................319
FM1................................................................................................................................................................319
FMEAS...........................................................................................................................................................308
FMEAS...........................................................................................................................................................319
FSCAN_ATTMODE....................................................................................................................................... 351
FSCAN_ATTMODE?..................................................................................................................................... 351
FSCAN_FREQCENTER................................................................................................................................ 351
FSCAN_FREQCENTER?.............................................................................................................................. 351
FSCAN_FREQSPAN..................................................................................................................................... 351
FSCAN_FREQSPAN?................................................................................................................................... 351
FSCAN_FREQSTART................................................................................................................................... 352
FSCAN_FREQSTART?................................................................................................................................. 352
FSCAN_FREQSTOP..................................................................................................................................... 352
FSCAN_FREQSTOP?................................................................................................................................... 352
FSCAN_GETSPECT..................................................................................................................................... 355
FSCAN_GRID_YRANGE_DB........................................................................................................................352
FSCAN_GRID_YRANGE_DB?......................................................................................................................352
FSCAN_REFLEVEL...................................................................................................................................... 352
FSCAN_REFLEVEL?.................................................................................................................................... 352
FSCAN_RES_BW..........................................................................................................................................353
FSCAN_RES_BW?........................................................................................................................................353
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 406

FSCAN_RESBW_AUTO................................................................................................................................353
FSCAN_RESBW_AUTO?..............................................................................................................................353
FSCAN_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT....................................................................................................................354
FSCAN_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT?..................................................................................................................354
FSCAN_TRACE_MODE................................................................................................................................354
FSCAN_TRACE_MODE?..............................................................................................................................354
FSINGLE........................................................................................................................................................297
GBAS:ATTMODE...........................................................................................................................................334
GBAS:ATTMODE?.........................................................................................................................................334
GBAS:BUFFER_RUNPAUSE........................................................................................................................334
GBAS:BUFFER_RUNPAUSE?......................................................................................................................334
GBAS:EVM_ANGLE_NORM......................................................................................................................... 335
GBAS:EVM_ANGLE_NORM?....................................................................................................................... 335
GBAS:EVM?.................................................................................................................................................. 337
GBAS:FAILEDMSGS?...................................................................................................................................338
GBAS:FMEAS?..............................................................................................................................................335
GBAS:FREQRF............................................................................................................................................. 335
GBAS:FREQRF?........................................................................................................................................... 335
GBAS:GBASBER?.........................................................................................................................................338
GBAS:GBASID?............................................................................................................................................ 338
GBAS:GETMDEF.......................................................................................................................................... 339
GBAS:GETMEAS.......................................................................................................................................... 339
GBAS:GRAPH_TOLOGG..............................................................................................................................341
GBAS:GRAPH_TOLOGG?............................................................................................................................341
GBAS:LEV?................................................................................................................................................... 336
GBAS:LOGSLOTS.........................................................................................................................................342
GBAS:MSG_TOLOGG.................................................................................................................................. 341
GBAS:MSG_TOLOGG?................................................................................................................................ 341
GBAS:PEAKLEV?..........................................................................................................................................342
GBAS:PPSLOCKED?....................................................................................................................................342
GBAS:RESETBER.........................................................................................................................................343
GBAS:SCREENVIEW ...................................................................................................................................336
GBAS:SCREENVIEW ?.................................................................................................................................336
GBAS:SEQN_SLOT...................................................................................................................................... 336
GBAS:SEQN_SLOT?.................................................................................................................................... 336
GBAS:STOPSTREAM................................................................................................................................... 343
GBAS:STREAM.............................................................................................................................................343
GBAS:VALIDMSGS?..................................................................................................................................... 344
GET_K2_1K0.................................................................................................................................................326
GET_K2_1K2.................................................................................................................................................327
GET_K3_1K0.................................................................................................................................................327
GET_K3_1K2.................................................................................................................................................327
GET_K4_1K0.................................................................................................................................................327
GET_K4_1K2.................................................................................................................................................327
GET_MEASFREQ......................................................................................................................................... 327
GET_ONE_AMFREQ _1_0........................................................................................................................... 328
GET_ONE_AMFREQ_1_2............................................................................................................................ 328
GET_ONE_AMMOD_1_0..............................................................................................................................328
GET_ONE_AMMOD_1_2..............................................................................................................................328
GET_ONE_SINAD _1_0................................................................................................................................328
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 407

GET_ONE_SINAD_1_2.................................................................................................................................328
GET_ONE_THD _1_0................................................................................................................................... 329
GET_ONE_THD_1_2.................................................................................................................................... 329
GET_THD_1K0..............................................................................................................................................329
GET_THD_1K2..............................................................................................................................................329
GET_TX1_AMFREQ_1_0..............................................................................................................................329
GET_TX1_AMFREQ_1_2..............................................................................................................................330
GET_TX1_AMMOD_1_0............................................................................................................................... 330
GET_TX1_AMMOD_1_2............................................................................................................................... 330
GET_TX1_LEVEL..........................................................................................................................................330
GET_TX1_MEASFREQ ................................................................................................................................330
GET_TX1_SINAD_1_0..................................................................................................................................330
GET_TX1_SINAD_1_2..................................................................................................................................331
GET_TX1_THD_1_0......................................................................................................................................331
GET_TX1_THD_1_2......................................................................................................................................331
GET_TX2_AMFREQ_1_0..............................................................................................................................331
GET_TX2_AMFREQ_1_2..............................................................................................................................331
GET_TX2_AMMOD_1_0............................................................................................................................... 332
GET_TX2_AMMOD_1_2............................................................................................................................... 332
GET_TX2_LEVEL..........................................................................................................................................332
GET_TX2_MEASFREQ ................................................................................................................................332
GET_TX2_SINAD_1_0..................................................................................................................................332
GET_TX2_SINAD_1_2..................................................................................................................................332
GET_TX2_THD_1_0......................................................................................................................................333
GET_TX2_THD_1_2......................................................................................................................................333
GETACTIVELIST........................................................................................................................................... 374
GETDATA_FROM_ACTIVELIST................................................................................................................... 374
GETDATADEF............................................................................................................................................... 378
GETDATASET............................................................................................................................................... 378
GETDLTIME?.................................................................................................................................................374
GETERRORLOG...........................................................................................................................................259
GETFREEMEMORY .....................................................................................................................................374
GETGPSGPBOD...........................................................................................................................................261
GETGPSGPGGA...........................................................................................................................................261
GETGPSGPGLL............................................................................................................................................261
GETGPSGPGSA........................................................................................................................................... 262
GETGPSGPGSV........................................................................................................................................... 262
GETGPSGPHDT........................................................................................................................................... 262
GETGPSGPRMC...........................................................................................................................................262
GETGPSGPTRF............................................................................................................................................262
GETGPSGPVBW...........................................................................................................................................262
GETGPSGPVTG........................................................................................................................................... 262
GETGPSGPXTE............................................................................................................................................263
GETGPSGPZDA............................................................................................................................................263
GETGPSUNDULATION ................................................................................................................................263
GETHOSTNAME........................................................................................................................................... 270
GETKALSTATUS........................................................................................................................................... 269
GETLISTDATA ..............................................................................................................................................375
GETLISTSIZE................................................................................................................................................375
GETMDEF..................................................................................................................................................... 244
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 408

GETMEAS..................................................................................................................................................... 243
GETNRPPOW .............................................................................................................................................. 248
GETNRPTYPE...............................................................................................................................................248
GETOPTIONS............................................................................................................................................... 259
GETTEMP......................................................................................................................................................259
GS..................................................................................................................................................................303
GS_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ............................................................................................................................. 285
GS_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ?........................................................................................................................... 285
GS_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ......................................................................................................................285
GS_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ?....................................................................................................................285
GS_BB_BW_KHZ..........................................................................................................................................285
GS_BB_BW_KHZ?........................................................................................................................................285
GS_BB_DC_V............................................................................................................................................... 295
GS_BB_LEV_V..............................................................................................................................................295
GS_BB_LEV_V..............................................................................................................................................295
GS_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV......................................................................................................................... 286
GS_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV?....................................................................................................................... 286
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ...............................................................................................................286
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ?.............................................................................................................286
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ.............................................................................................................................286
GS_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ?...........................................................................................................................286
GS_BB_WIDE1F........................................................................................................................................... 287
GS_BB_WIDE1F?......................................................................................................................................... 287
GS_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB................................................................................................................ 287
GS_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB?.............................................................................................................. 287
GS_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP.......................................................................................................................... 287
GS_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?........................................................................................................................ 287
GS_DEM_1F2F_BW......................................................................................................................................288
GS_DEM_1F2F_BW?....................................................................................................................................288
GS_DEM_ID_BW.......................................................................................................................................... 288
GS_DEM_ID_BW?........................................................................................................................................ 288
GS_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW............................................................................................................................... 288
GS_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW?............................................................................................................................. 288
GS_DEM_WIDE_BW.....................................................................................................................................289
GS_DEM_WIDE_BW?...................................................................................................................................289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F..................................................................................................................... 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F?................................................................................................................... 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN....................................................................................................... 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN?..................................................................................................... 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ.................................................................................................. 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ?................................................................................................ 289
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ...................................................................................................290
GS_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ?.................................................................................................290
GS_RFLF_INPUT..........................................................................................................................................290
GS_RFLF_INPUT?........................................................................................................................................290
GS_START_FINDCARRIER..........................................................................................................................291
GS_TRIG_EDGE...........................................................................................................................................291
GS_TRIG_EDGE...........................................................................................................................................291
GS_TRIG_SOURCE......................................................................................................................................291
GS_TRIG_SOURCE?....................................................................................................................................291
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 409

GSLLZ............................................................................................................................................................305
HELP?............................................................................................................................................................386
ID_CODE.......................................................................................................................................................349
ID_DASH_LENGTH ......................................................................................................................................301
ID_DOT_LENGTH ........................................................................................................................................ 301
ID_DOTDASH_GAP ..................................................................................................................................... 301
ID_F400_DASHLEN ..................................................................................................................................... 309
ID_F400_GAP................................................................................................................................................310
ID_F1300_DASHLEN.................................................................................................................................... 310
ID_F1300_DOTLEN.......................................................................................................................................310
ID_F1300_GAP..............................................................................................................................................310
ID_F3000_DOTLEN ......................................................................................................................................310
ID_F3000_GAP..............................................................................................................................................311
ID_LETTER_GAP .........................................................................................................................................301
ID_PERIOD....................................................................................................................................................302
IFSPECT_ATTMODE.................................................................................................................................... 356
IFSPECT_FREQ_SPAN................................................................................................................................ 356
IFSPECT_FREQ_SPAN?.............................................................................................................................. 356
IFSPECT_FREQRF....................................................................................................................................... 356
IFSPECT_FREQRF?..................................................................................................................................... 356
IFSPECT_GETSPECT.................................................................................................................................. 359
IFSPECT_GRID_YRANGE_DB.....................................................................................................................357
IFSPECT_GRID_YRANGE_DB?...................................................................................................................357
IFSPECT_REFLEVEL................................................................................................................................... 357
IFSPECT_REFLEVEL?................................................................................................................................. 357
IFSPECT_RES_BW.......................................................................................................................................357
IFSPECT_RES_BW?.....................................................................................................................................357
IFSPECT_RESBW_AUTO.............................................................................................................................358
IFSPECT_RESBW_AUTO?...........................................................................................................................358
IFSPECT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT.................................................................................................................359
IFSPECT_TRACE_AVRGCOUNT?...............................................................................................................359
IFSPECT_TRACE_MODE.............................................................................................................................358
IFSPECT_TRACE_MODE?...........................................................................................................................358
INV?...............................................................................................................................................................260
K2_90.............................................................................................................................................................297
K2_150...........................................................................................................................................................297
K3_90.............................................................................................................................................................297
K3_150...........................................................................................................................................................297
K4_90.............................................................................................................................................................297
K4_150...........................................................................................................................................................298
KALSCREEN................................................................................................................................................. 269
LA?.................................................................................................................................................................244
LA?.................................................................................................................................................................336
LASTID_TIME ...............................................................................................................................................302
LCLR..............................................................................................................................................................298
LCRS............................................................................................................................................................. 298
LLZ.................................................................................................................................................................303
LLZ_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ............................................................................................................................ 275
LLZ_BB_1F_OFFSETKHZ............................................................................................................................ 275
LLZ_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ.....................................................................................................................276
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 410

LLZ_BB_AF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ?...................................................................................................................276
LLZ_BB_BW_KHZ.........................................................................................................................................276
LLZ_BB_BW_KHZ?.......................................................................................................................................276
LLZ_BB_DC_V.............................................................................................................................................. 300
LLZ_BB_LEV_V.............................................................................................................................................300
LLZ_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV........................................................................................................................ 276
LLZ_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV?...................................................................................................................... 276
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ..............................................................................................................277
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_IDDIST_KHZ?............................................................................................................277
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ............................................................................................................................277
LLZ_BB_LOWIF_BW_KHZ?..........................................................................................................................277
LLZ_BB_VMAXPP_V.....................................................................................................................................300
LLZ_BB_WIDE1F.......................................................................................................................................... 277
LLZ_BB_WIDE1F?........................................................................................................................................ 277
LLZ_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB............................................................................................................... 278
LLZ_CARRIER_THRESHOLD_DB?............................................................................................................. 278
LLZ_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP......................................................................................................................... 278
LLZ_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?....................................................................................................................... 278
LLZ_DEM_1F2F_BW.....................................................................................................................................279
LLZ_DEM_1F2F_BW?...................................................................................................................................279
LLZ_DEM_ID_BW......................................................................................................................................... 278
LLZ_DEM_ID_BW?....................................................................................................................................... 278
LLZ_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW.............................................................................................................................. 278
LLZ_DEM_ID_WIDE_BW?............................................................................................................................ 278
LLZ_DEM_WIDE_BW....................................................................................................................................279
LLZ_DEM_WIDE_BW?..................................................................................................................................279
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F.................................................................................................................... 279
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_1F?.................................................................................................................. 279
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN...................................................................................................... 280
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_AUTOMAN?.................................................................................................... 280
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ................................................................................................. 280
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_LOWERFREQ?............................................................................................... 280
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ..................................................................................................280
LLZ_DEMFREQS_OFFSET_UPPERFREQ..................................................................................................280
LLZ_RFLF_INPUT.........................................................................................................................................281
LLZ_RFLF_INPUT?.......................................................................................................................................281
LLZ_START_FINDCARRIER.........................................................................................................................281
LLZ_TRIG_EDGE..........................................................................................................................................282
LLZ_TRIG_EDGE..........................................................................................................................................282
LLZ_TRIG_SOURCE.....................................................................................................................................282
LLZ_TRIG_SOURCE?...................................................................................................................................282
LO.................................................................................................................................................................. 270
M?..................................................................................................................................................................272
MARKSTREAM..............................................................................................................................................379
MB..................................................................................................................................................................272
MB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP.......................................................................................................................... 306
MB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?........................................................................................................................ 306
MB_DEM_BW................................................................................................................................................306
MB_DEM_BW?..............................................................................................................................................306
MB_TRIG_EDGE...........................................................................................................................................306
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 411

MB_TRIG_EDGE...........................................................................................................................................306
MB_TRIG_SOURCE......................................................................................................................................307
MB_TRIG_SOURCE?....................................................................................................................................307
MEASMODE..................................................................................................................................................303
MEASMODE?................................................................................................................................................303
MEASTIME.................................................................................................................................................... 245
MEASTIME?.................................................................................................................................................. 245
MI...................................................................................................................................................................272
MLOC.............................................................................................................................................................270
MODE_COM..................................................................................................................................................322
MODE_FFT....................................................................................................................................................360
MODE_FSCAN..............................................................................................................................................351
MODE_GBAS................................................................................................................................................ 336
MODE_GP.....................................................................................................................................................273
MODE_IFSPECT...........................................................................................................................................355
MODE_LOC...................................................................................................................................................273
MODE_MB.....................................................................................................................................................306
MODE_NDB...................................................................................................................................................345
MODE_SCOPE..............................................................................................................................................367
MODE_VOR.................................................................................................................................................. 313
MV..................................................................................................................................................................273
NDB_AMFREQ..............................................................................................................................................348
NDB_AMMOD................................................................................................................................................348
NDB_CARLEV_CHANGE..............................................................................................................................348
NDB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP........................................................................................................................ 346
NDB_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?...................................................................................................................... 346
NDB_DEM_DIST_BW................................................................................................................................... 346
NDB_DEM_DIST_BW?................................................................................................................................. 346
NDB_DEM_ID_BW........................................................................................................................................346
NDB_DEM_ID_BW?......................................................................................................................................346
NDB_EXTERNALATT_LFIN.......................................................................................................................... 346
NDB_EXTERNALATT_LFIN?........................................................................................................................ 346
NDB_IDFREQ_400_1020..............................................................................................................................349
NDB_K2_PCT................................................................................................................................................349
NDB_K3_PCT................................................................................................................................................349
NDB_K4_PCT................................................................................................................................................349
NDB_LFIN_IMPEDANCE.............................................................................................................................. 347
NDB_LFIN_IMPEDENCE?............................................................................................................................ 347
NDB_POWSUPPL_FC.................................................................................................................................. 349
NDB_THD_PCT.............................................................................................................................................350
NDB_UNIT_LEVEL........................................................................................................................................347
NDB_UNIT_LEVEL?......................................................................................................................................347
OPTIONGETCHECKED ............................................................................................................................... 260
PH..................................................................................................................................................................298
PH_90_90......................................................................................................................................................298
PH_150_150..................................................................................................................................................298
PPSSMA_TRIG_SOURCE?.......................................................................................................................... 249
RECIQ............................................................................................................................................................375
REMOTELOCK..............................................................................................................................................270
RESIDFM_90 ................................................................................................................................................299
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 412

RESIDFM_150 ..............................................................................................................................................299
RF.................................................................................................................................................................. 245
RF_MHZ_5DECIMALS.................................................................................................................................. 325
RF_MHZ_5DECIMALS?................................................................................................................................ 325
RF?................................................................................................................................................................ 245
RFCH.............................................................................................................................................................245
RLC................................................................................................................................................................270
SAVEACTIVELIST2USB................................................................................................................................376
SAVEDATA.....................................................................................................................................................260
SCLR............................................................................................................................................................. 299
SCOPE_ATTMODE....................................................................................................................................... 368
SCOPE_BB_AF_BW_KHZ............................................................................................................................368
SCOPE_BB_AF_BW_KHZ?..........................................................................................................................368
SCOPE_BB_IF_BW_KHZ............................................................................................................................. 368
SCOPE_BB_IF_BW_KHZ?........................................................................................................................... 368
SCOPE_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV.................................................................................................................. 369
SCOPE_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV?................................................................................................................ 369
SCOPE_FREQRF..........................................................................................................................................369
SCOPE_FREQRF?........................................................................................................................................369
SCOPE_GETMEAS.......................................................................................................................................372
SCOPE_IF_BW_KHZ.................................................................................................................................... 369
SCOPE_IF_BW_KHZ?.................................................................................................................................. 369
SCOPE_REFLEVEL......................................................................................................................................370
SCOPE_REFLEVEL?....................................................................................................................................370
SCOPE_RESBW_FIX_KHZ.......................................................................................................................... 370
SCOPE_RESBW_FIX_KHZ?........................................................................................................................ 370
SCOPE_RFLF_INPUT...................................................................................................................................370
SCOPE_RFLF_INPUT?.................................................................................................................................370
SCOPE_TIMEDIV_RF................................................................................................................................... 371
SCOPE_TIMEDIV_RF?................................................................................................................................. 371
SCOPE_TRIGLEVEL_RFPCT.......................................................................................................................371
SCOPE_TRIGLEVEL_RFPCT?.....................................................................................................................371
SCOPE_TRIGSLOPE....................................................................................................................................372
SCOPE_TRIGSLOPE?..................................................................................................................................372
SCRS.............................................................................................................................................................299
SD0................................................................................................................................................................299
SD1................................................................................................................................................................299
SELECTLISTPARAM.....................................................................................................................................376
SETACTIVELIST............................................................................................................................................377
SETATTMODE...............................................................................................................................................246
SETDLTIME................................................................................................................................................... 377
SETUP:AF_SOURCE_OUT.......................................................................................................................... 254
SETUP:ANALOG_OUT1............................................................................................................................... 254
SETUP:ANALOG_OUT2............................................................................................................................... 254
SETUP:AUDIOBW.........................................................................................................................................255
SETUP:BB_IN_COUPL................................................................................................................................. 249
SETUP:BB_IN_COUPL?............................................................................................................................... 249
SETUP:BB_IN_FACTOR............................................................................................................................... 250
SETUP:BB_IN_FACTOR?............................................................................................................................. 250
SETUP:BB_IN_RANGE.................................................................................................................................250
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 413

SETUP:BB_IN_RANGE?...............................................................................................................................250
SETUP:BB_SOURCE_OUT.......................................................................................................................... 255
SETUP:BOOTONPOWERUP........................................................................................................................267
SETUP:DATE.................................................................................................................................................268
SETUP:DDM_RANGE_GS ...........................................................................................................................256
SETUP:DDM_RANGE_LLZ...........................................................................................................................256
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT................................................................................................................................... 256
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_AGC......................................................................................................................... 246
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_AGC......................................................................................................................... 257
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_AGC?....................................................................................................................... 257
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_COUPLING.............................................................................................................. 247
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_COUPLING.............................................................................................................. 257
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT_COUPLING?............................................................................................................ 257
SETUP:DEMOD_OUT?................................................................................................................................. 256
SETUP:DEMODAMFM.................................................................................................................................. 246
SETUP:ENERGYSAVER...............................................................................................................................267
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX1....................................................................................................................... 247
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX1?..................................................................................................................... 247
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX2....................................................................................................................... 247
SETUP:EXTERNALATT_RX2?..................................................................................................................... 247
SETUP:GBAS_PPS_SOURCE?................................................................................................................... 337
SETUP:GBAS_PPS_SOURCE?................................................................................................................... 337
SETUP:GETERRORLOG ............................................................................................................................. 259
SETUP:GPS_BAUDRATE............................................................................................................................. 263
SETUP:GPS_BAUDRATE?........................................................................................................................... 263
SETUP:GPSREF........................................................................................................................................... 265
SETUP:INPUT............................................................................................................................................... 248
SETUP:INPUT?............................................................................................................................................. 248
SETUP:NTPSERVER.................................................................................................................................... 271
SETUP:NTPSERVER?.................................................................................................................................. 271
SETUP:PPS_SYNC.......................................................................................................................................264
SETUP:PPS_SYNC?.....................................................................................................................................264
SETUP:REFLAT............................................................................................................................................ 265
SETUP:REFLAT?.......................................................................................................................................... 265
SETUP:REFLONG.........................................................................................................................................265
SETUP:REFLONG?.......................................................................................................................................265
SETUP:SETGPSBAUDRATE........................................................................................................................ 263
SETUP:SETGPSDELAY................................................................................................................................264
SETUP:SETGPSINTERFACE....................................................................................................................... 263
SETUP:SPEAKER.........................................................................................................................................257
SETUP:TIME................................................................................................................................................. 268
SETUP:TIMESYNC....................................................................................................................................... 266
SETUP:TIMESYNC?..................................................................................................................................... 266
SETUP:UNIT:BARGRAPH.............................................................................................................................251
SETUP:UNIT:BARGRAPH?...........................................................................................................................251
SETUP:UNIT:DDM.........................................................................................................................................251
SETUP:UNIT:DDM?.......................................................................................................................................251
SETUP:UNIT:ILSPHASE............................................................................................................................... 251
SETUP:UNIT:ILSPHASE?............................................................................................................................. 251
SETUP:UNIT:POLARITYDDM....................................................................................................................... 252
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 414

SETUP:UNIT:POLARITYDDM?..................................................................................................................... 252
SETUP:UNIT:SDM......................................................................................................................................... 252
SETUP:UNIT:SDM?....................................................................................................................................... 252
SETUP:UNIT:UPPERFREQ...........................................................................................................................253
SETUP:UNIT:UPPERFREQ?.........................................................................................................................253
SETUP:UNIT:VORDIRECTION..................................................................................................................... 253
SETUP:UNIT:VORDIRECTION?................................................................................................................... 253
SETUP:VOLUME...........................................................................................................................................257
SQUELCH......................................................................................................................................................258
SQUELCH?....................................................................................................................................................258
STARTKAL.....................................................................................................................................................269
STOPSTREAM.............................................................................................................................................. 379
STREAM........................................................................................................................................................378
SUBCARR_AM1K44......................................................................................................................................319
SUBCARR_AM1K50......................................................................................................................................320
SUBCARR_AM60HZ..................................................................................................................................... 320
SUBCARR_K2...............................................................................................................................................320
SUBCARR_K3...............................................................................................................................................320
SUBCARR_K4...............................................................................................................................................320
SUBCARR_K5...............................................................................................................................................321
THD_90..........................................................................................................................................................300
THD_150........................................................................................................................................................300
VER?..............................................................................................................................................................260
VIEW_COM................................................................................................................................................... 322
VIEW_COM?................................................................................................................................................. 322
VIEW_GS.......................................................................................................................................................282
VIEW_GS?.....................................................................................................................................................282
VIEW_LLZ......................................................................................................................................................283
VIEW_LLZ?....................................................................................................................................................283
VIEW_MB...................................................................................................................................................... 307
VIEW_MB?.................................................................................................................................................... 306
VIEW_NDB.................................................................................................................................................... 347
VIEW_NDB?.................................................................................................................................................. 347
VIEW_VOR....................................................................................................................................................313
VIEW_VOR?..................................................................................................................................................313
VOR_BB_BW_KHZ....................................................................................................................................... 313
VOR_BB_BW_KHZ?..................................................................................................................................... 313
VOR_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV.......................................................................................................................313
VOR_BB_LFIN_DCOFFSETV?.....................................................................................................................313
VOR_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP........................................................................................................................314
VOR_DEFAULT_FREQSTEP?......................................................................................................................314
VOR_DEM_AM_BW......................................................................................................................................314
VOR_DEM_AM_BW?....................................................................................................................................314
VOR_DEM_BEARFILTER............................................................................................................................. 314
VOR_DEM_BEARFILTER?........................................................................................................................... 314
VOR_DEM_BW............................................................................................................................................. 314
VOR_DEM_BW?........................................................................................................................................... 314
VOR_DEM_FM_BW...................................................................................................................................... 315
VOR_DEM_FM_BW?.................................................................................................................................... 315
VOR_DEMFREQS_OFFSET.........................................................................................................................315
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 415

VOR_DEMFREQS_OFFSET?.......................................................................................................................315
VOR_RFLF_INPUT....................................................................................................................................... 315
VOR_RFLF_INPUT?..................................................................................................................................... 315
VOR_TRIG_EDGE........................................................................................................................................ 316
VOR_TRIG_EDGE........................................................................................................................................ 316
VOR_TRIG_SOURCE................................................................................................................................... 316
VOR_TRIG_SOURCE?................................................................................................................................. 316
WAIT4EXE.....................................................................................................................................................268
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 416

R&S®EVSG1000 Index
Index
A G
Accessories ....................................................................... 35 GBAS
Adapter, 19'' ................................................................ 38 Basics ....................................................................... 171
Antenna ...................................................................... 36 Broadcast timing structure ........................................ 173
Antenna bag ............................................................... 37 Components ............................................................. 171
Display protection cover ............................................. 37 Correction message .................................................. 172
R&S EVS-Z3 ............................................................... 36 Data format ............................................................... 398
R&S EVS-Z4 ............................................................... 37 FAS data ................................................................... 173
R&S EVS-Z6 ............................................................... 37 Frequencies .............................................................. 172
R&S EVSG-Z1 ............................................................ 35 Message type 1 data ................................................ 399
R&S EVSG-Z2 ............................................................ 36 Message type 4 data ................................................ 400
R&S EVSG-Z7 ............................................................ 38 Message xml interface .............................................. 193
Transport case ............................................................ 36 Mode ......................................................................... 170
Weather protection bag ...............................................35 Recording data ......................................................... 219
Allocating the VDB to the time domain Specification ............................................................. 397
Principle .................................................................... 173 Getting started ................................................................... 18
Auto-calibration ............................................................... 234 Glide Path Angle (GPA) ...................................................173
B H
Battery Help ................................................................................... 18
Charge state ............................................................. 239 HW Status ....................................................................... 236
Beacon ............................................................................ 128
Brochures .......................................................................... 18 I
C ID Analysis
Dash Length ................................................ 73, 111, 131
Channel Addressing ........................................................ 242 Dot Length ................................................... 73, 111, 131
Common Settings Dot-Dash Gap ............................................. 73, 111, 131
Amplification .................................. 80, 96, 116, 126, 136 ID AM .......................................................... 73, 111, 132
Audio ......................................................................... 226 ID Frequency ...............................................73, 112, 132
Bandwidth ................................................... 81, 117, 127 ID Period ..................................................... 73, 111, 131
BW .............................................................. 81, 117, 127 Last ID ......................................................... 73, 111, 131
CH FREQ ...................................... 79, 95, 115, 125, 135 Letter Gap ................................................... 73, 111, 131
Display ...................................................................... 227 ILS Mode
Measurement Time ....................... 86, 97, 117, 127, 137 Localizer ............................................................... 54, 87
MTime ........................................... 86, 97, 117, 127, 137 Marker Beacon ........................................................... 87
Customer support ............................................................ 392 Initial configuration .................................................. 216, 217
Inventory ......................................................................... 238
D
K
Data Recorder
Format description .................................................... 398 Keypad
Data sheets ....................................................................... 18 Key layout ................................................................... 42
DDM 90-150 ................................................................ 67, 72 Keys
Default PRESET ........................................................... 216, 217
Restoring settings ............................................. 216, 217
Direct Addressing ............................................................ 242 L
E Landing Threshold Point (LTP) ........................................173
LOC ............................................................................. 54, 87
Energy Saver .................................................................. 233 Localizer ...................................................................... 54, 87
Error Log ......................................................................... 235 LVD-M safety information MAN signal_words TEMPLATE
.......................................................................................... 17
F
M
Factory defaults ............................................................... 217
Fictitious Threshold Point (FTP) ...................................... 173 Marker Beacon .................................................................. 87
Final Approach Segment (FAS) data 400 Hz Dash ............................................................... 93
Diagram .................................................................... 173 400 Hz Gap ................................................................. 93
see also FAS DB ....................................................... 173 1300 Hz Dash ............................................................. 93
Flight Path Alignment Point (FPAP) ................................ 173 1300 Hz Dot ................................................................ 93
Front Panel ........................................................................ 28 1300 Hz Gap ............................................................... 93
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 417

R&S®EVSG1000 Index
3000 Hz Dot ................................................................ 93 Time domain allocation

3000 Hz Gap ............................................................... 93 Principle .................................................................... 173
MB ..................................................................................... 87 Time slots
Message type 1 Synchronization ........................................................ 174
GBAS data ................................................................ 399 Timing
SCAT-I data ...............................................................401 GBAS ........................................................................ 173
Message type 4 Triggering
GBAS data ................................................................ 400 PPS ........................................................................... 174
SCAT-I data ...............................................................402
U
N
User manual ...................................................................... 18
NDB Mode ....................................................................... 128 UserPresets .................................................................... 215
O V
Open source acknowledgment (OSA) ............................... 19 VNC Viewe ........................................................................ 44
Options ............................................................................ 237 VOR
Mode ........................................................................... 97
P
PPS
Basics ....................................................................... 174
Duration .................................................................... 174
Triggering .................................................................. 174
Preset
Key .................................................................... 216, 217
Presettings ...................................................................... 215
R
Rear Panel ........................................................................ 33
Release notes ................................................................... 19
S
Safety instructions ............................................................. 18
SCAT-I
Data format ............................................................... 398
Message type 1 data ................................................ 401
Message type 4 data ................................................ 402
Specification ............................................................. 397
SCAT-I mode ................................................................... 170
SDM 90, 150 ..................................................................... 68
Settings
Factory defaults ........................................................ 217
Signal In
Correction ................................................................... 51
LF In Coupling ............................................ 84, 156, 164
LF In Range ................................................ 84, 156, 164
Source ........................................... 75, 83, 114, 152, 161
Status
Recorded data .......................................................... 398
Storing
Measurement settings .............................................. 215
Synchronization
PPS ........................................................................... 174
T
TCP/IP
DHCP ........................................................................ 231
Gateway .................................................................... 231
IP Address ................................................................ 231
Netmask .................................................................... 231
TDMA timing structure .................................................... 173
Terminal Area Path (TAP) ................................................173
Threshold Crossing Height (TCH) ................................... 173
User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 418

EVSG1000 UserManual en 06

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EVSG1000 UserManual en 06

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

R&S®EVSG1000

VHF/UHF Airnav/Com Analyzer

Furthermore, it covers the following options:

© 2020 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

1178.6227.02 | Version 06 | R&S®EVSG1000

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 3

2 Measurements and Results.................................................................48

3 Configuring the Input Signal and Measurement Mode.....................51

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 4

3.1 Input Signal Settings.................................................................................................. 51

4 Numeric Measurement Modes............................................................ 54

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 5

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 6

4.5.2 NDB Measurement and Results..................................................................................128

5 Graphic Measurement Modes........................................................... 139

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 7

5.4.4 Configuring the Amplitude (Y-Axis) for LF Input.......................................................... 163

6 GBAS/SCAT-I Mode (Options R&S EVSG-K4/-K5)...........................170

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 8

6.5.4 Format Description of Elements..................................................................................200

7 Power Sensor Support (Option R&S EVSG-K24)............................ 213

8 Data Management.............................................................................. 215

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 9

9 Common Instrument Settings...........................................................226

10 Remote Commands........................................................................... 242

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 10

10.3.4 Deprecated Commands...............................................................................................311

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 11

10.12.3.4 VOR Mode.................................................................................................................. 383

11 Maintenance, Storage and Disposal.................................................387

13 Contacting Customer Support..........................................................392

A ILS Channel Frequency List..............................................................393

B VOR Channel Frequency List............................................................395

D Format Description of GBAS and SCAT-I Data................................398

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 12

1.1 Safety Information

Where do I find safety information?

1.1.1 Safety Instructions

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 13

Lifting and carrying the product

Choosing the operating site

Setting up the product

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 14

Cleaning the product

Meaning of safety labels

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 15

Protective conductor terminal

Handling batteries safely

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 16

Using laser products

Warning: laser beam

Avoid exposure to direct or reflected laser beam.

Lasers are classified according to their potential risk.

1.1.2 Labels on the Product

Labels on the casing inform about:

1.1.3 Warning Messages in the Documentation

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 17

1.2 Documentation Overview

1.2.1 Getting Started Manual

1.2.2 User Manuals and Help

1.2.3 Printed Safety Instructions

1.2.4 Data Sheets and Brochures

User Manual 1178.6227.02 ─ 06 18

1.2.5 Release Notes and Open-Source Acknowledgment (OSA)